Ford - EXPLORER - Owners Manual - 2019 - 2019

2019 EXPLORER Owner’s Manual 2019 EXPLORER Owner’s Manual owner.ford.com ford.ca July 2018 First Printing Litho in U.S.A. KL2J 19A321 AA The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted. © Ford Motor Company 2018 All rights reserved. Part Number: 201807 20180727143134 California Proposition 65 WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling. Table of Contents Introduction Supplementary Restraints System About This Manual ..........................................7 Symbols Glossary ............................................7 Data Recording .................................................9 Perchlorate ........................................................11 Ford Credit .........................................................11 Replacement Parts Recommendation ............................................................................12 Special Notices ...............................................12 Mobile Communications Equipment ............................................................................13 Export Unique Options ................................14 Principle of Operation .................................44 Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................45 Front Passenger Sensing System ...........46 Side Airbags ....................................................48 Passenger Knee Airbag ...............................49 Safety Canopy™ ...........................................49 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ........51 Airbag Disposal ..............................................52 Keys and Remote Controls General Information on Radio Frequencies .................................................53 Remote Control .............................................53 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control ..........................................................................59 Environment Protecting the Environment .......................15 At a Glance Instrument Panel Overview .......................16 MyKey™ Child Safety General Information ......................................18 Child Seats ........................................................19 Installing Child Restraints ..........................20 Booster Seats .................................................29 Child Restraint Positioning .........................31 Child Safety Locks .........................................33 Principle of Operation .................................60 Creating a MyKey ...........................................61 Clearing All MyKeys ......................................62 Checking MyKey System Status ..............62 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems ........................................................63 MyKey — Troubleshooting .........................63 Seatbelts Doors and Locks Locking and Unlocking ................................65 Keyless Entry ..................................................68 Principle of Operation .................................35 Fastening the Seatbelts .............................36 Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................39 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime ............................................................40 Seatbelt Reminder .......................................40 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance ...............................................42 Seatbelt Extension .......................................42 Liftgate Manual Liftgate ..............................................70 Power Liftgate ..................................................71 Security Passive Anti-Theft System ........................75 Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................76 Personal Safety System™ Personal Safety System™ .........................43 1 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Table of Contents Sun Visors ........................................................94 Moonroof .........................................................94 Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Manual Adjustable Steering Column ..........................................................77 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Power Adjustable Steering Column ..........................................................77 Audio Control ..................................................79 Voice Control ...................................................79 Cruise Control ................................................80 Information Display Control .....................80 Heated Steering Wheel ..............................80 Instrument Cluster Gauges ..............................................................96 Warning Lamps and Indicators ...............99 Audible Warnings and Indicators ..........102 Information Displays General Information ...................................104 Information Messages ................................115 Pedals Climate Control Adjusting the Pedals .....................................81 Manual Climate Control ............................129 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/CD .........................130 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Premium AM/FM/CD .................132 Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate .........................................................................134 Rear Passenger Climate Controls .........136 Heated Rear Window .................................137 Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................137 Cabin Air Filter ..............................................138 Remote Start ................................................138 Wipers and Washers Windshield Wipers ........................................82 Autowipers ......................................................82 Windshield Washers ....................................83 Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........83 Lighting General Information ....................................84 Lighting Control .............................................84 Autolamps .......................................................85 Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................85 Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................86 Daytime Running Lamps ...........................86 Automatic High Beam Control .................87 Front Fog Lamps ...........................................88 Direction Indicators ......................................88 Interior Lamps ................................................88 Ambient Lighting ..........................................89 Seats Sitting in the Correct Position .................139 Head Restraints ...........................................139 Manual Seats ................................................142 Power Seats ...................................................143 Memory Function ........................................146 Rear Seats ......................................................147 Heated Seats ................................................154 Climate Controlled Seats .........................155 Windows and Mirrors Garage Door Opener Power Windows ............................................90 Global Opening ...............................................91 Exterior Mirrors ................................................91 Interior Mirror ..................................................94 Universal Garage Door Opener ...............157 2 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Table of Contents Auxiliary Power Points ...............................162 Parking Brake ................................................194 Hill Start Assist .............................................194 Storage Compartments Traction Control Center Console .............................................164 Overhead Console ......................................165 Principle of Operation ...............................196 Using Traction Control ..............................196 Starting and Stopping the Engine Stability Control Auxiliary Power Points Principle of Operation ................................197 Using Stability Control ..............................198 General Information ...................................166 Ignition Switch ..............................................166 Keyless Starting ...........................................166 Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................167 Engine Block Heater ...................................170 Terrain Control Using Terrain Control .................................199 Using Hill Descent Control .....................200 Fuel and Refueling Parking Aids Safety Precautions ......................................172 Fuel Quality - Gasoline ...............................172 Fuel Quality - E85 ........................................173 Fuel Filler Funnel Location .......................174 Running Out of Fuel ....................................174 Refueling .........................................................176 Fuel Consumption .......................................179 Principle of Operation ...............................202 Rear Parking Aid ..........................................202 Front Parking Aid ........................................203 Side Sensing System ................................204 Active Park Assist .......................................206 Rear View Camera .......................................212 180 Degree Camera ....................................215 Engine Emission Control Cruise Control Emission Law ...............................................180 Catalytic Converter ......................................181 Principle of Operation ................................217 Using Cruise Control ...................................217 Using Adaptive Cruise Control ...............218 Transmission Driving Aids Automatic Transmission ..........................184 Driver Alert .....................................................225 Lane Keeping System ...............................226 Blind Spot Information System ..............231 Cross Traffic Alert .......................................232 Steering ..........................................................235 Pre-Collision Assist ....................................236 Four-Wheel Drive Principle of Operation ...............................188 Using Four-Wheel Drive ...........................188 Brakes General Information ...................................193 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes .........................................................................194 Load Carrying Rear Under Floor Storage ........................239 3 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Table of Contents Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) ........................................................................269 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only) ........................................................................269 Cargo Nets .....................................................239 Luggage Covers ...........................................240 Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............240 Load Limit .......................................................241 Fuses Towing Fuse Specification Chart ...........................271 Changing a Fuse .........................................280 Towing a Trailer ............................................247 Trailer Sway Control ..................................248 Recommended Towing Weights ..........248 Essential Towing Checks .........................250 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 2.3L EcoBoost™ ......................................252 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™ ..........252 Maintenance General Information ..................................282 Opening and Closing the Hood .............282 Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................283 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec ........................................................................284 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ........................................................................285 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ........................................................................286 Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™ ...............................................287 Engine Oil Check .........................................287 Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................288 Engine Coolant Check ..............................289 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....................................293 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™ ..........293 Brake Fluid Check .......................................295 Power Steering Fluid Check ...................296 Washer Fluid Check ...................................296 Changing the 12V Battery ........................296 Checking the Wiper Blades ....................298 Changing the Wiper Blades ....................298 Adjusting the Headlamps .......................299 Changing a Bulb .........................................300 Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............304 Driving Hints Breaking-In ....................................................255 Economical Driving ....................................255 Driving Through Water ..............................256 Floor Mats .....................................................256 Roadside Emergencies Roadside Assistance .................................258 Hazard Flashers ..........................................259 Fuel Shutoff ..................................................259 Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................260 Post-Crash Alert System .........................262 Transporting the Vehicle ..........................262 Towing Points ...............................................263 Customer Assistance Getting the Services You Need .............264 In California (U.S. Only) ...........................265 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................266 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only) ......................267 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada .......................................................267 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature ........................................................................269 Vehicle Care General Information ..................................306 4 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Table of Contents Cleaning Products .....................................306 Cleaning the Exterior ................................306 Waxing ...........................................................308 Cleaning the Engine ..................................308 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades .......................................................................308 Cleaning the Interior ..................................309 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens ......................309 Cleaning Leather Seats .............................310 Repairing Minor Paint Damage ................311 Cleaning the Wheels ...................................311 Vehicle Storage ..............................................311 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ...............................................355 Bulb Specification Chart .........................360 Audio System General Information ..................................362 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/ CD .................................................................363 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/ FM/CD ........................................................364 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC ...........................................................366 Digital Radio .................................................370 Satellite Radio ..............................................372 USB Port .........................................................375 Media Hub .....................................................375 Wheels and Tires General Information ...................................314 Tire Care ..........................................................316 Using Summer Tires ..................................329 Using Snow Chains ....................................329 Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........330 Changing a Road Wheel ..........................334 Technical Specifications ..........................338 SYNC™ General Information ..................................376 Using Voice Recognition ..........................378 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ..........380 SYNC™ Applications and Services ......392 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player ........................................................................397 SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................406 Capacities and Specifications Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .......................................................................340 Engine Specifications - 3.5L Duratec .......................................................................340 Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .........................................................................341 Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....342 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec ............343 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ .....344 Vehicle Identification Number ...............345 Vehicle Certification Label ......................346 Transmission Code Designation ...........346 Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™ ...............................................347 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Duratec ........................................................351 SYNC™ 3 General Information ...................................414 Home Screen ...............................................426 Using Voice Recognition ...........................427 Entertainment .............................................434 Climate ...........................................................444 Phone .............................................................446 Navigation .....................................................452 Apps ................................................................460 Settings ..........................................................463 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................477 Accessories Accessories ....................................................491 5 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Table of Contents Ford Protect Ford Protect .................................................493 Scheduled Maintenance General Maintenance Information ......495 Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........498 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance .............................................501 Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........503 Appendices Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............514 End User License Agreement .................516 Declaration of Conformity .......................542 Type Approvals ............................................542 6 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. E154903 A Right-hand side. B Left-hand side. SYMBOLS GLOSSARY These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Air conditioning system E162384 Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to the vehicle you have purchased. E231157 Air conditioning system lubricant type Anti-lock braking system Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used in different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. Battery Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and regulations. Battery acid Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle. Brake fluid - non petroleum based This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Brake system 7 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction Brake system Flammable E231160 E270480 Cabin air filter Front airbag E67017 Check fuel cap Front fog lamps Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment Child seat tether anchor Hazard flashers Cruise control Heated rear window Do not open when hot Windshield defrosting system Engine air filter Interior luggage compartment release Engine coolant Jack Engine coolant temperature Keep out of reach of children E71340 E161353 Lighting control Engine oil Low tire pressure warning Explosive gas Maintain correct fluid level Fan warning Note operating instructions Fasten seatbelt E71880 8 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction Horn control Shield the eyes E270945 E167012 Panic alarm Stability control E138639 Hill descent control Parking aid E139213 E163957 Trail control Parking brake E272858 Windshield wiping system Power steering fluid E270969 Windshield wash and wipe Power windows front/rear Power window lockout DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Requires registered technician Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada in Canada), and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic information for vehicle improvement or with other information we may have about you, (for example, your contact information), to offer you products or services that may interest you. Data may be provided to our service providers such E231159 Safety alert See Owner's Manual See Service Manual E231158 Service engine soon Passenger airbag activated E270849 Passenger airbag deactivated E270850 Side airbag 9 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The event data recorder is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. as part suppliers that may help diagnose malfunctions, and who are similarly obligated to protect data. We retain this data only as long as necessary to perform these functions or to comply with law. We may provide information where required in response to official requests to law enforcement or other government authorities or third parties acting with lawful authority or court order, and such information may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use connected apps and services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used to provide services to you, personalizing your experience, troubleshoot, and to improve products and services and offer you products and services that may interest you, where permitted by law. For Canada only, for more information, please review the Ford of Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data storage and use of service providers in other jurisdictions who may be subject to legal requirements in Canada, the United States and other countries applicable to them, for example, lawful requirements to disclose personal information to governmental authorities in those countries. See SYNC™ (page 376). The event data recorder in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the brake pedal; and • How fast the vehicle was traveling; and • Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel. This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Note: Event data recorder data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the event data recorder under normal driving conditions and no personal data or information (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the event data recorder data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Event Data Recording This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle; To read data recorded by an event data recorder, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the event data recorder is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have such special equipment, can read 10 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not activate the service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions and Information, Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™ (page 376). the information if they have access to the vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. PERCHLORATE Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and remote control batteries may contain perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies to SYNC or its features, please note the following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 376). For more information visit: Web Address www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate FORD CREDIT US Only Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for your business. We offer a number of convenient ways for you to contact us, and to manage your account. Call 1-800-727-7000. Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel information”), only to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do not want For more information about Ford Credit and access to Account Manager, go to www.ford.com/finance. 11 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction Warranty on Replacement Parts REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford Warranty may not cover damage caused to your vehicle as a result of failed non-Ford parts. For additional information, refer to the terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. We have built your vehicle to the highest standards using quality parts. We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair. You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the Warranty Manual that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Manual. One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides years of service is to have it maintained in line with our recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed in this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these specifications. Special Instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. Collision Repairs WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and dent resistance. During vehicle development we validate that these parts deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts. WARNING: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. 12 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. WARNING: Do not connect wireless plug-in devices to the data link connector. Unauthorized third parties could gain access to vehicle data and impair the performance of safety related systems. Only allow repair facilities that follow our service and repair instructions to connect their equipment to the data link connector. Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing package. Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Your vehicle does not have the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package. Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming services. Installing an aftermarket device that uses the DLC during normal driving for purposes such as remote insurance company monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to other devices or entities, or altering the performance of the vehicle, may cause interference with or even damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will not cover damage caused by an aftermarket plug-in device. MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility Type Vehicles WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death. 13 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Introduction communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and portable two-way radios. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. 14 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Environment PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT You should play your part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim. For details about Ford Motor Company's sustainability progress and initiatives visit: Web Address www.sustainability.ford.com 15 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing At a Glance INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW E192491 A Air vents. B Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 88). High beam. See Lighting Control (page 84). C Information display controls. See Information Display Control (page 80). D Instrument cluster. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 99). E Wiper lever. See Wipers and Washers (page 82). F 180 degree camera. See 180 Degree Camera (page 215). 16 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing G Parking aid switch. See Parking Aids (page 202). H Information and entertainment display. I Hazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Flashers (page 259). J Audio unit. See Audio System (page 362). K Climate controls. See Climate Control (page 129). L Heated rear window switch. See Heated Rear Window (page 137). At a Glance M Ignition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 166). See Keyless Starting (page 166). N Voice control. See Voice Control (page 79). Audio control. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 77). O Horn. P Steering wheel adjustment. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page 77). Q Cruise control buttons. See Using Cruise Control (page 217). R Power liftgate release button. See Power Liftgate (page 71). S Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 84). 17 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION (CPST) to make sure that you properly install the child restraint in your vehicle and that you consult your pediatrician to make sure you have a child restraint appropriate for your child. To locate a child restraint fitting station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain children in child restraints made especially for their height, age and weight, may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and other safety organizations, base their recommendations for child restraints on probable child height, age and weight thresholds, or on the minimum requirements of the law. We recommend that you check with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician WARNING: On hot days, the temperature inside the vehicle can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. 18 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size, height, weight, or age Infants or toddlers Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or younger). Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat). Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Use a belt-positioning booster seat. Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than Larger children 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer). • • • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the United States and Canada. Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. See Front Passenger Sensing System (page 46). Recommended restraint type Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest, and seatback upright. CHILD SEATS E142594 Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler seat) for Infants, toddlers and children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally four-years-old or younger). 19 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety • INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS Using Lap and Shoulder Belts • WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. • • WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child restraint and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. Place the vehicle seat upon which the child restraint will be installed in the upright position. For second-row seating positions, adjust the recliner slightly to improve child restraint fit. If needed, remove the head restraints. For third-row seating positions, stow the head restraints to improve child restraint fit. See Head Restraints (page 139). Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip. Perform the following steps when installing the child restraint with combination lap and shoulder belts: Note: Although the child restraint illustrated is a forward facing child restraint, the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child restraint. WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. Note: The lock-off device on some child restraints may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the lock-off device. In some instances these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with seatbelt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip. When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: • Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that seating position. • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. 20 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Standard Seatbelts E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. E142528 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. E142529 2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue. E142531 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 21 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle provides extra help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). E142875 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until you pull all of the belt out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E142534 10. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. E142533 22 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Inflatable Seatbelts E142530 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. E142528 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. E146523 E146522 2. After positioning the child safety seat in the proper seating position, grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together behind the belt tongue. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 23 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety 7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. E146524 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the lap portion of the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward until you pull all of the belt out. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. E146525 8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Force the seat down with extra weight, for example, by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling down on the lap belt in order to force slack from the belt. This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that exists once you add the extra weight of the child to the child restraint. It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child restraint to your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt. 9. Attach the tether strap (if the child restraint is equipped). Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks the child restraint for installation. The ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to move freely is normal, even after the lap belt has been put into the automatic locking mode. Note: The lock-off device on some child restraints may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint regarding the necessary and proper use of the lock-off device. In some instances, these devices have been provided only for use in vehicles with seatbelt systems that would otherwise require a locking clip. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 24 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint, and depending on the child restraint design, you may block access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure occupants only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. E142534 10. The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors where the seat backrest and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor behind that seating position. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper installation. LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach the child restraint. However, you can still use the seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For forward-facing child restraints, you must also attach the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child restraint. We recommend checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. In Canada, check with Transport Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic. Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child restraint installation at the seating positions marked with the child restraint symbol. WARNING: Do not attach two child safety restraints to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety restraint attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. 25 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child restraint only to the anchors shown. Second-Row Bucket Seats and Third-Row Passenger Side Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating Use) WARNING: The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm) center to center. Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child restraint manufacturer's instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle. E190825 Second-Row Bench Seats and Third-Row Passenger Side The lower anchors at the center of the second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in (52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm) center to center. You cannot install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at the center seating position. You can only use LATCH compatible child restraints (with attachments on belt webbing) at this seating position provided that the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions permit use with the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a child restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent child restraint is attached to that anchor. E190826 Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the child restraint from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to your vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do this for a proper installation. E144054 The LATCH anchors are at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat backrest below the symbols as shown. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions to properly install a child restraint with LATCH attachments. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps. See Using Tether Straps later in this chapter. 26 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats Second-Row Bench Seats and Third-Row Passenger Side When used in combination, either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child restraint. Using Tether Straps E190828 Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether anchors: Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child restraint off your vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child restraint. Keeping the child restraint just touching your vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. Contact the manufacturer of your child restraint for information about ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle. Once you install the child safety seat using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top tether strap. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): Second -Row Bucket Seats and Third-Row Passenger Side E190829 E190827 27 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Placement of the Tether Strap • Second row outboard seat positions: Route the child safety seat tether strap over the seat backrest, under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. If needed, remove the head restraint to improve the fit of the child safety seat or tether strap. • Second row center seat positions: Route the child safety seat tether strap over the top of the head restraint. If needed, remove the head restraint to improve the fit of the child safety seat or tether strap. See Head Restraints (page 139). • Third row seat position: Route the child safety seat tether strap over the seat backrest, under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts. If needed, fold the head restraint down to improve the fit of the child safety seat or tether strap. See Head Restraints (page 139). E190833 4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. If your child restraint system has a tether strap, and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, we also recommend its use. 1. Route the tether strap. 2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. 3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. The tether hook may be twisted ½ turn to improve installation. If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a crash. Second-Row Bucket Seats (40/40) E190830 28 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Second-Row Bench Seats (60/40) E190831 Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides may not accommodate the shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt. Third-Row Seats Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four (4) and less than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). E190832 Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge of the floor are not tether anchors. Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat: BOOSTER SEATS WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. 29 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield. If a vehicle seating position has a low seat backrest or no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child's head (as measured at the tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat backrest or head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back booster seat. E142595 • • • • • Can the child sit all the way back against their vehicle seat backrest with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion? Can the child sit without slouching? Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? E70710 • Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt. If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child's head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. Types of Booster Seats Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child's hips. E68924 • High back booster seats Backless booster seats 30 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety E142596 E142597 If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer's instructions. WARNING: Properly secure children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. If you are unable to properly secure all children in a rear seating position, properly secure the largest child on the front seat. If you must use a forward facing child restraint on the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death. CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child's size, height, weight, or age. Follow WARNING: Do not place a rearward facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 31 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety the child restraint manufacturer's instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child's height, age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death. WARNING: Properly secure child restraints or booster seats when they are not in use. They could become projectiles in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not allow a passenger to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. WARNING: Do not put the shoulder section of the seatbelt or allow the child to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt under their arm or behind their back. Failure to follow this instruction could reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or death in a crash. WARNING: Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child's height. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 32 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Child Safety Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X Restraint Type Combined Weight of Child and Child Restraint LATCH (Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor) LATCH (Lower Anchors Only) Rear facing Up to 65 lb child (29.5 kg) restraint Seatbelt and Top Tether Anchor Seatbelt and LATCH (Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor) X X Rear facing Over 65 lb child (29.5 kg) restraint Forward facing child restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) Forward facing child restraint Over 65 lb (29.5 kg) Seatbelt Only X X Note: The child restraint must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Seats (page 139). CHILD SAFETY LOCKS When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. 33 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing X X X X Child Safety E112197 The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Left-Hand Side Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise to unlock. Right-Hand Side Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise to unlock. 34 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seatbelts PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly made up of one buckle and one tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for more than one person. WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. WARNING: Children must always be properly restrained. WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a crash. WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. All seating positions in your vehicle have lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. The seatbelt system consists of: • Lap and shoulder seatbelts. • Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking mode, (except driver seatbelt and rear inflatable seatbelt). • Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions. • Seatbelt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions. • Belt tension sensor at the front outboard passenger seating position. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. E71880 • 35 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seatbelt warning light and chime. Seatbelts E67017 • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. The seatbelt pretensioners and rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers. The seatbelt pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the seatbelts firmly against the occupant’s body when activated. This helps increase the effectiveness of the seatbelts. In frontal crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags. E142588 2. To unfasten, press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy FASTENING THE SEATBELTS WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright and properly fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of the seatbelt snugly and low across the hips. Position the shoulder portion of the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant women must follow this practice. See the following figure. Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. E142587 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you securely fasten the tongue in the buckle. E142590 36 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seatbelts small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear seat backrest or push the seat backrest cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small length of webbing back toward the stowed position. Pregnant women should always wear their seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt low across the hips below the belly and worn as tight as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt to cross the middle of the shoulder and the center of the chest. Automatic Locking Mode Seatbelt Locking Modes In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically pre-locks. The belt still retracts to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver seatbelt. WARNING: If your vehicle is involved in a crash, have the seatbelts and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use this mode when you install a child safety seat, except a booster, in the passenger front or rear seating positions. Properly restrain children 12 years old and under in a rear seating position whenever possible. See Child Safety (page 18). All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive locking mode. The front outboard passenger and rear seatbelts have both the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the automatic locking mode. How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Vehicle Sensitive Mode Non-Inflatable Seatbelts This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination seatbelts lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a E142591 1. 37 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. Seatbelts Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped) 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until you pull the entire belt out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Rear Outermost Inflatable Seatbelts (Second Row Only–If Equipped) The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the second-row outermost seating positions. Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are compatible with most infant and child safety car seats and belt positioning booster seats when you properly install them. This is because they are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a slower rate than traditional airbags. After inflation, the shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool to the touch. E146363 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull upward until you pull the entire belt out. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking mode. The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the following: • An inflatable bag in the shoulder seatbelt webbing. • Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic locking mode. • The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front seatbelts. • Impact sensors in various parts of the vehicle. How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. How does the rear inflatable seatbelt system work? WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 38 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seatbelts The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes, side impact crashes and rollovers. The fact that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The rear inflatable seatbelts function like standard restraints in everyday usage. SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT E146364 WARNING: Position the seatbelt height adjuster so that the seatbelt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce its effectiveness and increase the risk of injury in a crash. During a crash of sufficient force, the inflatable belt inflates from inside the webbing. E146365 The fully inflated seatbelt's increased diameter more effectively holds the occupant in the appropriate seating position, and spreads crash forces over more area of the body than regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on the chest and helps control head and neck motion for passengers. E201573 1. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. 2. Slide the adjuster up to raise the belt. Press the button and slide it down to lower the belt. 39 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seatbelts This lamp illuminates and an indicator chime will sound if the E71880 driver seatbelt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on. SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND INDICATOR CHIME Conditions of operation If Then The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and the ignition switch is turned to the on posithe indicator chime sounds for a few tion... seconds. The driver seatbelt is buckled while the warning lamp is illuminated and the indicator chime is sounding... The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime turn off. The driver seatbelt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position... The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator chime remain off. The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid the system turning on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you place on the front passenger seat, only the front seat passengers receive warnings as determined by the front passenger sensing system. SEATBELT REMINDER Belt-Minder™ This feature supplements the seatbelt warning function by providing additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the seatbelt warning light when you are in the driver seat or you have a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is unbuckled. If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings for about five minutes) for one passenger (driver or front passenger), the other passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder feature to turn on. 40 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seatbelts If Then You and the front seat passenger buckle The Belt-Minder feature will not activate. your seatbelts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature activates, the seatbelt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your seatbelts. The seatbelt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on... The Belt-Minder feature activates, the seatbelt warning light illuminates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger buckle your seatbelts. Before following the procedure, make sure that: • The parking brake is set. • The transmission is in park (P). • The ignition is off. • The driver and front passenger seatbelts are unbuckled. Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder Feature WARNING: While the system allows you to switch it off, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving a crash. We recommend you leave the system switched on. To reduce the risk of injury, do not switch the system on or off while driving your vehicle. 1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the vehicle. 2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light turns off (about 1 minute). After Step 2, wait an additional 5 seconds before proceeding with Step 3. Once you start Step 3, you must complete the procedure within 20 seconds. 3. For the seating position you are switching off, buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt four times at a moderate speed, ending in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light turns on. Note: The driver and front passenger warnings switch on and off independently. When you perform this procedure for one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process. Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before proceeding with the programming procedure. 41 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seatbelts 4. While the seatbelt warning light is on, buckle and then unbuckle the seatbelt. After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light flashes for confirmation. • This will switch the feature off for that seating position if it is currently on. • This will switch the feature on for that seating position if it is currently off. SEATBELT EXTENSION WARNING: Persons who fit into the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an extension. Unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of a crash. CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT MAINTENANCE WARNING: Only use extensions provided free of charge by Ford Motor Company dealers. The dealer will provide an extension designed specifically for this vehicle, model year and seating position. The use of an extension intended for another vehicle, model year or seating position may not offer you the full protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt restraint system. Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child restraint systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the vehicle seatbelts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), rear inflatable seatbelts (if equipped), child restraint LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. WARNING: Never use seatbelt extensions to install child restraints. WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt extension with an inflatable seatbelt. WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the belt across the torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to reach. If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fasten the seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an extension that is compatible with the seatbelts is available free of charge from Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford seatbelt extensions made by the original equipment seatbelts manufacturer should be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your extension is compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint system. We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning the Interior (page 309). 42 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Personal Safety System™ How Does the Personal Safety System Work? This system provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system analyzes different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations. The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of the safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the restraints control module may deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or both stages of the dual-stage airbags based on crash severity and occupant conditions. Your vehicle's Personal Safety System consists of: • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. • Front seat outermost seatbelts with pretensioners, energy management retractors (first row only) and seatbelt usage sensors. • Driver seat position sensor. • Front passenger sensing system. • Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp. • Front crash severity sensors. • Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. • Restraint system warning light and tone. • The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front seatbelt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, front passenger sensing system and indicator lights. 43 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. To reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them after inflation. WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the seatbelts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag. WARNING: Do not place your arms on the airbag cover or through the steering wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal. WARNING: Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. Objects could become projectiles during airbag deployment or in a sudden stop. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child restraint is installed all the way back. 44 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. E151127 The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near frontal crashes. The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of: • Driver and passenger airbag modules. • Front passenger sensing system. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required. DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 51). WARNING: Do not place your arms on the airbag cover or through the steering wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment WARNING: Keep the areas in front of the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix anything to or over the airbag covers. Objects could become projectiles during airbag deployment or in a sudden stop. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's chest and the driver airbag module. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position. WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child restraint is installed all the way back. 45 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM WARNING: Even with advanced restraints systems, properly restrain children 12 and under in a rear seating position. Failure to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. Children and Airbags WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child restraint. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon which the child restraint is installed all the way back. WARNING: Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system. This could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger seat and seatbelt to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. E142846 Children must always be properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a crash. E181984 46 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag status indicator that illuminates indicating that the front passenger frontal airbag is either on (enabled) or off (disabled). The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat. The indicators are in the center stack of the instrument panel. • Note: The indicators illuminate briefly when you first switch the ignition on to confirm they are functional. The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology, parents are strongly encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. • • When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate), the airbag on indicator illuminates and remains illuminated. If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator is lit, it is possible that the person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: • Switch the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seat backrest in the full upright position. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. • Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This allows the system to detect that person and enables the passenger frontal airbag. • If the airbag off indicator remains lit even after this, advise the person to ride in the rear seat. When the front passenger sensing system disables (will not inflate) the front passenger frontal airbag, the airbag off indicator illuminates and stays lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. If you have installed the child restraint and the airbag on indicator illuminates, switch the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions. Occupant Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Passenger Airbag Empty OFF: Lit Disabled ON: Unlit Child OFF: Lit Adult OFF: Unlit Disabled ON: Unlit ON: Lit 47 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Enabled Supplementary Restraints System After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on seatbelts, it is very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat backrest, and centered on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash greatly increases. WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident. WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback. WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Make sure the front passenger sensing system is operating E67017 properly. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 51). Do not attempt to repair or service the system. Take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer. WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash. If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. See Getting the Services You Need (page 264). The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side affected by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact crashes. SIDE AIRBAGS WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. 48 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System PASSENGER KNEE AIRBAG The knee airbag is located under the instrument panel. During a crash, the restraints control module may activate the passenger knee airbag based on crash severity and occupant conditions. Under certain crash and occupant conditions, the passenger knee airbag may deploy but the passenger front airbag may not activate. As with front and side airbags, it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. E152533 The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel indicating that side airbags are fitted to your vehicle. • Side airbags located inside the driver and front passenger seatbacks. • Front passenger sensing system. SAFETY CANOPY™ WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. E67017 • Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 51). WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner. Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat. The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags. WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the supplementary restraint system or associated components. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. 49 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death. WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the airbag. E75004 The system consists of the following: • Safety canopy curtain airbags above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a label or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar trim. • A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain deployment WARNING: If a supplementary restraint system component has deployed, it will not function again. Have the system and associated components inspected as soon as possible. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact crashes and rollover events. · Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness indicator. E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 51). Always properly restrain children 12 years old and under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along the side window opening. The design and development of the Safety Canopy included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy). 50 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System • CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR • WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of your vehicle (including hood, bumper system, frame, front end body structure, tow hooks and hood pins) may affect the performance of the airbag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify or add equipment to the front end of your vehicle. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash. The seatbelt pretensioners and the front airbag supplemental restraint system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to deploy a safety device. Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which provide information to the restraints control module. The restraints control module deploys (activates) the front seatbelt pretensioners, rear inflatable seatbelts, driver airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted side airbags, passenger knee airbag and the Safety Canopy. Based on the type of crash, the restraints control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices. The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or front airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. • The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. • The design of the seatbelt pretensioners is to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side crashes and in rollovers. • The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: E67017 The readiness light either flashes or stays lit. A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem, the light or both are repaired. The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after you switch the ignition on. 51 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Supplementary Restraints System • • The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on crash severity and occupant conditions. The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover. AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. 52 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Keys and Remote Controls GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: The remote control contains sensitive electrical components. Exposure to moisture or impact may cause permanent damage. Intelligent Access (If Equipped) The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following conditions are met: • You activate the front exterior door handle switch. • You press the luggage compartment button. • You press a button on the transmitter. Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the transmitter battery is low, you may need to mechanically unlock your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent access key to open the driver door in this situation. See Remote Control (page 53). The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. One of the following could cause a decrease in operating range: • Weather conditions. • Nearby radio towers. • Structures around the vehicle. • Other vehicles parked next to your vehicle. REMOTE CONTROL Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped) The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other radio transmitters, for example amateur radios, medical equipment, wireless headphones, wireless remote controls, cell phones, battery chargers and alarm systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. Use the key blade to start your vehicle and unlock or lock the driver door from outside your vehicle. The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts your vehicle, as well as a remote control. Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended. 53 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Keys and Remote Controls E191532 Press the button to release the key blade. Press and hold the button to fold the key blade back in when not in use. E253517 Your remote control operates the power locks and the remote start system. The key must be in your vehicle to use the push button start. Removable Key Blade E151795 Your remote control also contains a removable key blade that you can use to unlock your vehicle. Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Intelligent Access Key Note: You may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside your vehicle. 54 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Keys and Remote Controls A message appears in the information display when the remote control battery is low. See Information Messages (page 115). Integrated Keyhead Transmitter The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery. Press the button to release the key blade before beginning the procedure. E254065 Press the release button and pull the key blade out. E191533 1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and gently push the clip. 2. Press the clip down to release the battery cover. E151795 Note: Your vehicle keys came with a security label that provides important key cut information. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Replacing the Battery Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries. Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. E151799 3. Carefully remove the cover. Note: Replacing the battery does not erase the programmed key from your vehicle. Your remote control should operate normally. 55 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Keys and Remote Controls E151800 Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver. 4. Insert the screwdriver as shown to release the battery. E254065 1. E151801 5. Remove the battery. 6. Install a new battery with the + facing upward. 7. Reinstall the battery cover. Intelligent Access Key The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery. 56 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Push the release button and pull the key blade out. Keys and Remote Controls E218402 3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, in the position shown and carefully remove the battery. 4. Install a new battery with the + facing upward. 5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto the transmitter and install the key blade. E218401 2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden behind the key blade head to remove the battery cover. Memory Feature (If Equipped) You can use the remote control to recall memory positions. If programmed to a pre-set position, the remote control recalls memory positions when you unlock your vehicle. If you have the easy entry and exit feature enabled and the ignition is off, the seat moves to the easy entry position. The seat moves to the driver memory position when you switch the ignition on. Linking a Preset Position to Your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key See Memory Function (page 146). 57 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Keys and Remote Controls Car Finder Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding remote start systems. Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn sounds E138623 and the direction indicators flash. We recommend you use this method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm. The system does not work if: • The ignition is on. • The anti-theft alarm triggers. • You disable the feature. • The hood is open. • The transmission is not in park (P). • The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. • The service engine soon light is on. Sounding the Panic Alarm Note: The panic alarm only operates when the ignition is off. E138624 Press the button to sound the panic alarm. Press the button again or switch the ignition on to turn it off. Remote Control Feedback (If Equipped) Remote Start (If Equipped) An LED on the remote control provides status feedback of remote start or stop commands. WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or in areas that are not well ventilated. Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel level is low. The remote start button is on the remote control. E138625 This feature allows you to start your vehicle from the outside. Your remote control has an extended operating range. If your vehicle has automatic climate control, you can configure it to operate when you remote start your vehicle. See Climate Control (page 129). A manual climate control system runs at the setting it was set to when you switched your vehicle off. LED Status Solid green Remote start successful Solid red Remote stop successful Blinking red Request failed or status not received Blinking green Status incomplete Remote Starting Your Vehicle Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. If you do not follow this sequence, your vehicle does not start remotely, the direction indicators do not flash twice and the horn does not sound. 58 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Keys and Remote Controls Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after the engine stops running. Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote Starting E138625 Press the button once. Your vehicle and the parking lamps turn off. You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to ground reflection and the added noise of your running vehicle. E138626 To remote start your vehicle: 1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors. 2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps flash twice. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. The horn sounds if the system fails to start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. You can switch it on or off in the information display. REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL Replacement keys or remote controls can be purchased from an authorized dealer. Authorized dealers can program remote controls for your vehicle. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75). Note: If you have remote started your vehicle with an integrated keyhead transmitter, you must switch on the ignition before driving your vehicle. With an intelligent access transmitter, you must press the brake pedal before driving your vehicle. The power windows do not work during remote start and the radio does not turn on automatically. The parking lamps remain on and your vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on the setting. Extending the Engine Running Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start period. If you have the duration set to 15 minutes, the duration extends by another 15 minutes. For example, if the vehicle has run from the first remote start for five minutes, the vehicle continues to run now for a total of 30 minutes. You can extend the remote start up to a maximum of 35 minutes. 59 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing MyKey™ Standard Settings PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Not every vehicle includes the features listed below. If your vehicle has this equipment, then you cannot change the following settings when using a MyKey: • Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. MyKey mutes the audio system until drivers, and in some instances, passengers, fasten their seatbelts. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not mute. • Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel warning activates earlier for MyKey drivers, giving them more time to refuel. • Certain driver alerts, stability systems or parking aids turn on automatically when you use the MyKey system. For example, Blind Spot Information System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane departure warning or forward collision warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be able to turn the lane departure warning feature off, but this feature turns back on automatically with every new key cycle. • Restricted touchscreen operation in some markets. For example, MyKey may prevent manual navigation destination input while the vehicle is in any gear other than park (P) or when the vehicle reaches a certain rate of speed. • Satellite radio adult content restrictions, if this feature is available in your market. MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to promote good driving habits. You can program the restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys that you did not program are administrator keys or admin keys. You can use admin keys to: • Create a MyKey with certain vehicle restrictions. • Program certain MyKey settings. • Clear all MyKey restrictions. After you program a MyKey, you can view the following information through the information display: • The total number of admin keys and MyKeys for your vehicle. • The total distance a MyKey driver traveled with your vehicle. Note: Every MyKey receives the same restrictions and settings. You cannot program them individually. Note: For vehicles equipped with a push-button start switch: When both a MyKey and an admin key are present when you start your vehicle, the system recognizes the admin key only. Optional Settings You can configure certain vehicle feature settings when you first create a MyKey. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key. 60 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing MyKey™ Note: Not every feature applies to every vehicle in every market. When they are available for your vehicle, then they appear in your information display, providing choices to switch them on or off, or to select a more specific setting. • • • Various vehicle speed limits so the MyKey driver cannot exceed certain speeds. The information display shows warnings followed by an audible tone when the MyKey driver reaches the set speed. You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator pedal. WARNING: Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit to a limit that will prevent the driver from maintaining a safe speed considering posted speed limits and prevailing road conditions. The driver is always responsible to drive in accordance with local laws and prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could result in accident or injury. • Various vehicle speed reminders so MyKey drivers know when their vehicle speed approaches the limits. Warnings appear in your information display and a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers exceed the set vehicle speed. The audio system's maximum volume limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can concentrate on the road. A message appears in the information display when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the limited volume. MyKey also disables the automatic volume control. Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic audio system, then the radio may not limit. Always on setting. This setting forces certain features to remain on and active for MyKey drivers. For example, E911 or emergency assistance and the do not disturb features stay on even if a MyKey driver uses the feature's control to switch it off. When you select, you will not be able to turn off Advance Trac or traction control (if your vehicle has this feature). CREATING A MYKEY Use the information display to create a MyKey: 1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 167). If your vehicle is equipped with a push-button start, place the remote control into the backup slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75). 2. Switch the ignition on. 61 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing MyKey™ 3. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to change the settings of your MyKey. From the MyKey menu select the option Create MyKey. See Information Displays (page 104). 4. When prompted, hold the OK button until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey. The programmed restrictions apply when you key off, open and close the driver door and restart your vehicle with the programmed key or transmitter. CLEARING ALL MYKEYS When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once. To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display. 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key. 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to begin clearing your MyKey programming. See Information Displays (page 104). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. 4. A confirmation message appears in the display after you finish clearing your MyKeys. Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status. You cannot remove the MyKey restrictions individually. MyKey is successfully created. Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the admin keys. You can also program configurable settings for the key(s). See Programming and Changing Configurable Settings. Programming and Changing Configurable Settings Use the information display to access your configurable MyKey settings. CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key or transmitter you want to program. 2. Access the main menu in the information display and then scroll through the menus to change the settings of your MyKey. See Information Displays (page 104). 3. Follow the instructions in the display. Note: You can clear or change your MyKey settings at any time during the same key cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you have switched the vehicle off, however, you will need an admin key to change or clear your MyKey settings. You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). MyKey Distance Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a MyKey. 62 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing MyKey™ Number of MyKeys USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys have been deleted. MyKey is not compatible with non Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, see an authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system. Number of Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many admin keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed. MYKEY — TROUBLESHOOTING Condition I cannot create a MyKey. Potential causes · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into the backup slot. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75). · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at least one admin key. · SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode. I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 61). I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 61). 63 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing MyKey™ Condition Potential causes I lost the only admin key. · Purchase a new key or transmitter from your authorized dealer. I lost a key. · Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see your authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75). MyKey distances do not accumulate. · The MyKey user is not using the MyKey. · An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys. · The key system has been reset. 64 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Doors and Locks you press the unlock button once. All door mode unlocks all doors when you press the unlock button once. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control, keyless entry keypad and intelligent access. LOCKING AND UNLOCKING You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock and unlock your vehicle. Power Door Locks Locking the Doors The power door lock control is on the driver and front passenger door panels. E138623 Press the button to lock all doors. The direction indicators will flash. Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will sound and the direction indicators will flash if all the doors and the liftgate are closed. Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn sounds twice and the direction indicators do not flash. E138628 A Unlock. B Lock. Remote Control Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade You can use the remote control at any time. Locking with the Key Unlocking the Doors Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle. Press the button to unlock the driver door. Unlocking with the Key E138629 Turn the top of the key toward the rear of your vehicle. Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors. The direction indicators will flash. Note: If the child safety locks are on and you pull the interior handle, you will only turn off the emergency locking, not the child safety lock. You can only open the doors using the external door handle. Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for three seconds to change between driver door or all doors unlock mode. The direction indicators will flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode. Driver door mode only unlocks the driver door when 65 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Doors and Locks Activating Intelligent Access (If Locking Using Intelligent Access Equipped) You can unlock and lock the vehicle without taking the keys out of your pocket or purse when your intelligent access key is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access uses a sensor on the back of the door handle for unlocking and a separate sensor on the face of each door handle for locking. E248556 With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door handle lock sensor for approximately one second to lock, being careful to not touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle at the same time. After locking, you can immediately pull on the door handle to confirm locking occurred without inadvertently unlocking. The system does not function if: • Your vehicle battery has no charge. • The key battery has no charge. • The key frequencies are jammed. Note: The system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices, for example keys or a cell phone. Opening the Liftgate Press the exterior liftgate release button on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. See Manual Liftgate (page 70). Note: If the system does not function, use the key blade to lock and unlock your vehicle. See Remote Control (page 53). Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped) Unlocking Using Intelligent Access This helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still in the ignition. When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle with the power door lock control, all the doors will lock then unlock and the horn will sound twice if the key is still in the ignition. E248555 With your intelligent access key within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on the back of the door handle for a brief period and then pull on the door handle to unlock, being careful to not touch the lock sensor at the same time or pulling the door handle too quickly. The intelligent access system requires a brief delay to authenticate your intelligent access key fob. You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition by either: • Using the keyless entry keypad with the driver door closed. • Pressing the lock button on the remote control even if the doors are not closed. If both front doors are closed, you can lock your vehicle by any method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not. 66 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Doors and Locks Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) Autolock repeats when: • You open then close any door while the ignition is on and your vehicle speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). This helps to prevent you from locking your key inside the passenger compartment or rear cargo area. When you electronically lock your vehicle with any door open, transmission in park (P) and the ignition off, the system will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment after you close the last door. If the system finds a key, all of the doors will immediately unlock and the horn sounds twice, indicating that a key is inside. Autounlock Autounlock unlocks all the doors when: • The ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and your vehicle has been moving at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). • Your vehicle comes to a stop and you switch the ignition off or to the accessory position. • You open the driver door within 10 minutes of switching the ignition off or to accessory. You can override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the intelligent access key inside your vehicle. To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle after you have closed all doors by: • Using the keyless entry keypad. • Pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key. • Touching the locking area on the front of the door handle with another intelligent access key in your hand. Note: The doors do not autounlock if you electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door. Enabling or Disabling Autounlock You can enable or disable the autounlock feature in the information display or an authorized dealer can do it for you. See General Information (page 104). When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the power door lock control, all doors lock then unlock if: • The ignition is on. • The ignition is off and the transmission is not in park (P). Illuminated Entry The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when you unlock the doors with the remote control. Autolock (If Equipped) The lamps turn off if: • The ignition is on. • You press the remote control lock button. • 25 seconds have elapsed. Autolock locks all the doors when: • All doors are closed. • The ignition is on. • You shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion. • Your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). 67 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Doors and Locks The lamps do not turn off if: • You switch them on with the lighting control. • Any door is open. Illuminated Exit The interior lamps and some exterior lamps illuminate when all doors are closed and you switch the ignition off. The lamps turn off if all the doors remain closed and: • 25 seconds have elapsed. • You lock your vehicle from the outside. Battery Saver E138637 If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off. You can use the keypad to do the following: • Lock or unlock the doors. • Program and erase user codes. • Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm. Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) You can operate the keypad with the factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is on the owner's wallet card in the glove box and is available from an authorized dealer. You can also program up to five of your own five-digit personal entry codes. If you leave the ignition switched on and the engine is not running, the battery saver will turn the ignition off when it detects a certain amount of battery drain, or after 45 minutes have elapsed. Programming a Personal Entry Code KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED) 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. 2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You must enter each number within five seconds of each other. 4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal code 1. SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad The keypad is near the driver window. It illuminates when touched. Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock function may not work. Enter your entry code again more slowly. The doors lock then unlock to confirm that programming was successful. 68 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Doors and Locks To program additional personal entry codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4: • Press 3·4 to save personal code 2. • Press 5·6 to save personal code 3. • Press 7·8 to save personal code 4. • Press 9·0 to save personal code 5. Locking and Unlocking the Doors Hints: • Do not set a code that uses five of the same number. • Do not use five numbers in sequential order. • The factory-set code works even if you have set your own personal code. Enter the factory-set code or your personal code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within five seconds. Locking All Doors Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad simultaneously with the driver door closed. You do not need to enter a code first. Unlocking All Doors Unlocking Only the Driver Door Enter the factory-set or your personal five-digit code. You must press each number within five seconds of each other. The interior lamps illuminate. Erasing a Personal Code Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking and Unlocking (page 65). 1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code. 2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad within five seconds. 3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You must do this within five seconds of completing step 2. All personal codes erase and only the factory-set five-digit code works. Anti-Scan Feature The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code seven times. This mode turns off the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp flashes. The anti-scan feature turns off after any of the following occur: • One minute of keypad inactivity. • You press the unlock button on the remote control. • You switch your vehicle on. • You unlock the vehicle using intelligent access. 69 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Liftgate Opening the Liftgate MANUAL LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED) Manually WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. E138632 Press the button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate, and then pull on the outside handle. WARNING: Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. With the Remote Control Press the button twice within three seconds. E138630 Closing the Liftgate Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. Note: Do not hang anything, for example a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components. E155976 A handle is located inside the liftgate to help with closing. 70 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Liftgate If there is a problem with the open or close request, a tone sounds for one of the following reasons: POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED) • WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death. • • The ignition is on and the transmission is not in park (P). The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. The liftgate is not fully closed and your vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h). If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully opened, this indicates there may be excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds and the liftgate closes under control. Remove any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the liftgate continues to close after opening, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. WARNING: Make sure that you fully close the liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes from entering your vehicle. If you are unable to fully close the liftgate, open the air vents or the windows to allow fresh air to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. Opening and Closing the Liftgate WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control. WARNING: Keep keys out of reach of children. Do not allow children to operate or play near an open or moving power liftgate. You should supervise the operation of the power liftgate at all times. Note: Make sure the area behind your vehicle is free from obstruction and that there is enough room for you to operate the liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle, for example a wall, garage door or another vehicle may come into contact with the moving liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components. Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate before operating or moving your vehicle, especially in an enclosure, like a garage or a parking structure. This could damage the liftgate and its components. Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. Note: Do not hang anything, for example a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when you are driving. This could damage the liftgate and its components. The liftgate only operates with the transmission in park (P). 71 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Liftgate Closing the Liftgate From the Instrument Panel E138633 With the transmission in park (P), press the button on the instrument panel. WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate when using the rear switch. With the Remote Control Press the button twice within three seconds. E138630 With the Outside Control Button Opening the Liftgate 1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote control or power door unlock control. If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks when you press the liftgate release button. E138636 Press and release the liftgate button. Stopping the Liftgate Movement Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force to the liftgate while it is in motion. This could damage the power liftgate and its components. You can stop the liftgate movement by doing any of the following: • Pressing the liftgate control button. • Pressing the liftgate button on the remote control twice. • Pressing the liftgate button on the instrument panel. • Moving your foot under and away from the center rear bumper in a single-kick motion.* E138632 2. Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure, or damage mechanical components. *This method only works for vehicles with the hands-free liftgate feature. Setting the Liftgate Open Height 1. 72 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Open the liftgate. Liftgate 2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing the control button on the liftgate when it reaches the desired height. Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving, you can also manually move it to the desired height. Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection. To prevent this, let the power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle. Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving. 3. Press and hold the liftgate control button on the liftgate until you hear a tone, indicating programming is complete. Note: You can only use the liftgate control button to program the height. When Opening The system stops when it detects an obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you remove the obstacle, you can continue to operate the liftgate. Note: You cannot program the height if the liftgate position is too low. The new open liftgate height is recalled when the power liftgate is opened. To change the programmed height, repeat the above procedure. Once you open the power liftgate, you can manually move it to a different height. Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped) Make sure you have a passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate. 1. Stand behind your vehicle, and face the liftgate. 2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion, without pausing, under and away from the rear bumper detection area. 3. The liftgate opens or closes. Note: The system recalls the new programmed height until you reprogram it, even if you disconnect the battery. When operating the power liftgate after you have programmed a lower height than fully open, you can fully open the liftgate by manually pushing it upward to the maximum open position. Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch Obstacle Detection When Closing The system stops when it detects an obstacle. A tone sounds and the system reverses to open. Once you remove the obstacle, you can power close the liftgate. E253664 The detection area is in the center of the rear bumper. 73 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Liftgate Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch E253799 The detection area is on the left-hand side and right-hand side of the hitch, between the exhaust and the hitch. Avoid the following actions when using the hands-free opening feature: • • • Making physical contact with the bumper. Holding your foot under the bumper. Sweeping your foot from side to side, or kicking at an odd angle. Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction, replicate a strut failure, or damage mechanical components. Note: Splashing water may cause the hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the passive key away from the rear bumper detection area when you wash your vehicle. 74 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Security Replacement Keys PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters or two intelligent access keys. Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote control. Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting problems if they are too close to the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine if a problem occurs. The intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates the driver door lock and activates the intelligent access with push button start system, as well as a remote control. If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys (integrated keyhead transmitters only) are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You need to erase the key codes from your vehicle and program new coded keys. Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle. SecuriLock® Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences. See your authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys. The system is an engine immobilization system. It is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine from starting. A message may appear in the information display. Programming a Spare Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Note: You can program a maximum of eight coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters. If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information display. You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitter or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry portion of the remote control to your vehicle Automatic Arming The vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off. Automatic Disarming Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys. Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle. 75 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Security You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are not available. Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key See your authorized dealer to have additional keys programmed to your vehicle. Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED) Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off, insert the second previously coded key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds, but no more than 10 seconds. Switch the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new unprogrammed key into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition. The system will warn you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if any door, the luggage compartment or the hood is opened without using the key, remote control or keyless entry keypad. The direction indicators will flash and the horn will sound if unauthorized entry is attempted while the alarm is armed. Take all remote controls to an authorized dealer if there is any potential alarm problem with your vehicle. Arming the Alarm The alarm is ready to arm when there is not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your vehicle to arm the alarm. Disarming the Alarm Disarm the alarm by any of the following actions: • • If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the engine and operate the remote entry system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter). • Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control or keyless entry keypad. Switch your vehicle on or start your vehicle. Use a key in the driver door to unlock your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on within 12 seconds. Note: Pressing the panic button on the remote control will stop the horn and signal indicators, but will not disarm the system. If programming was not successful, wait 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. If you are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to your authorized dealer. 76 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 139). E259855 3. Lock the steering column. ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH: POWER ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. E259854 Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 139). 1. Unlock the steering column. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 77 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Steering Wheel Note: The steering column may begin to move again. 4. When the steering column stops, continue holding the control for a few seconds. 5. Repeat for each direction as necessary. A new stopping position sets. The next time you tilt or telescope the steering column, it stops just short of the end of the column position. Memory Feature (If Equipped) You can save and recall the steering column position with the memory function. See Memory Function (page 146). E261582 Pressing the adjustment control during a memory recall cancels the operation. Use the control on the side of the steering column to adjust the position. Easy Entry and Exit Feature To adjust: • Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the control. • Telescope: Press the front or rear of the control. The column moves up when you switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). End of Travel Position Note: If you press any adjustment or memory button when in easy exit mode, the system cancels the operation. The steering column sets a stopping position just short of the end of the column position to prevent damage to the steering column. A new stopping position sets if the steering column encounters an object when tilting or telescoping. Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column may move up and in. To reset the steering column to its normal stopping position: 1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the motion of the steering column. 2. Press and hold the steering column control until the steering column stops moving. 3. Press the steering column control again. 78 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Steering Wheel Type Two AUDIO CONTROL Type One E213209 E273149 A Seek up or next. B Volume up or down. C Mute. D Seek down or previous. A Volume up. B Seek up or next. C Volume down. D Seek down or previous. Seek and Media E Media. Press the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset. • Play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • Tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band. • Seek through a track. Press the media button repeatedly to: • Scroll through available audio modes. E273150 A Answer call. B Mute. C End call. VOICE CONTROL The controls are on the steering wheel. Press and release to activate voice recognition. E142599 Press and release to enter phone mode or answer a phone call. 79 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Steering Wheel Press and release to end a phone call. INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL E265040 CRUISE CONTROL Type One E203207 See Information Displays (page 104). HEATED STEERING WHEEL (IF E200995 See Using Cruise Control (page 217). EQUIPPED) Type Two Switch the heated steering wheel on and off using the touchscreen. Touch the button to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. Note: You can use the heated steering wheel only when the engine is running. Note: The system uses a sensor and is designed to control the temperature of the steering wheel and to prevent it from overheating. E200996 Note: In warm temperatures, the steering wheel quickly reaches its maximum temperature and the system reduces the current to the heating element. This could cause you to think that the system has stopped working but it has not. This is normal. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218). 80 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Pedals ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Never use the controls while your feet are on the accelerator and brake pedals and the vehicle is moving. You can find the control on the left side of the steering column. Press and hold the appropriate side of the control to move the pedals. A B E162916 A. Farther B. Closer You can save and recall the pedal positions with the memory feature. See Memory Function (page 146). Note: Adjust the pedals only when your vehicle is in P (Park). 81 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wipers and Washers Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: If you switch autolamps and autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. Note: If streaks or smears appear on the windshield, clean the windshield and the wiper blades. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades. Wet or winter driving conditions with ice, snow or salty road mist can cause inconsistent and unexpected wiping or smearing. Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. The feature uses a rain sensor that is in the area around the interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors the amount of moisture on the windshield and turns on the wipers. It adjusts the wiper speed by the amount of moisture that the sensor detects on the windshield. You can switch this feature on and off in the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). E252764 • • Rotate away from you for a long wipe interval. Rotate toward you for a short wipe interval. E208222 Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the autowipers. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a large amount of water on the windshield. When you select high sensitivity, the wipers operate when the sensor detects a small amount of water on the windshield. Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval. Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped) When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes decreases. Keep the outside of the windshield clean. The rain sensor is very sensitive and the wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield. AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED) Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you switch the windshield wipers on. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. 82 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wipers and Washers A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. In these conditions, you can do the following: • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing on the windshield. • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe. • Switch autowipers off. Front Camera Washer (If Equipped) Operating the windshield washer also operates the front camera washer. Autowipers Settings REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS Autowipers default to on and remain on until you switch them off in the information display. When you switch off autowipers, the wipers operate in intermittent mode. Note: Make sure you switch the windshield wipers off before entering a car wash. WINDSHIELD WASHERS Rear Window Wiper Blade Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. E208225 Rotate the control to switch on the rear wiper. Rear Window Washer Rotate and hold the control to the top or bottom position to switch on the rear window washer. When you release the lever, wiping continues for a short period of time. E208224 • • • A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid. A brief press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with washer fluid. A long press and hold turns on the wipers and washer fluid for up to 10 seconds. Rear Camera Washer Operating the rear washer also turns on the rear camera washer. 83 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Lighting GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL Condensation in the Exterior Front Lamps and Rear Lamps Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have vents to accommodate normal changes in air pressure. Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on the interior of the lens. The fine mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. E142449 A Lamps off. B Parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and rear lamps. C Headlamps. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions. Examples of acceptable condensation are: • The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, drip marks or large droplets). • A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. Headlamp High Beam Examples of unacceptable condensation are: • A water puddle inside the lamp. • Streaks, drip marks or large droplets present on the interior of the lens. If you see any unacceptable condensation, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. E167827 Push the lever away from you to switch the high beam on. Push the lever forward again or pull the lever toward you to switch the high beams off. 84 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Lighting Flashing the Headlamp High Beam The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of time that the headlamps remain on. Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you cannot switch the high beams on until the system turns the low beams on. Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps When you switch the autolamps on, the headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of switching the wipers on. They turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off. E163268 Slightly pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the headlamps. The headlamps do not turn on with the wipers: • During a single wipe. • When using the windshield washers. • If the wipers are in intermittent mode. AUTOLAMPS WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the headlamps on in low visibility conditions, for example daytime fog. Note: If you switch the autolamps and the autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when the windshield wipers continuously operate. INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER E142451 When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps turn on in low light situations, or when the wipers turn on. E231828 85 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Lighting Press repeatedly or press and hold until you reach the desired level. DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED) HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash. Set the delay time to keep the headlamps on for up to three minutes after switching off the ignition. Follow the steps below to change the delay time: Note: Complete steps 1 through 6 within 10 seconds. 1. Switch the ignition off. 2. Select the autolamp position on the lighting control. 3. Switch the lighting control to the off position. 4. Switch the ignition on. 5. Switch the ignition off. 6. Select the autolamp position on the lighting control. The headlamps and parking lamps turn on. 7. Switch the lighting control to the off position when reaching the required delay time. The headlamps and parking lamps turn off. Type One - Conventional (NonConfigurable) The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. Switching the ignition on. 2. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. 3. The lighting control is in the off, parking lamp or autolamps positions. 4. The headlamps are off. Type Two - Configurable Switch the daytime running lamps on or off using the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). Set the headlamp exit delay to one of the following settings: • Off. • 10 seconds. • 20 seconds. • 120 seconds. The daytime running lamps turn on when: 1. The lamps are on in the information display. 2. Switching the ignition on. 3. The transmission is not in park (P) for vehicles with automatic transmissions, or releasing the parking brake for vehicles with manual transmissions. 4. The lighting control is in the autolamps position. 5. The headlamps are off. Note: Adjust the time delay using the display controls in the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). 86 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Lighting The other lighting control switch positions do not turn on the daytime running lamps. A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind the windshield of your vehicle, continuously monitors conditions to turn the high beams on and off. If the daytime running lamps are off in the information display, the lamps stay off in all switch positions. Once the system is active, the high beams turn on if: • The ambient light level is low enough. • There is no traffic in front of your vehicle. • The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 32 mph (51 km/h). AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: The system does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. You may need to override the system if it does not turn the high beams on or off. The system turns the high beams off if: • The ambient light level is high enough that high beams are not required. • The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps. • The vehicle speed falls below approximately 27 mph (44 km/h). • The system detects severe rain, snow or fog. • The camera is blocked. The system turns on high beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic is present. If it detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the system turns off high beams before they can distract other road users. Low beams remain on. Switching the System On and Off Note: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction or damage. Switch the system on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). Note: The system may not operate properly in cold or inclement conditions. You can switch on the high beams by overriding the system. Note: If the system detects a blockage, for example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice, the system goes into low beam mode until you clear the blockage. A message may appear in the information display if the camera is blocked. Note: Using much larger tires or equipping vehicle accessories such as snowplows can modify your vehicle's ride height and degrade automatic high beam control performance. E142451 Switch the lighting control to the autolamps position. See Autolamps (page 85). 87 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Lighting Overriding the System Push the lever up or down to use the direction indicators. Push the lever away from you to switch between high beam and low beam. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times. Automatic High Beam Indicator The indicator illuminates to confirm when the system is ready to assist. INTERIOR LAMPS The lamps turn on when: • Any door is opened. • You adjust the instrument panel dimmer until the courtesy lamps turn on. • You press a remote control button. FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED) Dome Lamp Without Fog Lamps E232249 Press to switch the fog lamps on or off. You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except automatic high beam or off. E208462 With Fog Lamps DIRECTION INDICATORS E208463 E163272 88 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Lighting Press the button to switch the lamps on or off. AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED) Front Interior Lamps (If Equipped) Use the touchscreen to select the following: Select the settings option on the feature bar. Select ambient lighting. E279027 E163273 The front interior lamp switches are on the overhead console. Rear Interior Lamps The rear interior lamps may be above the rear seat or above the rear windows. E273192 Switching Ambient Lighting On Press to switch the lamps on or off. Touch a color once. Press to switch the left-hand individual dome lamp on and off. Changing the Color Press to switch the right-hand individual dome lamp on and off. Adjusting the Brightness Touch any color once. E262193 Drag the selected color up or down. Battery Saver Switching Ambient Lighting Off If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off. Touch the selected color once or drag the selected color down to zero brightness. The parking lamps do not turn off if you switch them on. 89 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Windows and Mirrors Resetting One-Touch Up POWER WINDOWS Start the engine. 1. WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. 2. 3. WARNING: When closing the power windows, verify they are free of obstruction and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. 4. 5. 6. Lift and hold the window switch until the you fully close the door window. Continue to hold the switch for a few seconds after you close the window. Release the window switch. Press and hold the window switch until you fully open the door window. Release the window switch. Lift and hold the window switch until you fully close the window. Test for correct window operation by carrying out the one-touch down and one-touch up features. Bounce-Back The window will stop automatically while closing. It reverses some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature WARNING: When you override the bounce-back feature the window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. E146043 Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise. Press the switch to open the window. Pull up the window switch and hold within a few seconds of the window reaching the bounce-back position. The window travels up with no bounce-back protection. The window stops if you release the switch before the window fully closes. Lift the switch to close the window. One-Touch Down Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window. One-Touch Up Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window. 90 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Windows and Mirrors Remote Control Front Windows Window Lock You can open the windows for a short time after you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. After you unlock your vehicle, press and hold the remote control unlock button to open the windows. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement. Moonroof (If Equipped) You can vent the moonroof after you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. After you unlock your vehicle, press and hold the remote control unlock button to vent the moonroof. Release the button once movement starts. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement. E144072 Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. It illuminates when you lock the rear window controls. Accessory Delay You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door. EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power Exterior Mirrors GLOBAL OPENING (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. You can use the remote control to open the windows and vent the moonroof with the ignition off. Note: You can enable or disable this feature in the information display, or see an authorized dealer. See General Information (page 104). Note: To operate this feature, accessory delay must not be active. 91 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Windows and Mirrors You can switch this feature on and off through the information display. See General Information (page 104). E144073 A Left-hand mirror. B Adjustment control. E170431 C Right-hand mirror. You can fold the mirrors on demand by pressing the power-folding mirror control located on the door. The control lights and the mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press the control again to unfold the mirrors. The control light turns off. To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle on (with the ignition in accessory mode or the engine running) and then: 1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The control lights. 2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the position of the mirror. 3. Press the mirror control again. The control light turns off. Note: If you use the power-folding control to fold the mirrors on demand and the auto fold feature is switched on, you must use the control again to unfold them. Loose Mirror Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors If your power-folding mirrors are manually folded, they may not work properly even after you re-position them. You need to reset them if: • The mirrors vibrate when you drive. • The mirrors feel loose. • The mirrors do not stay in the folded or unfolded position. • One of the mirrors is not in its normal driving position. Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped) The exterior mirrors automatically fold in toward the glass after you place the transmission into park (P), turn off the vehicle, open and close the driver's side door and lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors automatically unfold and return to their driving position after you unlock the vehicle and open and close the driver's side door. To reset the power-fold feature, use the power-folding mirror control to fold and unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this process as needed each time the mirrors are manually folded. 92 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Windows and Mirrors Heated Exterior Mirrors See Heated Rear Window (page 137). Memory Mirrors (If Equipped) You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory function. See Memory Function (page 146). C Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped) The driver exterior mirror automatically dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns on. Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped) B While the vehicle is running, the forward-facing portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you switch on the direction indicator. Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If A Equipped) E138665 WARNING: Objects in the mirror are closer than they appear. The image of the approaching vehicle is small and near the inboard edge of the main mirror when it is at a distance. The image becomes larger and begins to move outboard across the main mirror as the vehicle approaches (A). The image transitions from the main mirror and begins to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle transitions to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C). Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They can assist you by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle. Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and carefully change lanes. Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped) See Blind Spot Information System (page 231). 93 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Windows and Mirrors INTERIOR MIRROR SUN VISORS WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to side. E138666 Rotate the sun visor toward the side window and extend it rearward for extra shade. Manual Dimming Mirror Illuminated Vanity Mirror Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor. The mirror dims to reduce the effect of bright light from behind. It returns to normal when the bright light from behind is no longer present or if you shift into reverse (R). E162197 Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave them unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt themselves. 94 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Windows and Mirrors Note: This position helps to reduce wind noise or rumbling which may happen with the moonroof fully open. Press and release the control again to fully open the moonroof. WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it is free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening. Pull and release the SLIDE control to close the moonroof. The moonroof controls are located on the overhead console and have a one-touch open and close feature. To stop it during one-touch operation, press the control a second time. Bounce-Back The moonroof stops automatically while closing. It reverses some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two seconds of a bounce-back event to override this function. While bounce-back is active, the closing force increases for each of the next three times that you close the moonroof. Opening and Closing the Sunscreen Venting the Moonroof Press and release the TILT control to vent the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof. E193983 Press and release the control to open the sunscreen. Note: The sunscreen stops at the first panel for the dual panel moonroof. Press and release again to continue to open the sunscreen past the second panel. Pull and release the control to close the sunscreen. The moonroof, if open, automatically closes prior to closing the sunscreen. Opening and Closing the Moonroof Press and release the SLIDE control to open the moonroof. The sunscreen, if closed, automatically opens prior to opening the moonroof. The moonroof stops short of the fully opened position. 95 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster GAUGES Type 1 E193714 A Tachometer. C Speedometer. B Information display. See Information Displays (page 104). D Fuel gauge. E Engine coolant temperature gauge. 96 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Type 2 E193715 A Left information display. See Information Displays (page 104). B Speedometer. C Right information display. See Information Displays (page 104). 97 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Type 3 E203205 A Tachometer. Compass B Information display. See Information Displays (page 104). Displays the vehicle's heading direction. Trip Computer C Speedometer. See General Information (page 104). D Fuel gauge. Vehicle Settings and Personalization E Engine coolant temperature gauge. See General Information (page 104). Information Display Odometer Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the accumulated distance your vehicle has traveled. 98 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS Shows the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating temperature, the needle remains in the center section. If the needle enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the engine, switch the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down. The following warning lamps and indicators alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some lamps illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information. Note: Do not restart the engine until the cause of the overheating has been resolved. Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and function the same as a warning lamp, but do not display when you start your vehicle. WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped) The speed control system indicator light changes color to indicate what mode the system is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218). E144524 On (white light): Illuminates when you switch on the adaptive cruise control system. Turns off when the speed control system is turned off. Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is in the fuel tank. Engaged (green light): Illuminates when you engage the adaptive cruise control system. Turns off when you disengage the speed control system. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located. Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or on a slope. Anti-Lock Braking System Low Fuel Reminder If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. You continue to have the normal braking system (without ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. A low fuel level reminder displays and sounds when the distance to empty reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys. Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at different fuel gauge positions depending on fuel economy conditions. This variation is normal. 99 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Cruise Control (If Equipped) Automatic High Beam Control (If Equipped) It illuminates when you switch this feature on. It illuminates when this feature is on. See Automatic High Beam Control (page 87). E71340 Direction Indicator Battery Illuminates when you switch on the left or right direction indicator or the hazard warning flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb (page 300). If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Door Ajar Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped) Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely closed. It illuminates when you switch this feature off or in conjunction E151262 with a message. See Blind Spot Information System (page 231). Engine Coolant Temperature Brake System E144522 Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let cool. See Engine Coolant Check (page 289). It illuminates when you engage the parking brake with the ignition on. If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system checked immediately by an authorized dealer. Engine Oil If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 287). WARNING: Driving your vehicle with the warning lamp on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It may take you longer to stop your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury. Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level being correct. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. 100 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Liftgate Ajar Fasten Safety Belt It illuminates and a chime sounds to remind you to fasten E71880 your safety belt. See Seatbelt Reminder (page 40). Lights when the liftgate is not completely closed. E162453 Low Fuel Level Front Airbag It illuminates when the fuel level is low or the fuel tank is nearly empty. Refuel as soon as If it fails to illuminate when you start your vehicle, continues to E67017 flash or remains on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. possible. Low Tire Pressure Warning It illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp remains on with the engine running or when driving, check your tire pressure as soon as possible. Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped) Lights when you switch the front fog lamps on. It also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Heads Up Display (If Equipped) A red beam of lights illuminates on the windshield in certain E156133 instances when using adaptive cruise control and/or the collision warning system. It also illuminates momentarily when you start your vehicle to make sure the display works. Low Washer Fluid It illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low. High Beam E132353 It illuminates when you switch the high beam headlamps on. It flashes when you use the headlamp flasher. Parking Lamps Hood Ajar Powertrain Fault E159324 It illuminates when you switch the parking lamps on. Displays when the ignition is on and the hood is not completely closed. Illuminates when the system detects a powertrain or an 4WD fault. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped) Lights when the lane keeping system is activated. E144813 101 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Service Engine Soon Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped) If it illuminates when the engine is running this indicates a malfunction. The On Board Diagnostics system has detected a malfunction of the vehicle emission control system. Illuminates when you activate the tow/haul feature. If the light E161509 flashes steadily, have the system serviced immediately. Damage to the transmission could occur. See Automatic Transmission (page 184). If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring. Increased exhaust gas temperatures could damage the catalytic converter or other vehicle components. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle immediately serviced. AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key in Ignition Warning Chime (If Equipped) It illuminates when you switch the ignition on prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether your vehicle is ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. Sounds when you open the driver's door and you have left the key in the ignition. Engine On Warning Chime A warning chime will sound when any door is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed. Normally, it illuminates until the engine is cranked and automatically turns off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds it flashes eight times, this indicates that your vehicle is not ready for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing. See Catalytic Converter (page 181). Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped) Sounds the horn twice when you exit the vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN, indicating the vehicle is still on. Stability Control Headlamps On Warning Chime It flashes when the system is active. If it remains illuminated E138639 or does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, this indicates a malfunction. During a malfunction the system switches off. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. See Using Stability Control (page 198). Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Stability Control Off It illuminates when you switch the system off. It goes out when E130458 you switch the system back on or when you switch the ignition off. See Using Stability Control (page 198). 102 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Instrument Cluster Automatic Transmission Warning Chime Sounds when you have not moved the transmission selector lever to position P. A message will be shown in the display. 103 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Information Display Controls (Type 1) GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. You can control various systems on your vehicle using the information display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information appears in the information display. This icon gives you the ability to switch a feature on or off. A E204495 check in the box indicates the feature is enabled, and unchecked indicates the feature is disabled. E193720 • • • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a submenu. Press the left arrow button to exit a submenu. Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. Trip 1 & 2 You can access the menu using the information display control. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. 104 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Trip 1 & 2 Digital Speedo Distance to E Trip Odometer Trip Timer Fuel Used Average Fuel All Values * Total Odometer (located in the lower right of the display) * This also displays in other menus. • • • • Digital Speedo - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed. Distance to E — Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Trip Odometer — Registers the distance of individual journeys. Trip Timer — The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you restart your vehicle. • • • Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip. Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip. All Values — Shows the Distance to E, Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average Fuel. Note: Press and hold OK on the current screen to reset the respective trip, distance, time and fuel information. Fuel Economy Information Distance to Empty Instantaneous Fuel Economy Average MPG Fuel History All Values 105 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays • • • • • Distance to Empty - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of fuel. Instantaneous Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy along with your Avg MPG since the function was last reset. Average MPG — Shows the average fuel economy since last reset. Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history. All Values — Shows all fuel economy values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel). Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Driver Assist In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Driver Assist Traction Ctrl Blindspot Cross Traffic Cruise Control Enter the submenu and select your setting Driver Alert Hill Start Assist Intellig. 4WD Lane Keeping Enter the submenu for items such as system modes and alert intensity Pre-Collision Enter the submenu and select your setting Rear Park Aid Tire Monitor Trailer Sway Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Settings In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. 106 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Settings Vehicle Alarm Enter the submenu and select your setting Auto Engine Off Chimes Enter the submenu and select your setting DTE calculation Enter the submenu and select your setting Easy Entry/Exit MyKey Lighting Enter the submenu and select your setting Locks Enter the submenu and select your setting Power Mirror Enter the submenu and select your setting Oil Life Reset Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Power Liftgate Enter the submenu and select your setting Remote Start Enter the submenu and select your setting Windows Enter the submenu and select your setting Wipers Enter the submenu and select your setting MyKey Status Enter the submenu and select your setting Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Enter the submenu and select your setting Do Not Disturb Enter the submenu and select your setting Traction Ctrl Enter the submenu and select your setting Max Speed Enter the submenu and select your setting Volume Limiter Display Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys Distance Enter the submenu and select your setting Temperature Enter the submenu and select your setting Tire Pressure Enter the submenu and select your setting Language Enter the submenu and select your setting Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a MyKey is set. 107 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Information Display Controls (Type 2) • • • Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button). Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. Main Menu From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you can choose from the following categories: • • • • • Display Mode. Trip 1 & 2. Fuel Economy. Driver Assist. Settings. Scroll up or down to highlight one of the categories and then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu. Display Mode Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose between the following display options. E193721 • • Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Display Mode Display Mode Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 XXX mi (km) to empty X X - - Round tachometer - - X X Vertical tachometer - X - - * 108 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing * Information Displays Display Mode Tire pressure on demand screen Digital speedometer - XXX MPH - Press OK for km/h Intelligent 4WD - 4WD Gauge with Terrain Management System * Vehicles with Intelligent 4WD only. You can choose to have only the fuel gauge show in this mode. Refer to Display > Gauge Display found in the table under the Settings section later in this chapter. XXX mi (km) to empty Engine coolant temperature gauge Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel tank reaches empty. The value is dynamic and can change (raise or lower) depending on driving style. Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the level indicator is in the normal range. If the engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool. Fuel gauge Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge indicates approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol shows the fuel filler door side of your vehicle. When the fuel level becomes low, the level indicator changes to amber. When the fuel level becomes critically low, the level indicator changes to red. Intelligent 4WD (if equipped) Displays power distribution between the front and rear wheels. More power to either the front or rear wheels displays by more area filled in. Intelligent 4WD also displays the currently selected terrain management mode. Trip 1 & 2 Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or when driving on a slope. You can access the menu using the information display control. Note: When a MyKey is in use, low fuel warnings display earlier. Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. Bar or Round tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. During SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the currently selected gear appears in the display. 109 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Trip 1 & 2 All Values • • • • Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Trip Odometer and Average Fuel). Trip Odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance. Average Fuel — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip. Trip Timer— The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you restart your vehicle. Fuel Economy Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display. Fuel Economy Inst Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset Fuel History • • Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy, average fuel economy and distance to empty. Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history from the past 30 min, average fuel economy and distance to empty. Driver Assist In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Driver Assist Traction Control Blindspot Cross Traffic Alert Cruise Control Enter the submenu and select your setting Driver Alert Hill Start Assist 110 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Driver Assist Lane Keeping Sys Enter the submenu for items such as system modes and alert intensity Pre-Collision Enter the submenu and select your setting Rear Park Aid Trailer Sway Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Settings In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Settings Vehicle Alarm Enter the submenu and select your setting Auto Engine Off DTE calculation Enter the submenu and select your setting Easy Entry/Exit MyKey Lighting Enter the submenu and select your setting Locks Enter the submenu and select your setting Power Mirror Enter the submenu and select your setting Oil Life Reset Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Power Liftgate Enter the submenu and select your setting Remote Start Enter the submenu and select your setting Windows Enter the submenu and select your setting Wipers Enter the submenu and select your setting MyKey Status Enter the submenu and select your setting Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Enter the submenu and select your setting Do Not Disturb Enter the submenu and select your setting Traction Ctrl Enter the submenu and select your setting 111 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Settings Max Speed Enter the submenu and select your setting Volume Limiter Display Setup Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys Distance Enter the submenu and select your setting Temperature Enter the submenu and select your setting Gauge Display Enter the submenu and select your setting Tire Pressure Enter the submenu and select your setting Language Enter the submenu and select your setting Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a MyKey is set. • Information Display Controls (Type 3) • • • • Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu display (escape button). Press the OK button to choose and confirm settings or messages. Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. Press the right arrow button to enter a sub-menu. Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. Main Menu From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you can choose from the following categories: • • • • Trip 1 & 2. Fuel Economy. Driver Assist. Settings. Scroll up or down to highlight one of the categories and then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu. E203206 112 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Trip 1 & 2 Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items are optional. You can access the menu using the information display control. Trip 1 & 2 All Values • • • • Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Trip Odometer and Average Fuel). Trip Odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance. Average Fuel — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip. Trip Timer— The timer stops when you turn your vehicle off and restarts when you restart your vehicle. Fuel Economy Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display. Fuel Economy Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset Fuel History • • Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy, average fuel economy and distance to empty. Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history from the past 30 min, average fuel economy and distance to empty. Driver Assist In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Driver Assist Traction Control Intelligent 4WD Enter the submenu and select your setting Blindspot Cross Traffic Alert 113 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Driver Assist Cruise Control Enter the submenu and select your setting Driver Alert Hill Start Assist Lane Keeping Sys Enter the submenu for items such as system modes and alert intensity Pre-Collision Enter the submenu and select your setting Rear Park Aid Tire Pressure Trailer Sway Note: Some items are optional and may not appear. Settings In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices. Settings Vehicle Alarm Enter the submenu and select your setting DTE calculation Enter the submenu and select your setting Chimes Enter the submenu and select your setting Easy Entry/Exit Auto Engine Off Lighting Enter the submenu and select your setting Locks Enter the submenu and select your setting Mirror Enter the submenu and select your setting Oil Life Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset Power Liftgate Enter the submenu and select your setting Remote Start Enter the submenu and select your setting Windows Enter the submenu and select your setting Wipers Enter the submenu and select your setting 114 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Settings MyKey MyKey Status Enter the submenu and select your setting Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey 911 Assist Enter the submenu and select your setting Do Not Disturb Enter the submenu and select your setting Traction Ctrl Enter the submenu and select your setting Max Speed Enter the submenu and select your setting Volume Limiter Display Setup Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys Distance Enter the submenu and select your setting Temperature Enter the submenu and select your setting Tire Pressure Enter the submenu and select your setting Language Enter the submenu and select your setting Speedo in km/h Enter the submenu and select your setting Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a MyKey is set. INFORMATION MESSAGES Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may display abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have. E203207 Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Other messages delete automatically after a short time. You need to confirm certain messages before you can access the menus. 115 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays 4WD Message Action 4WD Temporarily Disabled The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating. 4WD Off The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating or you are using the spare tire. 4WD Restored The four wheel drive system resumes normal function and clears this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools. 4WD Malfunction Service Required The four wheel drive system is not operating properly and the powertrain fault indicator illuminates. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 99). If the warning stays illuminated or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change 4WD Power Transfer Unit Lube Displayed when the transfer case fluid requires service. 4WD Power Transfer Unit Lube Set to New Displayed when the transfer case fluid has been changed and reset to new. Adaptive Cruise Control Message Action Adaptive Cruise Malfunction A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218). Adaptive Cruise Not Available Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218). Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218). AdvanceTrac™ Message Action Service AdvanceTrac The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. AdvanceTrac Off On The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control. 116 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Alarm Message Action Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle Unauthorized entry triggered the alarm. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 76). Automatic Engine Shutdown Message Action Engine Shuts Off In XX Seconds The engine is preparing to shutdown. Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy The engine has shutdown to help increase fuel economy. Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds Press OK to Override The engine is preparing to shutdown. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to override the shutdown. Automatic High Beam Control Message Action Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the windshield. Front Camera Malfunc- The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact an tion Service Required authorized dealer. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Wait a short period of time for the sensor to cool down. 117 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Battery and Charging System Message Action Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned Off The battery management system detects an extended low voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve the system voltage. Once the system voltage recovers, the disabled features will operate as normal. Turn Power Off to Save Battery The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you start the vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows faster battery state-of-charge recovery. Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System Message Action Blindspot System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer Sensor Blocked See as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System Manual (page 231). Vehicle Coming From X The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 231). Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 231). Cross Traffic System Fault A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. 118 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Brake System Message Action Brake Fluid Level LOW The brake fluid level is low. Check the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 295). Check Brake System The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Park Brake Engaged The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you release the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Doors and Locks Message Action Driver Door Ajar The driver door is not completely closed. Passenger Door Ajar The passenger door is not completely closed. Rear Left Door Ajar The rear left door is not completely closed. Rear Right Door Ajar The rear right door is not completely closed. Liftgate Ajar The liftgate is not completely closed. Hood Ajar The hood is not completely closed. Switches Inhibited Security Mode The system has disabled the door switches. Factory Keypad Code XXXXX The factory keypad code displays in the information display after the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75). Driver Alert Message Action Driver Alert Warning Rest Now Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so. Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested Take a rest soon. 119 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Electronic Stability Control Message Action ESC Service required The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. ESC Off Displays the traction control system status. ESC On Displays the traction control system status. Message Action High Engine Temperature Stop Safely Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See Engine Coolant Check (page 289). Engine Fault Service Now Engine service is required. Contact an authorized dealer. Engine Oil Level Low Check Level Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 287). Engine Fuel Message Action Fuel Level LOW An early reminder of a low fuel condition. Check Fuel Fill Inlet The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed. Hill Descent Control Message Action Hill Descent Control OFF Displays when you deactivate hill descent control mode. For Hill Descent Reduce Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h). Speed For Hill Descent Select Gear Displays when hill descent control mode requires you to shift the transmission into gear. Hill Descent Driver Resume Control Displays when the hill control mode requires you to resume control. 120 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Message Action Hill Descent Control Fault Displays when a hill descent system fault is present. Hill Descent Control Off System Cooling Displays when you disable the hill descent control mode to cool the brake system. Hill Descent Control Ready Displays when you activate the hill descent control mode. Hill Start Assist Message Action Hill Start Assist Not Available Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 194). Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle. No Key Detected The system does not detect the key. See Keyless Starting (page 166). Restart Now or Key is Needed When you press the Start Stop button to shut off the engine, the system does not detect an Intelligent Access key inside your vehicle. Full Accessory Power Active Your vehicle is in the run ignition state. Starting System Fault There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact an authorized dealer for service. Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system. Key Program Failure You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system. Max Number of Keys Learned You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system. 121 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Message Action Not Enough Keys Learned You have not programmed enough keys to the system. Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible. Soon See Remote Control (page 53). Engine ON Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle with the intelligent access key and the engine is on. Lane Keeping System Message Action Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service Required The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Front Camera Temporarily Not Available The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable. Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen The system has detected a condition that requires a clean windshield to operate properly. Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer tion Service Required as soon as possible. Keep Hands on Steering Wheel The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel. Maintenance Message Action LOW Engine Oil Pressure Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible. Switch off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Change Engine Oil Soon The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. Oil Change Required The oil life left reaches 0%. Engine Coolant Overtemperature The engine coolant temperature is excessively high. 122 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Message Action Washer Fluid Level Low The washer fluid is low and needs refilling. Transport Mode Contact Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may Dealer not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an authorized dealer. Factory Mode Contact Dealer Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an authorized dealer. MyKey Message Action MyKey Not Created You cannot program a MyKey during key programming. MyKey Active Drive Safely MyKey is active. Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on. Vehicle Near Top Speed When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h). Check Speed Drive Safely MyKey is active. Buckle Up to Unmute Audio A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is active. Could Not Program Integrated Key You attempted to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys. 123 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Park Aid Message Action Check Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation (page 202). Check Rear Park Aid The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 202). Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. Park Brake Message Action Park Brake Engaged You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer. Power Steering Message Action Steering Malfunction Service Now The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Service Power Steering Now The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle at a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system, or passive entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. Steering column lock: You need to turn the steering wheel in order to disengage the Remove and re-insert steering lock. key while turning wheel to unlock 124 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Pre-Collision Assist Message Action Pre-Collision Warning Malfunction A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer. Pre-Collision Warning Not Available Sensor Blocked See Manual You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Pre-Collision Assist (page 236). Pre-Collision Warning Not Available A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer. Remote Start Message Action To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift Button A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button to drive your vehicle after a remote start. Seats Message Action Objects are by the passenger seat. After you move the objects Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to Objects Near Passenger come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Seat Memory Recall Not A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving. Permitted While Driving Memory X Saved Shows where you have saved your memory setting. 125 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Starting System Message Action To START Press Brake A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle. Cranking Time Exceeded The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle. Engine Start Pending Please Wait The starter is attempting to start your vehicle. Pending Start Cancelled The system has cancelled the pending start. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action LOW Tire Pressure One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 330). Tire Pressure Monitor Fault The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 330). Tire Pressure Sensor Fault A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 330). Terrain Management System Message Action Normal Mode Active Displays terrain management normal mode is currently active. Snow, Gravel, Grass Mode Active Displays terrain management snow, gravel, grass mode is currently active. Mud, Rut Mode Active Displays terrain management mud, ruts mode is currently active. 126 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Message Action Sand Mode Active Displays terrain management sand mode is currently active. Terrain Management System Fault Displays when the terrain management system detects an error. Mode Change Not Accepted, Retry Displayed when terrain management mode cannot be changed at the time of your request. Traction Control Message Action Traction Control Off Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using Traction Control (page 196). Traction Control On Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using Traction Control (page 196). Trailer Message Action Trailer Sway Reduce Speed Displays when the trailer sway control has detected a trailer sway. See Trailer Sway Control (page 248). Transmission Message Action Transmission Malfunction Service Now Contact an authorized dealer. Transmission Overtem- The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a perature Stop Safely safe place as soon as possible. Transmission Overheating Stop Safely The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible. Transmission Service Required Contact an authorized dealer. Transmission Too Hot Press Brake The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool. 127 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Information Displays Message Action Transmission Limited Function See Manual The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality. Transmission Warming Up Please Wait The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive. Transmission Not in Park A reminder to shift into park. Press Brake Pedal A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the transmission. Transmission Adjusted The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy. Transmission AdaptMode The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy. Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On The transmission is locked and unable to select gears. Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears. 128 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Setting the Temperature MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents Press and release the button to direct airflow to instrument panel air vents. Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents Press and release the button to direct airflow to footwell air vents. Setting the Blower Motor Speed E265862 Turn the control to set the temperature. Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off Press and release the button. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost) the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. E265389 Switching the Climate Control On and Off Turn the control to adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. Press and release the button. Switching Defrost On and Off Press and release the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister. 129 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed Air directed to the instrument panel and footwell air vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. Press and release + or - to adjust the volume of air circulated in the rear passenger compartment. Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off Press and release the button for maximum cooling. Setting the Rear Temperature The left-hand and right-hand settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. E265400 Press and release + or - to set the temperature in the rear passenger compartment. Switching the Rear Climate Control On and Off Switching Recirculated Air On and Off Press and release the button. Press and release the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AM/FM/CD The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your SYNC information. Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. Setting the Blower Motor Speed Press and release + or - to adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. Setting the Temperature Locking the Rear Climate Control Press and release the button. E265400 E266664 Press and release + or - on the left-hand side of the climate control to set the left-hand temperature. When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger settings through the front controls. Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode. 130 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Switching the Climate Control On and Off Press and release + or - on the right-hand side of the climate control to set the right-hand temperature. Press and release the button. Switching Auto Mode On and Off Press and release the button to switch on automatic operation, then set the temperature. Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off The system adjusts the blower motor speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air to reach and maintain the temperature you have set. E265282 Press and release the button to cycle through the various climate controlled seat settings and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 155). Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off Note: You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds. Switching Defrost On and Off E265280 Press and release the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister. Press and release the button to switch on temperature control for the right-hand side of the vehicle. Switching the Heated Seats On and Off Air directed to the instrument panel and footwell air vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. Press and release the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off. See Heated Seats (page 154). Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off Press and release the button. Press and release the button for maximum cooling. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. The left-hand and right-hand settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost) the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. 131 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH: PREMIUM AM/FM/CD Press and release the button for maximum defrosting. Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your SYNC information. The left-hand and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. Press and release the button to direct airflow to instrument panel air vents. Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents Note: The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. Press and release the button to direct airflow to footwell air vents. Switching Recirculated Air On and Off Setting the Blower Motor Speed Press and release the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. Press and release + or - to adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Setting the Temperature Press the toggle button on the left-hand side of the climate control upward or downward to set the left-hand temperature. Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode. Press the toggle button on the right-hand side of the climate control upward or downward to set the right-hand temperature. Switching Auto Mode On and Off Press and release the button to switch on automatic operation, then set the temperature. 132 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Switching the Heated Seats On and Off The system adjusts the blower motor speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air to reach and maintain the temperature you have set. Press and release the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off. Note: You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds. See Heated Seats (page 154). Switching Defrost On and Off Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off Press and release the button to distribute air through the windshield air vents and de-mister. Press and release the button for maximum cooling. Air directed to the instrument panel and footwell air vents turns off. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The left-hand and right-hand settings set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off Press and release the button for maximum defrosting. Press and release the button. The left-hand and right-hand settings set to HI, air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost) the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. Switching the Climate Control On and Off Note: The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. Press and release the button. Switching Recirculated Air On and Off Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off E265280 Press and release the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. Press and release the button to switch on temperature control for the right-hand side of the vehicle. 133 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Note: To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. Manual Climate Control Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or prevent you from switching on) in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency. Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position. Automatic Climate Control Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents should be fully open. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE INTERIOR CLIMATE General Hints Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog up. Note: If you select AUTO during cold temperatures, the system directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up. Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on. Note: If you select AUTO during hot temperatures and the inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air to maximize interior cooling. Fan speed may also reduce until the air cools. Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. 134 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Quickly Heating the Interior Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the full heat setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons. Recommended Settings for Heating Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the hot settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Direct air to the footwell using the air distribution buttons. Quickly Cooling the Interior Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Select MAX A/C. Select MAX A/C. 2 Drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. 135 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Recommended Settings for Cooling Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Adjust the fan speed to the center setting. Press AUTO. 2 Adjust the temperature control to the midway point of the cold settings. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. 3 Direct air to the instrument panel using the air distribution buttons. Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather Manual climate control Automatic climate control 1 Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button. distribution buttons. 2 Press A/C. 3 Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. 4 Adjust the fan speed to the highest setting. Adjust the temperature control to the desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a starting point, then adjust the setting as necessary. Directing Air to the Rear Footwell Air Vents REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS Press and release the button to direct airflow to rear footwell air vents. Directing Air to the Overhead Air Vents Press and release the button to direct airflow to the overhead air vents. Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger settings through the front controls. 136 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and Off Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed Press and release the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off. See Heated Seats (page 154). HEATED REAR WINDOW Press the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. The heated rear window turns off after a short period of time. E184884 Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage to the heated rear window grid lines. E265389 Turn the control to adjust the volume of air circulated in the rear passenger compartment. HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS Setting the Rear Temperature (IF EQUIPPED) When you switch the heated rear window on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass when it is frozen in place. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused to the mirror housing or glass. E265862 Turn the control to set the temperature in the rear passenger compartment. 137 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Climate Control Based on your remote start settings, the following vehicle-dependent features may or may not remain on after remote starting your vehicle: • Climate controlled seats. • Heated steering wheel. • Heated mirrors. • Heated rear window. • Windshield wiper de-icer. CABIN AIR FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air filter, which gives you and your passengers the following benefits: • It improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration. • It improves the interior compartment cleanliness. • It protects the climate control components from particle deposits. Note: For dual zone climate controlled seats, the passenger seat setting defaults to match the driver seat during remote start. You can locate the cabin air filter behind the glove box. Automatic Settings Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter installed at all times. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system. If Auto is on, the system sets the interior temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or cools the vehicle interior as required to achieve comfort. Note: In cold weather, the heated rear window and heated mirrors turn on. Replace the filter at regular intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495). Last Settings For additional cabin air filter information, or to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer. If Last Settings is on, the system uses the settings last selected before you turned off the vehicle. REMOTE START Heated and Cooled Features The climate control system adjusts the interior temperature during remote start. In Auto mode, certain heated features may switch on during cold weather, and cooled features during hot weather. You can switch this feature on or off and adjust the settings using the information display controls. See Information Displays (page 104). You cannot adjust the climate control setting during remote start operation. Switch the ignition on to make adjustments. 138 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats We recommend that you follow these guidelines: • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. • Do not recline the seat backrest so that your torso is more than 30° from the upright position. • Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. • Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm) between your breastbone and the airbag cover. • Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully. • Position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of position or with the seatback reclined too far can take weight off the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a crash. Always sit upright against your seat back, with your feet on the floor. WARNING: Do not recline the seatback too far as this can cause the occupant to slide under the seatbelt, resulting in serious injury in the event of a collision. WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the top of the seat backrest. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when your vehicle is moving. E68595 When you use them properly, the seat, head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will provide optimum protection in the event of a crash. 139 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats The head restraints consist of: WARNING: The head restraint is a safety device. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head restraint properly could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts. Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Make sure that you remain comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to its highest position. A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve adjust and release button. D Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. Adjusting the Head Restraint Raising the Head Restraint Pull the head restraint up. Lowering the Head Restraint Front seat head restraints 1. Press and hold button C. 2. Push the head restraint down. Removing the Head Restraint 1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position. 2. Press and hold buttons C and D. 3. Pull the head restraint up. E138642 Second-row center seat head restraint (If equipped) E138645 140 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats Installing the Head Restraint Third-row head restraints Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. Second-row outboard seat head restraints E190836 The head restraints consist of: E201128 The head restraints consist of: A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Guide sleeve unlock and remove button. D Fold button. A An energy absorbing head restraint. B Two steel stems. C Fold strap. Folding the Head Restraint Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head restraint back up to reset. Note: Press the stow or fold button on the power folding seats to automatically fold the head restraint. Tilting Head Restraints Folding the Head Restraint The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the following: 1. Press and hold button D. 2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset. Removing the Head Restraint 1. Fold the head restraint. 2. Press and hold both C buttons. 3. Pull the head restraint up. Installing the Head Restraint Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. 141 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats E190838 Recline Adjustment E144727 1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position. WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. After the head restraint reaches the forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted position. WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat backrest before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seat backrest to its original position. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash. MANUAL SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Moving the Seat Backward and Forward WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle. WARNING: Make sure the seat fully locks into place by rocking it backward and forward. Not securing the seat into the locked position can be dangerous in a crash and could cause serious personal injury or death. E190837 142 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped) POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement, causing the loss of control of your vehicle. WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. E190839 10-Way Seat Controls E176038 143 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If Equipped) E176039 8-Way Seat Controls E275199 Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection to activate. The seat backrest and cushion massage cannot function at the same time. Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped) Note: The engine must be running or the vehicle must be in accessory mode to activate the seats. 144 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats E156301 Massage Mode Lumbar and Bolster Mode A Back massage intensity adjustment Upper lumbar B Massage intensity decrease Lumbar decrease * and off C Cushion massage intensity adjustment Lower lumbar D Massage intensity increase Lumbar increase E On and off - 2. Choose the desired seat to adjust. 3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar intensity. * The massage feature defaults to an alternating massage mode with back massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar and bolster feature defaults to the middle lumbar mode. To access and make adjustments to the massage setting: ** Press C a second time to adjust the back bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the cushion bolster. 1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle >Multi-Contour Seat. 2. Choose the desired seat to adjust. 3. Press Off, Lo or Hi. You can also adjust this feature through the touchscreen. When switched on, the system displays directions for you to adjust the lumbar settings in your seat or to set the massage function. To access and make adjustments to the lumbar setting: 1. ** Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle > Multi-Contour Seat. 145 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats Recalling a PreSet Position MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED) Press and release the preset button associated with your desired driving position. The memory features move to the position stored for that preset. WARNING: Before activating the memory seat, make sure that the area immediately surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions and that all occupants are clear of moving parts. Note: You can only recall a preset memory position when the ignition is off, or when the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) and the vehicle is not moving if the ignition is on. WARNING: Do not use the memory function when your vehicle is moving. You can also recall a preset memory position by: • Pressing the unlock button on your intelligent access key fob if it is linked to a preset position. • Unlocking the intelligent driver door handle if a linked key fob is present. This feature automatically recalls the position of the following: • • • • Driver seat. Power mirrors. Optional power adjustable foot pedals. Optional power steering column. Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your memory position when the ignition is off moves the seat to the Easy Entry position. The memory control is on the driver door. Note: Pressing any active memory feature adjustment control, or any memory button during a memory recall, cancels the operation. Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob Your vehicle can save the preset memory positions for up to three remote controls or intelligent access (IA) keys. 1. With the ignition on, move the memory features to the desired positions. 2. Press and hold the desired preset button for about five seconds. A tone sounds after about two seconds. Continue holding until you hear a second tone. 3. Within three seconds, press the lock button on the remote control you are linking. E142554 Saving a PreSet Position 1. Switch the ignition on. 2. Adjust the memory features to your desired position. 3. Press and hold the desired preset button until you hear a single tone. You can save up to three preset memory positions. You can save a memory preset at any time. 146 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats To unlink a remote control, follow the same procedure – except in step 3, press the unlock button on the remote control. Recline Adjustment Note: If more than one linked remote control or intelligent access key is in range, the memory function moves to the settings of the first key to recall a memory position. Easy Entry and Exit Feature If you enable the easy entry and exit feature, it automatically moves the driver seat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you switch the ignition off. E190840 The driver seat returns to the previous position when you switch the ignition on. Lift the handle to adjust the seatback rearward or forward. The seatback can also fold forward until it is flat. You can enable or disable this feature through the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). Fold flat seatback REAR SEATS Adjusting the Rear Seats Second Row Seats WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. E213288 Lift the handle and fold the seatback forward until it is flat. WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat's seatbelt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a crash. Note: For the bench seats, make sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before folding the seatback. 147 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats Note: You may have to lower the center head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 139). Moving the Seats Backward and Forward (If Equipped) Fold and tumble the second-row seat to access the third row: E190838 Third Row Seats (Manual Seats) E193964 1. WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat backrest before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seat backrest to its original position. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash. WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or release a seat floor latch when the vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in a sudden stop or crash. Fold the outboard head restraint. E213288 2. Lift the handle on the side of the seat to fold the seatback flat. Note: Remove items from the second-row seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such as purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second-row seats before tumbling them. Note: For second-row bench seats, make sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before folding the seatback. Note: You may have to move the front-row seat forward to allow the second-row seat to be fully tumbled. 148 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats 5. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle, and rotate the seatback until you hear a click, locking it in the upright position. Note: The seatback will not raise if the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker. If the seatback does not raise, then repeat Step 4. 6. Pull the head restraint back up to its normal adjusted position. E190844 3. Lift the handle all the way up until the seat releases from the floor. Rotate the seat forward to allow access to the third row. E190847 Make sure that the rear latch hooks are properly engaged with the floor striker. Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback are latched securely in position. Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement. E190845 4. To return the seatback to the floor from the tumbled position, rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor. Third Row Seat Access (Power Fold and Tumble Seat-If equipped) WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it is occupied. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. E190846 149 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle with a seat that is unlatched or in the folded position. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or crash. Note: You may have to lower the center head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 139). E190848 The control is at the back of the rear door opening. Press and hold it to fold the seatback down and tumble the seat forward for access to the third row. Third Row Seat Exit (Manual Seat, Power Fold and Tumble Seat) WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. E193964 1. Fold the outboard head restraint. WARNING: Check under the seat cushion to make sure no cargo or objects are under the seat cushion before returning the seat cushion to its original position, and that the seat cushion locks into place. Failure to do so may prevent the seat from operating properly in the event of a crash, which could increase the risk of serious injury. WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or release a seat floor latch when the vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in a sudden stop or crash. E190849 2. Pull on the strap on the back of the second row seat. This folds the seatback forward. Pull the strap a second time to tumble the seat forward, allowing easy exit from the third row seat. 150 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats E190850 E190847 3. To return the seatback to the floor from the tumbled position, rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor. Make sure that the rear latch hooks are properly engaged with the floor striker. Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback are latched securely in position. Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent proper seat engagement. Folding the Third Row Manual Seat 1. Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub. E190846 4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle, and rotate the seatback until you hear a click, locking it in the upright position. Note: The seatback will not raise if the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker. If the seatback does not raise, then repeat Step 3. 5. Pull the head restraint back up to its normal adjusted position. E193843 2. Fold the outboard head restraint by pulling the head restraint release strap. 151 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats E190924 E190854 3. From the rear of the vehicle, fold the seatback by pulling and holding the red strap while pushing the seatback forward. Release the strap once the seatback starts rotating forward. Note: Do not use the third row seat back as a load floor when the seatback is folded. Note: Make sure that the area under the seat is free of objects before stowing it. Unfolding the Third Row Manual Seat WARNING: Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seat backrest before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that it has fully latched after returning the seat backrest to its original position. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash. E190923 4. Release the cushion latches by pulling the short black strap while pulling on the strap at the top of the seatback. This tumbles the seat all the way into the tub in the floor. Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo tie downs. WARNING: Do not sit in seats that are rearward facing when your vehicle is moving. This is not a correct seating position and the seatbelts do not properly function this way. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death in a sudden stop or crash. 152 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats E190927 E190926 Note: Make sure that there are no objects such as books, purses or briefcases on the load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure to remove all objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause damage to the seat. 2. To return the seatback to the upright position, pull the red strap. Then while holding the red strap, pull the long strap on the seatback to raise the seatback. 3. Pull the head restraints up to their normal positions. Note: Make sure the area under the load floor is free of objects before unstowing it. PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If Equipped) The third row power seat buttons are behind the third row seats on the left-hand quarter trim panel. E190925 1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of the tub in the floor by squeezing and pulling up on the handle. Once the seat is in a vertical position, push the seat over, letting it fall onto the latches. E213286 153 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing A NORMAL: Press to return the seat to the normal seating position. B STOW: Press to stow the seat into the tub floor. Seats C FOLD: Press to fold down the seatback. D RH / BOTH / LH: Press to select the normal, stow and fold modes to activate the right-hand seat, the left-hand seat or both. HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Front Seats WARNING: People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. Note: The third row seat includes obstacle detection that allows the seat to stop and reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that the obstacle can be removed. Note: Pressing a different button while the power seat feature is already being performed may cause the first selected seat movement to be cancelled. Allow the first seat movement to be completed before pressing a button for another function. Note: Make sure that there are no objects such as books, purses or briefcases on the load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure to remove all objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause damage to the seat. Note: In order to allow the seat to complete the stowed position, do not place objects under the seat before stowing. Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. Note: In the unlikely event that the third row power seat stops prematurely or travels to an unexpected position, press the FOLD button (C) to reset the seat and return it to a normal position. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. These seats feature a power one-touch operation that allows you fold and stow the seats. • • The power fold seats work only when the transmission is in park (P) and the liftgate is open. If the ignition is off and the feature is still running, the battery saver turns it off after 10 minutes. Press unlock on the remote entry key transmitter to reactivate the power seats or unlock it with the keyless entry keypad. See Remote Control (page 53). E146322 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. 154 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. Second Row Heated Seats (If Equipped) WARNING: People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must exercise care when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Heated Seats WARNING: People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical conditions, must use caution when using the heated seat. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that may block the heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles or other pointed objects. This damages the heating element and can cause the heated seat to overheat. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. • Operate the heated seat if water or any other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. E146322 155 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Seats Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter Replacement Your vehicle has lifetime air filters that are integrated with the seats. Regular maintenance or replacement is not required. E146322 Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various heat settings and off. More indicator lights indicate warmer settings. Note: The heated seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. Cooled Seats Note: The engine must be running to use this feature. E146309 Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various cool settings and off. More indicator lights indicate cooler settings. Note: The cooled seats may remain on after you remote start your vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The cooled seats may also turn on when you start your vehicle if they were on when you switched your vehicle off. 156 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER HomeLink Wireless Control System WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death. E142657 The universal garage door opener replaces the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor. The system includes two primary features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home. As well as being programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks and home or office lighting. Note: Make sure that the garage door and security device are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not program the system with the vehicle in the garage. Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515. Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming. In-Vehicle Programming This process is to program your hand-held transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink button. Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: The programming steps below assume you will be programming HomeLink that was not previously programmed. Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed, you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function Button Codes. Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 157 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) To program additional buttons, repeat Steps 1 – 4. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515. Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor E142658 1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage, turn your ignition to the on position, but do not start your vehicle. 2. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from the HomeLink button you want to program. 3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Note: You may need to use a different method if you live in Canada or have difficulties programming your gate operator or garage door opener. See Gate Operator / Canadian Programming. Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the cover or lamp lens on your garage door opener. E142659 1. Press the learn button on the garage door opener motor and then you have 30 seconds to complete the next two steps. 2. Return to your vehicle. 4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for two seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink indicator light. E142658 3. Press and hold the function button you want to program for 2 seconds, then release. Repeat this step. Depending on your brand of garage door opener, you may need to repeat this sequence a third time. If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. No further action is needed. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. See Programming Your Garage Door Opener Motor. 158 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) Gate Operator / Canadian Programming 1. Press and hold the outer two function buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly. 2. When the indicator lights flash, release the buttons. The codes for all buttons are erased. Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Reprogramming a Single Button To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps: Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible overheating. 1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release, every two seconds, your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. 2. Release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons. 3. Continue programing HomeLink. See In-Vehicle Programming. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com, www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or 1-800-355-3515. Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2 Garage Door Opener Erasing the Function Button Codes Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed to operate with the garage door opener. Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. Note: To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the transmitter into programming mode. E142660 159 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from red to red and green. 2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly the indicator light will turn green. A Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor B Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor. E142661 A. Red indicator light B. Green indicator light 1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change from green to red and green. 2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to programming mode. If done properly the indicator light will appear red. 3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 in (2–8 cm) of the button on the visor you want to program. 4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held transmitter and the button you want to program. The indicator light on the visor will flash rapidly when the programming is successful. Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter indicator light displays green and red, release the button until the indicator light turns off before pressing the button again. E142662 1. Press and hold the program button on the garage door opener motor until both blue indicator lights turn on. 2. Release the program button. Only the smaller round indicator light should be on. 3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple indicator light will flash. Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds. 4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple. Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully, the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this: 160 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the visor for 2 seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves. Programming is now complete. Clearing a HomeLink Device To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. The indicator light will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the indicator light should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed. FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 161 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Auxiliary Power Points 12 Volt DC Power Point Locations Power points may be in the following locations: • On the front of the center console. • Inside the center console. • On the rear of the center console. • In the cargo area. WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or serious injury. 110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped) Note: When you switch the ignition on, you can use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current rating of 15 amps. WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury. If the power supply does not work after you switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on. Note: Do not hang any accessory from the accessory plug. Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Note: The power point turns off when you switch the ignition off, or when the battery voltage drops below 11 volts. Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. This damages the power point and may blow the fuse. You can use the power point for electric devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on the rear of the center console. Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the battery from running out of charge: • Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the vehicle is not running. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when you park your vehicle for extended periods. Note: Timed power points remain on for 30 minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode. If you switch the vehicle off, the timed power points remain on for 75 minutes. E247586 162 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Auxiliary Power Points When the indicator light on the power point is: • On: The power point is working, the ignition is on and a device is plugged in. • Off: The power point is off, the ignition is off or no device is plugged in. • Flashing: The power point is in fault mode. The power outlet temporarily turns off power when in fault mode if the device exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition back on, but do not plug your device back in. Let the system cool off and switch the ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch the ignition back on and make sure the indicator light remains on. Do not use the power point for certain electric devices, including: • Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions. • Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric power tools or compressor-driven refrigerators. • Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical equipment or measuring equipment. • Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply such as microcomputer-controlled electric blankets or touch-sensor lamps. 163 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Storage Compartments Second Row Center Console (If CENTER CONSOLE Equipped) Stow items in the cup holder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking, acceleration or crashes, including hot drinks which may spill. Available console features include: E211667 E226487 A USB port and SD card. B Power point. C Cup holder. D Terrain control and hill descent control. E AC power point or USB port. F Rear climate controls. G AC power point. H USB smart charger. A Cup holder. B Flip forward armrest. C Utility compartment. Rear Seat Armrest E190042 164 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Storage Compartments OVERHEAD CONSOLE E224352 Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. 165 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine When you start the engine, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the engine. GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. IGNITION SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. WARNING: Do not start the engine in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. E72128 0 (off) - The ignition is off. Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. I (accessory) - Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to operate while the engine is not running. Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge. If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km) after you reconnect it. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. You can disregard any unusual driving characteristics during this period. II (on) - All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. III (start) - cranks the engine. KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED) The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field or radio noise. Note: The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones. Note: A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on and start the engine. 166 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Ignition Modes Note: You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds without the engine starting before the starting system temporarily disables. The 60 seconds does not have to be all at once. For example, if you crank the engine three times for 20 seconds each time, without the engine starting, you reached the 60-second time limit. A message appears in the information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time. You cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to a 15-second engine cranking time. You need to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again. E146431 The keyless starting system has three modes: Off: Turns the ignition off. • Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once when the ignition is in the on mode, or when the engine is running but the vehicle is not moving. Before starting your vehicle, check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • Make sure the transmission is in park (P). • Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with a keyless ignition, see the following instructions. On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and indicators illuminate. • Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once. Start: Starts the engine. • Press the brake pedal, and then press the button for any length of time. An indicator light on the button illuminates when the ignition is on and when the engine starts. Vehicles with an Ignition Key Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Turn the key to the start position to start the engine. Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it starts. STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE When you start the engine, the idle speed increases. This helps to warm up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short period and try again. Vehicles with Keyless Start Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. 167 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine 2. Insert the passive key into the backup slot. 3. With the key in this position, press the brake pedal then press the push button ignition switch to switch the ignition on and start your vehicle. Note: You must have your intelligent access key in your vehicle in order to shift the transmission out of park (P). 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the push button ignition switch. The system does not function if: • The passive key frequencies are jammed. • The key battery has no charge. Fast Restart The fast restart feature allows you to restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching it off, even if it does not detect a valid passive key. If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the following: Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off, press the brake pedal and press the push button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you can no longer start your vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive key. 2 Once your vehicle starts, it remains running until you press the push button ignition switch, even if your vehicle does not detect a valid passive key. If you open and close a door while your vehicle is running, the system searches for a valid passive key. You cannot start your vehicle if the system does not detect a valid passive key within 20 seconds. Failure to Start If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this procedure: 1 1. Fully depress the brake pedal. 2. Shift into park (P). 3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and hold it there. 4. Start the engine. E198728 1. Open the floor console storage compartment lid. 168 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine Automatic Engine Shutdown 2. Switch the ignition off. 3. Apply the parking brake. For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this feature automatically shuts down the engine if it has been idling for an extended period. The ignition also turns off in order to save battery power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a message appears in the information display showing a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If you do not intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle shuts down. Another message appears in the information display to inform you that your vehicle has shut down to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you normally do. 1. Shift into park (P). 2. Press the push button ignition switch. 3. Apply the parking brake. Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and all warning lamps and indicators will be turned off. Automatic Engine Shutdown Override Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving Vehicles with Keyless Start Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes, the ignition and engine automatically shut down. Note: You cannot permanently switch off the automatic shutdown feature. When you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the next ignition cycle. WARNING: Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags, warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned off accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and re-start the engine. You can stop the shutdown, or reset the timer, at any point before the 30-second countdown has expired by doing any of the following: • You can reset the timer by interacting with your vehicle, for example pressing the brake or accelerator pedal. • You can temporarily switch off the shutdown feature any time the ignition is on using the information display. See Information Displays (page 104). The feature only remains off for the current ignition cycle. • During the 30-second countdown, the system prompts you to press OK or RESET to temporarily switch the feature off for the current ignition cycle only. Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P) and switch the ignition off. 3. Apply the parking brake. Vehicles with Keyless Start Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary 1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe stop. 2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into park (P). Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Shift into park (P). 169 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine 3. Press and hold the push button ignition switch, or press it three times within two seconds. 4. Apply the parking brake. WARNING: Do not fully close the hood, or allow it to drop under its own weight when using the engine block heater. This could damage the power cable and may cause an electrical short resulting in fire, injury and property damage. Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C). The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120-volt AC electrical source. Important Ventilating Information If you stop your vehicle and then leave the engine idling for long periods, we recommend that you do one of the following: • Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm). • Set your climate control to outside air. We recommend that you do the following for a safe and correct operation: • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association (CSA). This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use an indoor extension cord outdoors. This could result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. • Use as short an extension cord as possible. • Do not use multiple extension cords. • Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could cause an electric shock or fire. • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of combustibles. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of electrical shock. 170 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Starting and Stopping the Engine • • • • Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes. Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before starting and driving your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use. Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity. 171 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. • WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. • WARNING: Fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. WARNING: Fuel may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. • WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel vapor can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you splash fuel in your eyes, immediately remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin, clothing or both, promptly remove contaminated clothing and thoroughly wash your skin with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact causes skin irritation. Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing fuel vapors could cause an adverse reaction, serious personal injury or sickness. Immediately call a physician if you experience any adverse reactions. FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE Choosing the Right Fuel Follow these guidelines when refueling: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle. • Always switch the engine off before refueling. • Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately call a physician, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be apparent for hours. E161513 Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. 172 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. • • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law. The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing (page 247). Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. FUEL QUALITY - E85 Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following identifiers: • Yellow fuel filler cap. • Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet. • Yellow fuel filler housing. • Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler door. We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, refer to www.toptiergas.com. Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol or E85 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. E161513 Your vehicle is designed to operate on regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or regular unleaded gasoline blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol (E85). 173 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling Some fuel stations, particularly those in high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating below 87. The use of these fuels could result in engine damage that will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. • • Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is prohibited by law. The use of fuels with metallic compounds such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which is a manganese-based fuel additive, will impair engine performance and affect the emission control system. For best overall vehicle and engine performance, premium fuel with an octane rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The performance gained by using premium fuel is most noticeable in hot weather as well as other conditions, for example when towing a trailer. See Towing (page 247). Switching Between E85 and Gasoline Do not be concerned if the engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the engine knocks heavily while using fuel with the recommended octane rating, contact an authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage. We do not recommend repeatedly alternating between E85 and gasoline. If you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as possible, at least half a tank. Drive your vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi (8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. If you use E85 exclusively, we recommend that you fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil change. We recommend Top Tier detergent gasolines, where available to help minimize engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle and engine performance. For additional information, refer to www.toptiergas.com. Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle was not designed can impair the emission control system, cause loss of vehicle performance, and cause damage to the engine which may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel storage tray. Do not use: • Diesel fuel. • Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. • Fuels containing more than 85% ethanol or E100 fuel. • Fuels containing methanol. • Fuels containing metallic-based additives, including manganese-based compounds. RUNNING OUT OF FUEL Running out of fuel can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. 174 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container If your vehicle runs out of fuel: • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to restart the engine. • You may need to switch the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. When restarting, cranking time takes a few seconds longer than normal. WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may damage the fuel system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel to run onto the ground. Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope, more fuel may be required. WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. Filling a Portable Fuel Container WARNING: Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded fuel container. WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in the household refuse or the public sewage system. Use an authorized waste disposal facility. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up, which can produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Only use an approved fuel container to transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the container on the ground when filling it. • Do not fill a fuel container when it is inside your vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container when filling it. • Do not use a device that holds the fuel pump nozzle lever in the fill position. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 174). Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they may not work with the capless fuel system and can damage it. When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a fuel container, do the following: 1. Fully open the fuel filler door. 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the fuel filler inlet. 175 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling REFUELING Refueling System Overview A B C E157452 E267248 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel container. 4. Remove the fuel filler funnel. 5. Fully close the fuel filler door. 6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it back in your vehicle or correctly dispose of it. Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from an authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel. A Fuel filler door. B Fuel tank filler valve. C Fuel tank filler pipe. Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler cap. 176 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling A B WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious personal injury. C D WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its fully inserted position when refueling. E206911 A Left-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release. B Right-hand side. To open the fuel filler door, press the center rear edge of the fuel filler door and then release. C Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it. D Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the fuel filler door to open it. WARNING: Stop refueling when the fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel overflowing. WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. Refueling Your Vehicle WARNING: Wait at least five seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank. WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes. 1. Fully open the fuel filler door. 2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for your vehicle. 177 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling A B A E206912 5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the area shown. E139202 3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel tank filler pipe. E119081 6. When you finish refueling slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove it. 7. Fully close the fuel filler door. A Do not attempt to start the engine if you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel. Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your vehicle immediately checked. Refueling System Warning (If Equipped) E139203 If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully close, a message could appear in the information display. B 4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B when refueling. Holding the fuel pump nozzle in position A can affect the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full. Message Check Fuel Fill Inlet If the message appears, do the following: 1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. 2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N). 178 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuel and Refueling The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is the break-in period of the engine. A more accurate measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi (3,000 km). 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Fully open the fuel filler door. 5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any debris that may be restricting its movement. 6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank filler valve. 7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel filler funnel provided with your vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page 174). This action should dislodge any debris that may be preventing the fuel tank filler valve from fully closing. 8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe. 9. Fully close the fuel filler door. Note: The message may not immediately reset. If the message continues to appear and a warning lamp illuminates, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Impacting Fuel Economy • • • • • • • • FUEL CONSUMPTION Advertised Capacity The advertised capacity is the maximum amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel tank after running out of fuel. Included in the advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The empty reserve is an unspecified amount of fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Note: The amount of fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. Fuel Economy Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures through the trip computer average fuel function. See General Information (page 104). 179 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Incorrect tire inflation pressures. Fully loading your vehicle. Carrying unnecessary weight. Adding certain accessories to your vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars or light bars, running boards and ski racks. Using fuel blended with alcohol. See Fuel Quality (page 172). Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures. Fuel economy may decrease when driving short distances. You may get better fuel economy when driving on flat terrain than when driving on hilly terrain. Engine Emission Control Tampering With a Noise Control System EMISSION LAW Federal laws prohibit the following acts: • Removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance. • Repair or replacement of any device or element of the design incorporated into a new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use. • The use of the vehicle after any person removes or renders inoperative any device or element of the design. WARNING: Do not remove or alter the original equipment floor covering or insulation between it and the metal floor of the vehicle. The floor covering and insulation protect occupants of the vehicle from the engine and exhaust system heat and noise. On vehicles with no original equipment floor covering insulation, do not carry passengers in a manner that permits prolonged skin contact with the metal floor. Failure to follow these instructions may result in fire or personal injury. The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency may presume to constitute tampering as follows: • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron absorbers, fender apron barriers, underbody noise shields or acoustically absorptive material. • Tampering or rendering inoperative the engine speed governor, to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications. U.S. federal laws and certain state laws prohibit removing or rendering inoperative emission control system components. Similar federal or provincial laws may apply in Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle modification without first determining applicable laws. Tampering with emissions control systems including related sensors or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced engine power and the illumination of the service engine soon light. If the engine does not start, runs rough, experiences a decrease in engine performance, experiences excess fuel consumption or produces excessive exhaust smoke, check for the following: • A plugged or disconnected air inlet system hose. • A plugged engine air filter element. • Water in the fuel filter and water separator. • A clogged fuel filter. • Contaminated fuel. • Air in the fuel system, due to loose connections. • An open or pinched sensor hose. • Incorrect engine oil level. 180 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Engine Emission Control • • Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic conditions. WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed. Note: If these checks do not help you correct the concern, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Your vehicle has various emission control components and a catalytic converter that enables it to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. • Do not run the engine with a spark plug lead disconnected. • Do not push-start or tow-start your vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 260). • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Do not switch the ignition off when your vehicle is moving. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule. On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation became effective governing the noise emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The preceding statements concerning prohibited tampering acts and maintenance, and the noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide, are applicable to complete chassis cabs over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. CATALYTIC CONVERTER WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire. Note: Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. WARNING: The normal operating temperature of the exhaust system is very high. Never work around or attempt to repair any part of the exhaust system until it has cooled. Use special care when working around the catalytic converter. The catalytic converter heats up to a very high temperature after only a short period of engine operation and stays hot after the engine is switched off. If you use anything other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. 181 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Engine Emission Control 1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly. 3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed properly. See Refueling (page 176). 4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet. Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately. You can correct these temporary malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time you start the engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city and highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal also lists engine displacement. If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs. Please consult your warranty information for complete details. On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle has a computer known as the on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors the engine’s emission control system. The system protects the environment by making sure that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists a service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing Some state and provincial and local governments may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate. Examples are: If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work, your vehicle may need service. See On-Board Diagnostics. 182 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Engine Emission Control Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is ready for I/M testing. The OBD-II system checks the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you can perform the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving: 1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods. 2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight hours with the ignition off. Then, start the vehicle and complete the above driving cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the vehicle until the above driving cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you need to repeat the above driving cycle. 183 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION S D N R P WARNING: Always fully apply the parking brake and make sure you shift into park (P). Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not apply the brake pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously. Applying both pedals simultaneously for more than a few seconds will limit engine performance, which may result in difficulty maintaining speed in traffic and could lead to serious injury. E142628 Park (P) This position locks the transmission and prevents the wheels from turning. Reverse (R) Note: You may not be able to shift out of park (P) unless the intelligent access key is inside your vehicle. With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your vehicle moves backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of reverse (R). Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission Neutral (N) Putting your vehicle in gear: With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down when in this position. 1. Fully press down on the brake pedal. 2. Press and hold the button on the front of the gearshift lever. 3. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. 4. Release the button and your transmission remains in the selected gear. Drive (D) Drive (D) is the normal driving position for the best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through gears one through six. 184 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Transmission SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission Sport (S) Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S): • Provides additional grade (engine) braking and extends lower gear operation to enhance performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain or mountainous areas. This increases engine RPM during engine braking. • Provides additional lower gear operation through the automatic transmission shift strategy. • Gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds. Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic transmission. The SelectShift Automatic transmission gives you the ability to change gears up or down (without a clutch) as desired. In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which may cause it to stall, SelectShift still automatically makes some downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time. Although SelectShift makes some downshifts for you, it still allows you to downshift at any time as long as the SelectShift determines that damage to the engine from over-revving does not occur. Tow Mode (If Equipped) To activate tow mode, press the button under the headlamp E161509 control. The indicator light illuminates and a message displays in the instrument cluster when the system becomes active. Press the button again to turn the system off. Note: Engine damage may occur if you maintain excessive engine revving without shifting. Note: Vehicles may have either steering wheel controls or gearshift lever controls. The Tow Mode Feature: • Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds to reduce the frequency of transmission shifting. • Provides engine braking in all forward gears, which slows your vehicle and assist you in controlling your vehicle when descending a grade. • Depending on driving conditions and load conditions, may downshift the transmission, slow your vehicle and control your vehicle speed when descending a hill, without pressing the accelerator pedal. The amount of downshift braking provided varies based upon the amount the brake pedal is pressed. SelectShift does not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button. Notice should be taken of the shift indicator lamp, which alerts you when to shift to make sure you achieve the highest level or efficiency and fuel economy. Pull the + paddle on the steering wheel or push the + button on the gearshift lever to activate SelectShift. • • The tow mode feature improves transmission operation when towing a trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when using tow mode. 185 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift. Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift. Transmission Upshifts When Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy) Shift from: 1-2 15 mph (24 km/h) 2-3 25 mph (40 km/h) E144821 For vehicles with gearshift lever controls: • • Push the toggle switch (+) to upshift. Push the toggle switch (-) to downshift. 3-4 40 mph (64 km/h) 4-5 45 mph (72 km/h) 5-6 50 mph (80 km/h) Brake-Shift Interlock Override SelectShift in drive (D): • Provides a temporary manual mode for performing more demanding maneuvers where extra control of gear selection is required (for example, when towing or overtaking). This mode holds a selected gear for a temporary period of time dependent on driver inputs (for example, steering or accelerator pedal input). WARNING: When doing this procedure, you need to take the transmission out of park (P) which means your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully apply the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if appropriate. SelectShift in sport (S): • Provides a permanent manual gear selection where full control of gear selection is required. WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. To exit SelectShift mode shift the transmission into another gear (for example, drive [D]). WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the stoplamps are working. The instrument cluster displays your currently selected gear. If a gear is requested but not available due to vehicle conditions (low speed, too high engine speed for requested gear selection), the current gear flashes three times. Use the brake shift interlock lever to move the gearshift lever from the park position in the event of an electrical malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead battery. Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the transmission automatically downshifts for maximum performance. Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition off before performing this procedure. 186 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Transmission If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. E267076 1. Open the media bin. 2. Remove the rubber insert. 3. Use a screwdriver to unsnap the access cover. 4. Move the plunger forward, towards the front of the vehicle and hold. 5. With the plunger held in the forward position, move the gearshift lever out of the park position. 6. Snap the access cover back in position, place the rubber tray back in position and close the media bin. 7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle and release the parking brake. Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used. 187 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) The 4WD system is always active and requires no driver input. It is capable of handling all road conditions, including street and highway driving as well as off-road and winter driving. The driver can optimize more 4WD control by moving the terrain management switch for the correct terrain. See Using Terrain Control (page 199). PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION This system is a proactive system. It has the ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels before slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not present, the system is continuously making adjustments to the torque distribution, in an attempt to improve straight line and cornering behavior, both on and off road. Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display when an 4WD system fault is present See Information Messages (page 115). An 4WD system fault will cause the 4WD system to default to front-wheel drive only mode. When this warning message is displayed, have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer The system automatically turns on every time you switch the ignition on. If any component requires maintenance, a message appears in the information display. USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE Note: A warning message will be displayed in the information display if the 4WD system has overheated See Information Messages (page 115). This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand. To resume normal 4WD function as soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes. After the engine has been restarted and the 4WD system has adequately cooled, the warning message will turn off and normal 4WD function will return. WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Do not use a spare tire of a different size other than the tire provided. If the mini-spare tire is installed, the 4WD system may disable automatically and enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components. This condition will be indicated by a warning in the information display See Information Messages (page 115). If there is a warning message in the information display from using the spare tire, this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and cycling the ignition off and on. It is recommended to The intelligent 4WD system continuously monitors vehicle conditions and automatically adjusts the power distribution between the front and rear wheels. It combines transparent all-surface operation with highly capable four-wheel drive. 188 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the 4WD system to stop functioning and default to front-wheel drive or damage the 4WD system. Basic operating principles in special conditions • • How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the Pavement • The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. • Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. • You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck Driving In Special Conditions With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the transmission is in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock position or turn the vehicle off using the start/stop button and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. Note: 4WD vehicles are equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the highway. 189 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer. • WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. • Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Sand If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it may be beneficial to disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ system while attempting to rock the vehicle. Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. Emergency Maneuvers • abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel. In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs. In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid "over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency). Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid Mud and Water Note: Driving through deep water may damage your vehicle. If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. 190 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down. When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. E143950 “Tread Lightly” is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.” E143949 Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral; instead, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. 191 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) Maintenance and Modifications Driving on Snow and Ice The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lowering kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control. Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder or luggage racks). Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause driveline damage. 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway usage. Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 194). 192 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Brakes Brake Assist GENERAL INFORMATION Brake assist detects when you rapidly brake by measuring the rate at which you press the brake pedal. It provides maximum braking efficiency as long as you press the pedal. It can also reduce stopping distances in critical situations. Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, have it checked by an authorized dealer. Anti-lock Brake System This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does not contribute to brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels (page 311). If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a malfunction. Your vehicle continues to have normal braking without the anti-lock brake system function. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps may flash during heavy braking. Following this, your hazard lights may also flash when your vehicle comes to a stop. It also momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 99). E270480 E270480 Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry the brakes. It illuminates when you engage the parking brake and the ignition is on. If it illuminates when your vehicle is moving, make sure the parking brake is disengaged. If the parking brake is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system fault. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Brake Over Accelerator In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move the transmission to park (P), switch the engine off and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for any interference. If none are found and the condition persists, have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer. It also momentarily illuminates when you switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 193 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Brakes hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the vehicle may be overloaded. HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES The anti-lock braking system does not eliminate the risks when: • You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you. • Your vehicle is hydroplaning. • You take corners too fast. • The road surface is poor. HILL START ASSIST WARNING: The system does not replace the parking brake. When you leave your vehicle, always apply the parking brake. Note: If the system activates, the brake pedal may pulse and may travel further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal. WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. PARKING BRAKE WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the transmission is locked in park (P). Failure to set the parking brake and engage park could result in vehicle roll-away, property damage or bodily injury. WARNING: The system will turn off if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev the engine excessively. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate and remains illuminated until the parking brake is released. The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. To release the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down again. When the system is active, your vehicle remains stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This allows time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. The system releases the brakes automatically once the engine has If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's weight. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and 194 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Brakes developed sufficient torque to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, for example from a car park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space. Vehicles with Automatic Transmission You cannot turn the system on or off. When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on. The system activates on any slope that causes your vehicle to roll. Note: There is no warning light to indicate the system is either on or off. Using Hill Start Assist 1. Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill.Keep the brake pedal pressed and shift into first gear when facing uphill or reverse (R) when facing downhill. 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope, the system activates automatically. 3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, your vehicle remains on the slope without rolling away for about two to three seconds. This hold time automatically extends if you are in the process of driving off. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The system releases the brakes automatically. Note: When you remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the pedal again when the system is active, you will experience significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This is normal. Switching the System On and Off Vehicles with Manual Transmission You can switch this feature on or off in the information display. The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. 195 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Traction Control You can switch the system off by either using the information display controls or the switch. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. Using the Information Display Controls If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system reduces engine power in order to increase traction. You can switch this feature off or on in the information display. See General Information (page 104). USING TRACTION CONTROL Use the traction control switch on the instrument panel to switch the system off or on. Using a Switch (If Equipped) System Indicator Lights and Messages WARNING: The stability and traction control light illuminates steadily if the system detects a failure. Make sure you did not manually disable the traction control system using the information display controls or the switch. If the stability control and traction control light is still illuminating steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle with the traction control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. The stability and traction control light: E138639 • • • Temporarily illuminates on engine start-up. Flashes when a driving condition activates either of the systems. Illuminates if a problem occurs in either of the systems. The stability and traction control off light temporarily illuminates E130458 on engine start-up and stays on when you switch the traction control system off. The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, switching traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin. Note: When you switch traction control off, stability control remains fully active. Switching the System Off When you switch the system off or on, a message appears in the information display showing system status. 196 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Stability Control If a driving condition activates either the stability control or the traction control system you may experience the following conditions: PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system, aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire construction and wheel and tire size may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the electronic stability control system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the electronic stability control system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the electronic stability control sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the electronic stability control system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. • • • • • • The stability and traction control light flashes. Your vehicle slows down. Reduced engine power. A vibration in the brake pedal. The brake pedal is stiffer than usual. If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces. The stability control system has several features built into it to help you maintain control of your vehicle: Electronic Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and, if necessary, reducing engine power. WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage. Activation of the electronic stability control system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your electronic stability control system activates, SLOW DOWN. Roll Stability Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to prevent rollovers by detecting your vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it changes by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually. Curve Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to follow the road when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve Control operates by reducing engine power and, if necessary, applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually. The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. 197 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Stability Control Traction Control The system enhances your vehicle’s ability to maintain traction of the wheels by detecting and controlling wheel spin. See Using Traction Control (page 196). B B B A A B A E72903 A Vehicle without stability control skidding off its intended route. B Vehicle with stability control maintaining control on a slippery surface. USING STABILITY CONTROL The system automatically turns on each time you switch the ignition on. You cannot switch the stability control and roll stability control systems off, but when you shift into reverse (R), the systems deactivate. You can switch the traction control system off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 196). 198 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Terrain Control (If Equipped) USING TERRAIN CONTROL 3 The terrain management system optimizes drivability and comfort as well as maximizing traction while operating on different types of terrain. Mud/Ruts mode should be selected for muddy, rutted, soft or uneven terrain. 4 Normal mode is for on-road conditions and should be selected before driving on surfaces which are similar to a hard road surface or once the need for a special mode has passed. Select Normal mode when towing a trailer. Turn the control located on the center console to choose between the following modes: 1 Note: The Sand and Mud/Ruts modes are for off-road use only. 2 Note: The curve control portion of the AdvanceTrac® system is unavailable when you select Sand or Mud/Ruts. 3 If the system becomes inoperable, selecting some modes may not be possible and a message displays. If it becomes inoperable due to a system malfunction, all of the mode indicators on the control turn off and one of the following messages appears in the information display: 4 E193313 1 2 TERRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FAULT: Turning the engine on and off may clear the fault. If that does not work, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer. Grass/Gravel/Snow mode should be selected where a firm surface is covered with loose or slippery material such as packed snow, ice, water, grass, or a thin layer of gravel or sand. For deep gravel or sand, select Sand mode. If the vehicle cannot gain traction in deep snow, switching off the traction control system may help (switch traction control back on when you regain traction). See Using Traction Control (page 196). MODE CHANGE NOT ACCEPTED, RETRY: A mode change cannot be made at the time of driver request. Try the mode change again. Sand mode should be selected in soft dry sand or deep gravel. If crossing wet sand that may be sufficiently deep enough for the wheels to sink into the surface, select Mud/Ruts mode. 199 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Terrain Control (If Equipped) Using hill descent control USING HILL DESCENT CONTROL Press and release the hill descent button located in the center of the terrain management control. A light in the control illuminates and a chime sounds when this feature activates. Principle of operation WARNING: Hill descent control cannot control descent in all surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury. To increase descent speed, press the accelerator pedal until you reach the desired speed. To decrease descent speed, press the brake pedal until you reach the desired speed. Whether accelerating or decelerating, once you reach the desired descent speed, remove your feet from the pedals and hill descent control maintains the chosen vehicle speed. WARNING: Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at zero miles per hour (0 kilometers per hour). When stopped, the parking brake must be applied or the vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it may roll away. Note: You may observe noise from the ABS pump motor during hill descent control operation. This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and should be no reason for concern. Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed while descending steep grades in various surface conditions. Hill descent modes Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above 20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains armed, but descent speed cannot be set or maintained. Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of sustained use. The amount of time that the feature can remain active before cooling varies with conditions. The system provides a warning in the message center and a chime sounds when the system is about to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as needed to maintain descent speed. 200 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When you press the Hill Descent Control and Hill Descent Control activates, HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE appears in the message center for several seconds. • At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When you press the Hill Descent Control switch and conditions are not correct for hill descent activation, the Hill Descent Control system enables, the light on the button is solid and HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY displays in the message center for several seconds. Terrain Control (If Equipped) • • At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h): When you press the Hill Descent Control switch, the Hill Descent Control system enables, the light on the button illuminates and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20 MPH OR LESS displays in the message center for several seconds. For Hill Descent Control to enable, the vehicle must be in a drive gear or (R) Reverse. If the vehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and you press the button, FOR HILL CNTRL, SELECT GEAR displays in the message center for several seconds. Refer to the Information Displays for additional Hill Descent Control messages. See Information Messages (page 115). 201 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Note: Certain add-on devices installed around the bumper or fascia may create false alerts. For example, large trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate brackets, bumper covers or any other device that may block the normal detection zone of the system. Remove the add-on device to prevent false alerts. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in reverse (R) and when using the sensing system. Note: When a trailer is connected to your vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable the rear parking aid when a trailer is connected to prevent the alert. WARNING: The system may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb reflection. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range of your vehicle. The system turns on automatically whenever you switch the ignition on. WARNING: Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, external motors and fans may affect the correct operation of the sensing system.This may cause reduced performance or false alerts. The system can be switched off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 104). WARNING: The system may not detect small or moving objects, particularly those close to the ground. If a fault is present in the system, a warning message appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 115). Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See Principle of Operation (page 60). REAR PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED) Note: Keep the sensors, located on the bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible warning increases. When the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the warning sounds continuously. If the system detects a stationary or receding object farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the bumper, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alerts. 202 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. The distance indicator displays when the transmission is in reverse (R). The indicator displays: • As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon. • If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are grayed out. E130178 Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the rear bumper. There may be decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper. FRONT PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED) The front sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low speed. The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in reverse (R) : • Your vehicle is moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. • Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is approaching the rear of your vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system provides audio warnings only when your vehicle is moving or when your vehicle is stationary and the detected obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from the bumper. E187330 Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from the front bumper. The coverage area decreases at the outer corners. When your vehicle approaches an object, a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle moves closer to an object, the warning tone repeat rate increases. The warning tone sounds continuously when an object is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front bumper. 203 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids You can switch the system off through the information display menu or from the pop-up message that appears once you shift the transmission into reverse (R). See General Information (page 104). If your vehicle has a parking aid button, you can switch the system off by pressing the button. If the transmission is in neutral (N), the system provides visual indication only when your vehicle is moving at 5 mph (8 km/h) or below and an obstacle is located inside the detection area. Once your vehicle is stationary, the visual indication will stop after 4 seconds. Obstacle Distance Indicator (If SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (IF Equipped) EQUIPPED) The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. The side sensing system uses the front and rear side sensors to detect and map obstacles within the vehicle's driving path, located near the sides of your vehicle. The side sensors are active when the transmission is in any position other than park (P). The indicator displays: • As the distance to the obstacle decreases the indicator blocks illuminate and move towards the vehicle icon. • If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks are grayed out. Note: Obstacles that enter the side detection area without being detected and mapped by the front or rear side sensors will not be detected. If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front sensing system provides audio warnings when your vehicle is moving and the detected obstacle is moving towards your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning will be stopped after 2 seconds. Visual indication is always present in reverse (R). If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual transmission), the front sensing system provides audio and visual warnings when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is located inside the detection area. Once the vehicle is stationary, the audio warning will be stopped after 2 seconds and the visual indication stops after 4 seconds. If the obstacles detected are within 12 in (30 cm), the visual indication remains on. E187810 Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from the sides of your vehicle. When the system detects an object close to the side of your vehicle, an audible warning sounds. As your vehicle moves closer to obstacles within the driving path of your vehicle, the rate of the audible warning increases. 204 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Obstacle Distance Indicator (If obstacles are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches a standstill condition, the audible warning stops after two seconds and visual indication stops after four seconds. Equipped) If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side sensing system provides visual distance indication only when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and there is a front or rear parking aid obstacle detected, and the side obstacle is within 24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle the visual distance indication stops after four seconds. If the side sensing system is not available, the side distance indicator blocks do not appear. The side sensing system is not available under the following condition: • If you switch the traction control system off. E190459 The system provides obstacle distance indication through the information display. The side sensing system may not be available until you have driven approximately the length of your vehicle in order for the system to reinitialize if: • You switch the ignition on, off and back on. • Your vehicle remains stationary for over two minutes. • The anti-lock brake system is activated. • The traction control system is activated. • When the steering wheel angle information is not available, the side sensing system is not available. The vehicle must be driven at least 492 ft (150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) to recover the steering wheel angle information. As the distance to the obstacle decreases, the indicator blocks illuminate and move toward the vehicle icon. If there is no obstacle detected, the distance indicator blocks show greyed out. When you shift to reverse (R), the side sensing system provides audible warnings when your vehicle is moving and obstacles are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are inside the driving path of your vehicle. When you stop your vehicle the audible warning stops after two seconds. Note: Visual distance indication remains on when the transmission is in reverse (R). When you shift to drive (D) or any other forward gear, for example, low (L), sport (S) or any forward gear in manual transmission, the side sensing system provides audible and visual distance warnings when your vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and 205 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids The sensors are on the front and rear bumpers. ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED) Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Note: Do not cover up the sensors. WARNING: You must remain in your vehicle when the system turns on. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves. The sensors may falsely detect objects due to ultrasonic interference caused by motorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes or horns, for example. WARNING: The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause interference. Note: If you change any tires, the system must recalibrate and may not correctly operate for a short time. The system may not correctly operate in any of the following conditions: • You use a spare tire or a tire that is significantly worn more than the other tires. • One or more tires are incorrectly inflated. • You try to park on a tight curve. • Something passes between the front bumper and the parking space. For example, a pedestrian or cyclist. • The edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high off the ground. For example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck. • The weather conditions are poor. For example, during heavy rain, snow, fog, high humidity and high temperatures. WARNING: Active park assist does not apply the brakes under any circumstances. WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Active park assist is a multi-step process and may require you to shift the transmission multiple times. Follow the onscreen instructions until the parking maneuver is complete. If you are uncomfortable with the proximity to any vehicle or object, you may choose to override the system by grabbing the steering wheel, or by taking full control of your vehicle after pressing the active park assist button. Do not use the system if: • You have attached an add-on accessory close to the sensors on the front or rear of your vehicle. For example, a bike rack or trailer. • You have attached an overhanging object to the roof. For example, a surfboard. Keep your hands, hair, clothing and any loose items clear of the steering wheel when using active park assist. 206 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids • • Parallel Parking The front bumper, rear bumper or the side sensors are damaged. The correct tire size is not in use on your vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire. The system detects available parallel parking spaces and steers your vehicle into the space. You control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you into a parallel parking space. Using Active Park Assist Selecting an Active Park Assist Mode Press the button once to search for a parking space. Press the button once to activate parallel parking. Press E146186 the button a second time to activate perpendicular parking. If you press the button again the system switches off. E146186 Note: You can also switch the system on after you have already driven partially or completely past a parking space. Press the active park assist button and the system informs you if you have recently passed a suitable parking space. If your vehicle is parked and after you switch the ignition on, you can use the information display to toggle through the modes. Press the button to switch the system on and open the system menu in the information display. Note: If your vehicle is parked, the default mode is parallel park out assist. However, if you did not use active park assist to parallel park your vehicle, use the information display to select park out assist. When the vehicle speed is less than 22 mph (35 km/h), the system scans both sides of your vehicle for an available parking space. A message and a graphic appear in the information display to indicate the system is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator lever to search for a parking space on the driver or passenger side of your vehicle. Note: You can repeatedly press the active park assist button to toggle through the modes only after moving your vehicle approximately 33 ft (10 m). Note: The system scans both sides of your vehicle and offers parking spaces one side at a time if you do not use the direction indicator. To toggle through the modes, use the buttons on the information display to select the following: • Parallel parking. • Perpendicular parking. • Parallel park out assist. • Switch the system off. Note: The system defaults to the passenger side if you do not use the direction indicator. Note: There is no time limit for toggling through the modes. Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m) and parallel to the other parked vehicles when searching for a parking space. E130107 Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft (0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from other parked vehicles, the system may not be able to detect an available parking space. 207 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids When the system detects a suitable space, a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen instructions. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may have to move forward a short distance before the system is ready to park. E130108 When you believe your vehicle is correctly parked, or a solid tone sounds and an information message appears, bring your vehicle to a complete stop. Note: You must observe that the space the system selects remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver. When the Active Park Assist maneuver is complete, a tone sounds and an information message appears. Note: The system always offers the last parking space it detects. For example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces when you are driving, it offers the last one. Note: You are responsible for checking how your vehicle is parked and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle. Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system shows a message to instruct you to reduce the vehicle speed. Deactivating Active Park Assist You can manually deactivate the system by: • Pressing the Active Park Assist button during an active maneuver. • Grabbing the steering wheel during an active maneuver. • Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30 seconds when searching for a parking space. • Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h). • Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an active maneuver. • Switching the traction control system off. Automatically Steering into a Parallel Parking Space When you shift into reverse (R), with your hands off the steering wheel and nothing obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle backward and forward in the space. Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt the maneuver, or the system switches off, you must take full control of your vehicle. Note: If the system detects an object is very close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you to stop your vehicle. The system may not provide any further instruction. Steering assistance continues to operate but you must decide if it is safe to continue the maneuver. Certain vehicle conditions may also deactivate the system, for example: • The traction control system activates or fails. • The anti-lock brake system activates or fails. If the system malfunctions, a message appears and a tone sounds. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. 208 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids When the system detects a suitable space, a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen instructions. If your vehicle is moving very slowly, you may have to move forward a short distance before the system is ready to park. Perpendicular Parking The system detects available perpendicular parking spaces and steers your vehicle into the space. You control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you into a perpendicular parking space. Note: You must observe that the space the system selects remains clear of obstructions at all times during the maneuver. Press the button twice to search for a parking space. E146186 Note: The system always offers the last detected parking space. For example, if your vehicle detects multiple spaces when you are driving, it offers the last one. When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h), the system scans both sides of your vehicle for an available parking space. A message and a graphic appear in the information display to indicate the system is searching for a parking space. Use the direction indicator lever to search for a parking space on the driver or passenger side of your vehicle. Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the system shows a message to instruct you to reduce the vehicle speed. Automatically Steering into a Perpendicular Parking Space Note: The system scans both sides of your vehicle and offers parking spaces one side at a time if you do not use the direction indicator. When you shift into reverse (R), with your hands off the steering wheel and nothing obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers itself into the space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle backward and forward in the space. Note: The system defaults to the passenger side if you do not use the direction indicator. Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt the maneuver, or the system switches off, you must take full control of your vehicle. E186193 Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m) and perpendicular to the other parked vehicles when searching for a parking space. Note: If the system detects an object is very close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you to stop your vehicle. The system may not provide any further instruction. Steering assistance continues to operate but you must decide if it is safe to continue the maneuver. Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft (0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from other parked vehicles, the system may not be able to detect an available parking space. 209 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Certain vehicle conditions may also deactivate the system, for example: • The traction control system activates or fails. • The anti-lock brake system activates or fails. If the system malfunctions, a message appears and a tone sounds. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Parallel Park Out Assist E186191 When you believe your vehicle is correctly parked, or a solid tone sounds and an information message appears, bring your vehicle to a complete stop. The system steers your vehicle out of a parallel parking space. You control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system visually and audibly guides you out of a parallel parking space. When the active park assist maneuver is complete, a tone sounds and a message appears. Note: This system is not intended to assist when exiting a perpendicular parking space. Note: You are responsible for checking how your vehicle is parked and making any necessary corrections before leaving your vehicle. E146186 Press the button once when your vehicle is stationary in a parallel parking space. Note: If you did not use active park assist to parallel park your vehicle, pressing the button once selects parallel park. You must use the information display to select park out assist. Deactivating Active Park Assist You can manually deactivate the system by: • Pressing the Active Park Assist button during an active maneuver. • Grabbing the steering wheel during an active maneuver. • Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds when searching for a parking space. • Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h). • Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an active maneuver. • Switching the traction control system off. The system displays a message instructing you to switch a direction indicator on. Use the direction indicator to select which side of your vehicle you want to exit the parking space. The system displays instructions to move your vehicle backward and forward in the space. Note: If the system detects an object is very close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you to stop your vehicle. The system may not provide any further instruction. Steering assistance continues to operate but you must decide if it is safe to continue the maneuver. 210 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not be available when the clearance to the front or the rear of your vehicle is too small. Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt the maneuver, or the system switches off, you must take full control of your vehicle. E188012 After the system directs your vehicle to a position where you can exit the parking space in a forward movement, a message appears instructing you to take full control of your vehicle. Generally, hand-over is when your vehicle is still inside the parking space. Note: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle and making sure the path is clear prior to pulling into traffic. Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause The system does not search for You may have switched the traction control off. a parking space. The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space. The system does not offer a parking space. The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice or dirt buildup. Blocked sensors can affect how the system functions. There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park. There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space. The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than 2 ft (0.5 m) away. The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking. You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle on a straight road for a short period of time. The system does not correctly Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the position your vehicle in a current transmission position. For example, rolling parking space. forward when in reverse (R). An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from correctly aligning your vehicle. 211 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Symptom Possible Cause Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be correctly parked. Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space. The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained. For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes. A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities. A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed. The parking space length or position of parked objects changes after your vehicle passes the space. The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes. For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash. REAR VIEW CAMERA WARNING: Use caution when the rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar, the camera will be out of position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines disappear when the rear cargo door is ajar. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. Note: Some vehicles may not come equipped with guidelines. WARNING: Reverse your vehicle slowly. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind your vehicle. During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind your vehicle. 212 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Note: When towing, the camera only sees what you are towing. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear when you connect the trailer tow connector. The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: • Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating. • Mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. You can also use the rear washer to clean the camera. See Rear Window Wiper and Washers (page 83). • The rear of your vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to become misaligned. E253742 The camera is located on the luggage compartment door. Using the Rear View Camera System The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when you place the transmission in reverse (R). Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. Camera System Settings The rear view camera system settings can be accessed through the display screen. See General Information (page 104). The system uses three types of guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle: • Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the intended path of your vehicle when reversing. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing in a straight line. This can be helpful when backing into a parking space or aligning your vehicle with another object behind you. • Centerline: Helps align the center of your vehicle with an object (for example, a trailer). Camera Guidelines Note: Active guidelines are only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and the luggage compartment door or liftgate is open, no rear view camera features will display. 213 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids A B C D The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines do not display when the steering wheel position is straight. E Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are farther away. Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle. Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped) F E142436 A Active guidelines (If equipped) B Centerline C Fixed guideline: Green zone D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone E Fixed guideline: Red zone F Rear bumper Active guidelines are only shown with fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the steering wheel to point the guidelines toward an intended path. If you change the steering wheel position while reversing, your vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. E190459 The system will provide an image of your vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones will highlight green, yellow and red when the parking aid sensors detect an object in the coverage area. 214 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Manual Zoom 180 DEGREE CAMERA(IFEQUIPPED) WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind your vehicle may not show. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. WARNING: The front camera system still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with looking out of your vehicle. WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in reverse (R). Note: When you enable manual zoom, only the centerline is shown. Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in the camera screen to change the view. The default setting is Zoom OFF. WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off when the transmission is not in park (P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving. This allows you to get a closer view of an object behind your vehicle. The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in reverse (R). Rear Camera Delay Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting for the rear camera delay is OFF. When shifting the transmission out of reverse (R) and into any gear other than park (P), the camera image remains in the display until: • Your vehicle speed reaches approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). • You shift your vehicle into park (P). E253795 The front view camera is located in the grille. The camera provides a video image of the area in front of your vehicle. Note: The area displayed on the screen may vary according to your vehicle's orientation or road condition. Note: The front view camera switches off if your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). You have to switch the system back on by using the camera system button once below the speed threshold. 215 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Parking Aids Using the System The 180 degree camera system consists of front and rear cameras. The system: • Allows you to see what is directly in front or behind your vehicle. • Provides cross traffic view in front and behind your vehicle. • Provides visibility during parking maneuvers. The camera system button is located on the center stack and E188847 allows you to toggle through different camera views. Note: The camera system may not operate correctly if mud, water or debris obstructs the camera's view. You can clean the lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner or by using your front or rear washer. See Wipers and Washers (page 82). Camera Views Press the camera button to toggle between different views. • Normal Rear View: Provides an image of what is directly behind your vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse (R). • Expanded Rear View: Provides an expanded 180 degree image of what is directly behind your vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse (R). • Normal Front View: Provides an image of what is directly in front your vehicle when your vehicle is in neutral (N) or drive (D). • Expanded Front View: Provides an expanded 180 degree image of what is directly in front your vehicle when your vehicle is in neutral (N) or drive (D). 216 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control The indicator appears in the information display. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION E71340 Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. You can use cruise control when your vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h). Setting the Cruise Speed Drive to the speed you prefer. Press to set the current speed. USING CRUISE CONTROL (IF Press to set the current speed. EQUIPPED) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. WARNING: Do not use cruise control on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when the road surface is slippery. This could result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Note: The indicator changes color. Changing the Set Speed Press and release to increase the set speed in small increments. WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed could increase above the set speed. The system does not apply the brakes. Press and release to decrease the set speed in small increments. Note: The system cancels if your vehicle speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under the set speed when driving uphill. Press and hold either button to accelerate or decelerate, respectively. Release the button when you reach the speed you prefer. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the speed you prefer. Press either button. Note: If you accelerate by pressing only the accelerator pedal, the set speed does not change. When you release the accelerator pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that you previously set. Canceling the Set Speed E266656 Press the button, or tap the brake pedal to cancel the set speed. The cruise controls are on the steering wheel. See Cruise Control (page 80). Note: The system remembers the set speed. Switching Cruise Control On Press ON. 217 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed WARNING: Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended because this can affect the normal operation of the system. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control, which could result in serious injury. Press to resume the set speed. Switching Cruise Control Off E265297 Press and release the button when the system is in standby mode or switch the ignition off. WARNING: Adaptive cruise control may not detect stationary or slow moving vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h). Note: You erase the set speed when you switch the system off. WARNING: Adaptive cruise control does not detect pedestrians or objects in the road. USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Adaptive cruise control does not detect oncoming vehicles in the same lane. WARNING: Always pay close attention to changing road conditions when using adaptive cruise control. The system does not replace attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to the road may result in a crash, serious injury or death. WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is not a crash warning or avoidance system. WARNING: Do not use adaptive cruise control with a snow plow blade installed. WARNING: Do not use the adaptive cruise control when entering or leaving a highway, on roads with intersections or roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep slopes. The system adjusts your vehicle speed to maintain the set gap between you and the vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You can select four gap settings. The system uses a radar sensor that projects a beam directly in front of your vehicle. WARNING: Do not use the system in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain, spray or snow. WARNING: Do not use the system when towing a trailer that has aftermarket electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. 218 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display. E164805 E266656 A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a vehicle detected in front of you. The adaptive cruise controls are on the steering wheel. Note: When adaptive cruise control is active, the speedometer may vary slightly from the set speed displayed in the information display. Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On Press and release the button. Following a Vehicle E265296 E144529 The indicator, current gap setting and set speed appear in the information display. WARNING: When following a vehicle, your vehicle does not decelerate automatically to a stop, nor does your vehicle always decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash without driver intervention. Always apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. WARNING: Adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or a delayed warning. You should always apply the brakes when necessary. Failure to do so may result in a crash, serious injury or death. E164805 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed Drive to the speed you prefer. Note: When you are following a vehicle and you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive cruise control may provide a small temporary acceleration to help you pass. Press and release either button. Note: The brakes may emit noise when applied by the system. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 219 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control When a vehicle ahead of you enters the same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster. Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from the vehicle ahead until: • The vehicle in front of you accelerates to a speed above the set speed. • The vehicle in front of you moves out of the lane you are in. • Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph (20 km/h). • You set a new gap distance. E164805 The selected gap appears in the information display as shown by the bars in the image. Note: The gap setting is time dependent and therefore the distance adjusts with your vehicle speed. Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap appropriate to the driving conditions. The system applies the brakes to slow your vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from the vehicle in front. The system only applies limited braking. You can override the system by applying the brakes. Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings If the system determines that its maximum braking level will not be sufficient, an audible warning sounds when the system continues to brake. A red warning bar displays on the windshield and you must take immediate action. Graphic display, bars indicated between vehicles Distance Gap Dynamic behavior 1 Closest. Sport. Setting the Gap Distance 2 Close. Normal. You can decrease or increase the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front by pressing the gap control. 3 Medium. Normal. 4 Far. Comfort. Press and release to decrease the gap distance. Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting. Press and release to increase the gap distance. Overriding the Set Speed E263697 E263696 WARNING: If you override the system by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does not automatically apply the brakes to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead. 220 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed When you press the accelerator pedal, you override the set speed and gap distance. E144529 Press and release the button. Use the accelerator pedal normally to intentionally exceed the set speed limit. Your vehicle speed returns to the previously set speed and gap setting. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. When you override the system, the green indicator light illuminates and the vehicle image does not appear in the information display. The system resumes operation when you release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower speed if following a slower vehicle. Note: Only use resume if you are aware of the set speed and intend to return to it. Changing the Set Speed The system is not functional at vehicle speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). The information display indicates low engine speed, an audible alarm sounds and the automatic braking releases if the vehicle drops below this speed. Automatic Cancellation Press and release to increase the set speed in small increments. Press and release to decrease the set speed in small increments. Automatic cancellation can also occur when: • • Press and hold either button to change the set speed in large increments. Release the button when you reach the speed you prefer. The tires lose traction. You apply the parking brake. Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an audible warning sounds and a message appears in the information display. Automatic braking releases. Press the accelerator or brake pedal until you reach the speed you prefer. Press either button. Hilly Condition Usage The system may apply the brakes to slow the vehicle to the new set speed. The set speed displays continuously in the information display when the system is active. Note: An audible alarm sounds and the system shuts down if it applies brakes for an extended period of time. This allows the brakes to cool. The system functions normally again when the brakes have cooled. Canceling the Set Speed Select a lower gear during prolonged downhill driving on steep slopes, such as mountainous areas, when the system is active. In such situations, the system needs additional engine braking to reduce the load on the vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent the brakes from overheating. Press and release the button or tap the brake pedal. The set speed does not erase. 221 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off E265297 Press and release the button when the system is in standby mode, or switch the ignition off. Note: You erase the set speed and gap setting when you switch the system off. Detection Issues WARNING: On rare occasions, detection issues can occur due to the road infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. WARNING: If the system malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. E71621 Detection issues can occur: The radar sensor has a limited field of view. It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a vehicle later than expected in some situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not illuminate if the system does not detect a vehicle in front of you. A When driving on a different line than the vehicle in front. B With vehicles that edge into your lane. The system can only detect these vehicles once they move fully into your lane. C There may be issues with the detection of vehicles in front when driving into and coming out of a bend or curve in the road. In these cases, the system may brake late or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take action when necessary. If something hits the front end of your vehicle or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may change. This could cause missed or false vehicle detection. 222 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control Blocked Sensor Optimal system performance requires a clear view of the road by the windshield-mounted camera. Optimal performance may not occur if: • • • The camera is blocked. There is poor visibility or lighting conditions. There are bad weather conditions. E145632 System Not Available A message displays if something obstructs the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor is in the lower grille. The system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not function when something blocks the sensor. Conditions that can cause the system to deactivate or prevent the system from activating when requested include: • A blocked sensor. • High brake temperature. • A failure in the system or a related system. Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind a fascia panel. Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front protectors and aftermarket lights may also block the sensor. Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying: Cause Action The surface of the radar is dirty or obstructed. Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object causing the obstruction. The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is free from obstruction. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead. 223 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Cruise Control Cause Action Water, snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals. Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect any vehicles ahead. You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no roadside objects. Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control. Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle. Switching to Normal Cruise Control WARNING: Normal cruise control will not brake when your vehicle is approaching slower vehicles. Always be aware of which mode you have selected and apply the brakes when necessary. The cruise control indicator light replaces the adaptive cruise E71340 control indicator light if you select normal cruise control. The gap setting does not display, and the system does not respond to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains active to maintain set speed. You can change from adaptive cruise control to normal cruise control through the information display. 224 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: The system may not correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with a suspension kit not approved by us. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNING: The system is designed to aid the driver. It is not intended to replace your attention and judgment. You are still responsible to drive with due care and attention. Note: Keep the windshield free from obstructions. For example, bird droppings, insects and snow or ice. WARNING: At all times, you are responsible for controlling your vehicle, supervising the system and intervening, if required. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Note: The system will store the on or off setting in the information display menu through ignition cycles. Note: If the camera is blocked or if the windshield is damaged, the system may not function. Note: If enabled in the menu, the system activates at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). When below the activation speed, the information display informs the driver that the system is unavailable. WARNING: The system may not function if the sensor is blocked. WARNING: Take regular rest breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system to warn you. WARNING: Certain driving styles may result in the system warning you even if you are not feeling tired. WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. E249505 WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. The system automatically monitors your driving behavior using various inputs including the front camera sensor. WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. If the system detects that your driving alertness is reduced below a certain threshold, the system will alert you using a chime and a message in the cluster display. 225 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids USING DRIVER ALERT LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF Switching the System On and Off EQUIPPED) Switch the system on or off using the information display. See General Information (page 104). WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. When activated, the system will monitor your alertness level based upon your driving behavior in relation to the lane markings, and other factors. System Warnings Note: The system will not issue warnings below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h). WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle. The warning system has two stages. At first, the system issues a temporary warning that you need to take a rest. This message will only appear for a short time. If the system detects further reduction in driving alertness, it may issue another warning that will remain in the information display for a longer time. You can press OK on the steering wheel control to clear the warning. WARNING: In cold and severe weather conditions the system may not function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit sensor performance. WARNING: Large contrasts in outside lighting can limit sensor performance. Resetting the System You can reset the system by either: • • WARNING: The system will not operate if the sensor cannot track the road lane markings. Switching the ignition off and on. Stopping the vehicle and then opening and closing the driver’s door. WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly track lane markings as other structures or objects. This can result in a false or missed warning. WARNING: The system may not operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield free from obstruction. 226 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids When the system is functioning in the combined Alert and Aid mode, the system first provides steering assistance by gently counter steering your vehicle back into the lane, followed by a warning that vibrates the steering wheel if the vehicle is still out of the lane markings. WARNING: If damage occurs in the immediate area surrounding the sensor, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Note: The system works above 40 mph (64 km/h). Switching the System On and Off Note: The system works as long as the camera can detect one lane marking. Note: The system on or off setting is stored until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey is detected. If the system detects a MyKey, it defaults to on and the mode sets to alert. Note: When you select aid or alert and aid mode and the system detects no steering activity for a short period, the system alerts you to put your hands on the steering wheel. The system may detect a light grip or touch on the steering wheel as hands off driving. Note: The system may not function if the camera is blocked, or if the windshield is damaged or dirty. E132099 Press the button on the direction indicator stalk to switch the system on or off. System Settings The system has optional setting menus available. The system stores the last known selection for each of these settings. You do not need to readjust your settings each time you switch the system on. Mode: This setting allows you to select which of the system features you can enable. E249505 When you switch the system on and it detects an unintentional drift out of your lane is likely to occur, the system notifies or assists you to stay in your lane through the steering system and information display. In Alert mode, the system provides a warning by vibrating the steering wheel. In Aid mode, the system provides steering assistance by gently counter steering your vehicle back into the lane. 227 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids E165515 E165517 Alert only – Provides a steering wheel vibration when the system detects an unintended lane departure. A Alert B Aid Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance toward the lane center. If your vehicle continues drifting out of the lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the vehicle, the system provides a steering wheel vibration. Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate general zone coverage. They do not provide exact zone parameters. Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of the steering wheel vibration used for the alert and alert + aid modes. This setting does not affect the aid mode. E165516 Aid only – Provides steering assistance toward the lane center when the system detects an unintended lane departure. • • • 228 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Low. Normal. High. Driving Aids System Display • • • Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver. The road has no or poor lane markings in the camera field-of-view. The camera is obscured or unable to detect the lane markings due to environmental, traffic or vehicle conditions. For example, significant sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog, following a large vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the lane or poor headlamp illumination. See Troubleshooting for additional information. E267131 If you switch the system on in alert mode, a graphic of a vehicle with lane markings appears in the information display. Green: Indicates that the system is available or ready to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side. If you switch the system on in aid or alert and aid mode, a separate white icon also appears, or in some vehicles, arrows display with the lane markings. Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping aid intervention. Red: Indicates that the system is providing or has just provided a lane keeping alert warning. When you switch the system off, the lane marking graphics do not display. The system can be temporarily suppressed at any time by the following: While the system is on, the color of the lane markings change to indicate the system status. • • • • • Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily unable to provide a warning or intervention on the indicated side. This may be because: • • Your vehicle is under the activation speed. The direction indicator is active. Quick braking. Fast acceleration. Using the turn signal indicator. Evasive steering maneuver. Driving too close to the lane markings. Troubleshooting Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road? Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature. The sun is shining directly into the camera lens. A quick intentional lane change has occurred. 229 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road? Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings. Driving at high speeds in curves. The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago. Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones. Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light. Sudden offset in lane markings. ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active. There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield. You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you. Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa. There is standing water on the road. Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads. Lane width is too narrow or too wide. The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement. Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads. Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode? High cross winds are present. There is a large road crown. Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs. Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure. The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified. 230 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids Note: The system does not prevent contact with other vehicles. It is not designed to detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals or other infrastructures. BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Using the Blind Spot Information System WARNING: Do not use the blind spot information system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. The blind spot information system is not a replacement for careful driving. Vehicles with Automatic Transmission The system turns on when all of the following occur: • You start your vehicle. • You shift into drive (D). • The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. Note: The system does not operate in park (P) or reverse (R). Vehicles with Manual Transmission The system turns on when all of the following occur: • You start your vehicle. • The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). Note: The system does not operate in reverse (R). System Lights and Messages E255695 The system is designed to detect vehicles that may have entered the blind spot zone. The detection area is on both sides of your vehicle, extending rearward from the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The detection area extends to approximately 59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph (48 km/h) to alert you of faster approaching vehicles. E142442 231 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids Switching the System On and Off When the system detects a vehicle, an alert indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. If you turn the direction indicator on for that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator flashes. You can switch the system off using the information display. See General Information (page 104). When you switch the system off, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. When you switch the system on or off, the alert indicators flash twice. Note: The system may not alert you if a vehicle quickly passes through the detection zone. Note: The system remembers the last setting when you start your vehicle. Blocked Sensors Note: The system may not correctly operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a trailer tow module and tow bar approved by us, the system turns off when you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar, we recommend that you switch the system off when you attach a trailer. To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer. E205199 The sensors are behind the rear bumper on both sides of your vehicle. CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (IF Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. EQUIPPED) Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects. WARNING: Do not use the cross traffic alert system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder before reversing out of a parking space. The cross traffic alert system is not a replacement for careful driving. Note: Blocked sensors could affect system performance. If the sensors become blocked, a message may appear in the information display. See Information Messages (page 115). The alert indicators remain illuminated but the system does not alert you. WARNING: The system may not operate properly during severe weather conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain and spray. Always drive with due care and attention. Failure to take care may result in a crash. System Errors If the system detects a fault, a warning lamp illuminates and a message displays. See Information Messages (page 115). The system is designed to alert you of vehicles approaching from the sides when you shift into reverse (R). 232 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids Using the Cross Traffic Alert System obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness. The system is designed to detect vehicles that approach with a speed up to 37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the sensors are partially, mostly or fully The system turns on when you start the engine and you shift into reverse (R). The system turns off when you shift out of reverse (R). E142440 The sensor on the left-hand side is only partially obstructed and zone coverage on the right-hand side is maximized. 233 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids E142441 Note: In exceptional conditions, the system could alert you even when there is nothing in the detection zone, for example a vehicle passing in the distance. Zone coverage also decreases when parking at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage on that side is severely reduced. Blocked Sensors System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts E205199 The sensors are behind the rear bumper on both sides of your vehicle. Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. E142442 Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper stickers, repair compound or other objects. When the system detects a vehicle, an indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on the side the approaching vehicle is coming from. A tone sounds and a message appears in the information display. Note: Blocked sensors could affect system performance. 234 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids To permanently switch the system off, contact an authorized dealer. If the sensors are blocked, a message may appear in the information display when you shift into reverse (R). See Information Messages (page 115). STEERING System Limitations Electric Power Steering The system may not correctly operate when any of the following occur: • The sensors are blocked. • Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are obstructing the sensors. • Vehicles approach at speeds greater than 37 mph (60 km/h). • The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph (12 km/h). • You reverse out of an angled parking space. WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a message displays in the information display. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the ignition on and watch the information display for a steering system warning message. If a steering system warning message returns, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. System Errors If the system detects a fault a message displays. See Information Messages (page 115). WARNING: If the system detects an error, you may not feel a difference in the steering, however a serious condition may exist. Obtain immediate service from an authorized dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of steering control. Switching the System Off and On You can temporarily switch the system off using the information display. See Information Messages (page 115). When you switch system off, a message displays. See Information Messages (page 115). Your vehicle has an electric power steering system. There is no fluid reservoir. No maintenance is required. Note: The system turns on each time you switch the ignition on and you shift into reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the system off, it turns on the next time you switch the ignition on. If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving, electric power steering assistance is lost. The steering system still operates and you can steer your vehicle manually. Manually steering your vehicle requires more effort. Note: The system may not correctly operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a trailer tow module and tow bar approved by us, the system turns off when you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar, we recommend that you switch the system off when you attach a trailer. 235 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort required for you to steer your vehicle. This increased effort prevents overheating and permanent damage to the steering system. You do not lose the ability to steer your vehicle manually. Typical steering and driving maneuvers allow the system to cool and return to normal operation. PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: You are responsible for controlling your vehicle at all times. The system is designed to be an aid and does not relieve you of your responsibility to drive with due care and attention. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. Steering Tips If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • Correct tire pressures. • Uneven tire wear. • Loose or worn suspension components. • Loose or worn steering components. • Improper vehicle alignment. WARNING: The system does not detect vehicles that are driving in a different direction, pedestrians at night, cyclists or animals. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Note: A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander or pull. WARNING: The system does not operate during hard acceleration or steering. Failure to take care may lead to a crash or personal injury. Adaptive Learning The electronic power steering system adaptive learning helps correct road irregularities and improves overall handling and steering feel. It communicates with the brake system to help operate advanced stability control and accident avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, you must drive your vehicle a short distance before the system relearns the strategy and reactivates all systems. WARNING: The system may fail or operate with reduced function during cold and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the system. Keep the front camera and radar free of snow and ice. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. WARNING: In situations where the vehicle camera has limited detection capability, this may reduce system performance. These situations include but are not limited to direct or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail lights, unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians with complex backgrounds, 236 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids running pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or pedestrians that the system cannot distinguish from a group. Failure to take care may result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. WARNING: The pre-collision assist system's brake support reduces collision speed only if you brake your vehicle before any collision. You must press your brake pedal as you would in any typical braking situation. E156131 When your vehicle rapidly approaches another vehicle, a flashing visual warning appears and an audible warning tone sounds. WARNING: The system cannot help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this system to replace driver judgment and the need to maintain a safe distance and speed. The brake support system assists you in reducing any collision speed by pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of collision continues to increase after the audio-visual warning, the brake support prepares the brake system for rapid braking. Brake support does not automatically apply the brakes. If you press the brake pedal, the system could apply additional braking up to maximum braking force, even if you lightly press the brake pedal. Note: The system does not detect, warn or respond to potential collisions with vehicles to the rear or sides of your vehicle. Using the Pre-Collision Assist System The system is active at speeds above approximately 5 mph (8 km/h). You can adjust the warning system's sensitivity through your information display. See General Information (page 104). Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist alerts as being too frequent or disturbing, then you can reduce the alert sensitivity, though the manufacturer recommends using the highest sensitivity setting where possible. Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer and later system warnings. E156130 The system alerts you of certain collision risks. The system's sensor detects your vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles traveling in the same direction as your vehicle. 237 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Aids Blocked Sensors If a blocked sensor message appears in the information display, dirt, water or an object is blocking the sensor. The sensor is located behind a cover near the driver side of the lower grille. If anything blocks the sensor, your vehicle cannot see through the sensor, and the system does not work. Possible causes for the blocked sensor message and corrective actions are listed below. E145632 Cause Action The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty or obstructed. Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the obstruction. The surface of the radar sensor cover is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. The radar may take several minutes to reset after you remove the obstruction. Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air interferes with the radar signals. The system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after weather conditions improve, the system automatically reactivates. Swirling water, snow or ice on the road surface interferes with the radar signals. The system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after weather conditions improve, the system automatically reactivates. • • System Limitations Due to the nature of radar technology, there may be certain instances where vehicles do not provide a collision warning. These include: • • • • • Small distance to vehicle ahead. Large steering wheel and pedal movements (very active driving style). Damage to the front end of your vehicle may alter the radar sensor's coverage area. This may result in missed or false collision warnings. Have an authorized dealer check your radar sensor for proper coverage and operation. Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving below 6 mph (10 km/h). Pedestrians or objects in the roadway. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane. Severe weather conditions (see blocked sensor section). Debris build-up on the grille near the headlamps (see blocked sensor section). 238 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying CARGO NETS (IF EQUIPPED) REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE (IF EQUIPPED) Cargo Management System (If WARNING: This net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision or heavy braking. Equipped) The cargo net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area. Attach the net to the anchors provided. Repeat the attachment on both sides of the vehicle. E142445 The system is located in the floor of the cargo area. Lift the handle to open. Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped) E142446 E204323 Vehicles with the standard size spare tire can adjust the load floor to two positions. The front of the load floor can be placed either on (for high position) or below (for low position) the ledges behind the rear seats. The rear of the load floor always sits on the two small shelves located on the liftgate trim. 239 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS (IF EQUIPPED) LUGGAGE COVERS (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Make sure that the posts are properly latched in mounting features. The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is not securely installed. WARNING: When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. WARNING: Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade. They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash. Use the cargo shade to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle. The maximum recommended load, evenly distributed on the crossbars, is: • 100 lb (45 kg) for vehicles without a moonroof. • 45 lb (20 kg) for vehicles with a moonroof. For correct roof rack system function, you must place loads directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. When using the roof rack system, we recommend you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle. Make sure that you securely fasten the load. Check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop. E142447 Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the mounting features located behind the rear seat on the rear trim panels to install the cargo shade. To operate the cargo shade: 1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade rearward. 2. Secure both ends of the support rod into the retention slots located on the rear quarter trim panels. 240 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying Thumbwheel Kit E203063 1. Remove the crossbar bolts at both sides of the front crossbar by using a T25 torx tool or a similar tool. 2. Remove the crossbar by sliding the ends off of the side rails. 3. Move the crossbar to the new side rail position and slide onto rail. 4. Replace and tighten the bolts at both sides of the crossbar by using a T25 torx tool or a similar tool. Note: There may be snap caps in the new side rail position, which must be removed before installing the crossbar. You can remove these caps by using a T25 torx tool or a similar tool. E203659 A thumbwheel kit is included in your vehicle for tying light loads to your roof. The kit is located in the glovebox. Make sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time you add or remove load from the roof rack, and periodically while traveling. Make sure that the load is secure before traveling. Note: There may be snap caps in the side rail, which must be removed before installing the thumbwheels. These caps can be removed by using a T25 torx tool or a similar tool. Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped) LOAD LIMIT Note: For less wind noise and better aerodynamics, only install the crossbars when you need them for carrying cargo. Follow the steps to reposition or remove the rear crossbar. You can remove the front crossbar fasteners by unscrewing the assembly. Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer This section guides you in the proper loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both. Keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle provides maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before you load your vehicle, become familiar with the 241 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying Canada may not have a tire and loading label. Look for “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire and Loading Information label is the maximum payload for your vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If you install any additional equipment on your vehicle, you must determine the new payload. Subtract the weight of the equipment from the payload listed on the Tire and Loading label. When towing, trailer tongue weight or king pin weight is also part of payload. following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight rating, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label or Safety Compliance Certification label. Tire and Loading Label Information Example: WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. E198719 Payload Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that your vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading label. The label is either on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles exported outside the US and 242 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Safety Compliance Certification Label Example: GAWR is the maximum allowable weight that a single axle (front or rear) can carry. These numbers are on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating. E198828 WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification label vehicle weight limits can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) GVWR is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes all options, equipment, passengers and cargo. It appears on the Safety Compliance Certification label. The label is located on the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver seating position. The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight Maximum loaded trailer weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer) for more detailed information. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) GCWR is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer, including all cargo and passengers, that the vehicle can handle without risking damage. (Important: The towing 243 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight Rating.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the Gross Combined Weight of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The gross combined weight must never exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating. Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide available at an authorized dealer. WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating can adversely affect the performance and handling of your vehicle, cause vehicle damage and can result in the loss of control of your vehicle, serious personal injury or death. Steps for determining the correct load limit: 1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.) WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower your vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. 244 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past two years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for twelve 100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms. Helpful examples for calculating the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, four of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. 245 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Load Carrying The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the front or the rear gross axle weight rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification label. Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles WARNING: When loading the roof racks, we recommend you evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. 246 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Towing Load Placement TOWING A TRAILER To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when driving: • Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor. • Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side trailer tires. • Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight to go above or below 10-15% of the loaded trailer weight. • Select a ball mount with the correct rise or drop and load capacity. When both the loaded vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side. When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up for towing is located in another chapter of this manual. See Load Limit (page 241). You can also find information in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide available at your authorized dealer, or online. WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Note: See Recommended Towing Weights (page 248). Your vehicle may have electrical items, such as fuses or relays, related to towing. See Fuses (page 271). Your vehicle's load capacity designation is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle or trailer. Towing a trailer places an extra load on your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components periodically during, and after, any towing operation. 247 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Towing RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/ RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration listed in the chart below. Note: Be sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) if your vehicle can tow a class I trailer or 40 ft² (3.72 m²) if your vehicle can tow a class III trailer. Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point. Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this specified weight, as the vehicle’s electrical system may not include the wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes. WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation. Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it when it begins. Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed is too high, the system may turn on multiple times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed. The system applies the brakes to the individual wheels and reduces engine torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer begins to sway, the stability control warning lamp flashes and a message appears in the information display. See Information Messages (page 115). Slow your vehicle down, pull safely to the side of the road and check for correct load distribution. See Load Carrying (page 239). You can switch this feature off in the information display. When you switch the ignition on, the system automatically turns on. 248 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Towing Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the Engine 2.3L GTDI 2WD 1 1 3.5L TiVCT 2WD 2.3L GTDI 2WD 2 2 3.5L TiVCT 2WD 2.3L GTDI 4WD 1 1 3.5L TiVCT 4WD 2.3L GTDI 4WD 2 3.5L TiVCT 4WD 3.5L GTDI 4WD 2 2 maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart. Maximum GCWR Maximum trailer weight 6,900 lb (3,130 kg) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 6,900 lb (3,130 kg) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 7,950 lb (3,606 kg) 3,000 lb (1,361 kg) 9,950 lb (4,513 kg) 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 7,100 lb (3,221 kg) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 7,100 lb (3,221 kg) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 8,150 lb (3,697 kg) 3,000 lb (1,361 kg) 10,150 lb (4,604 kg) 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 3 10,400 lb (4,717 kg) 5,000 lb (2,268 kg) 3 1 Without 3 Trailer Towing Package. Trailer Towing Package. 3 For towing trailers up to 3500 lb (1588 kg), use a weight-carrying hitch and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your vehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers over 3500 lb (1588 kg), up to the maximum trailer weight, we recommend you use a weight-distributing hitch to increase front axle load when towing. 2 With 249 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Towing When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use the following procedure: ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS Follow these guidelines for safe towing: • Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km). • Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer. • See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications. • Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your scheduled maintenance information. • If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency gives you. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. You can find information on load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety Compliance label as well as instructions on calculating your vehicle's load in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit (page 241). 6. Park the loaded vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender. This is H1. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle without the weight-distributing bars connected. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender a second time. This is H2. Install and adjust the tension in the weight-distributing bars so that the height of your vehicle's front wheel opening on the fender is approximately half the way down from H2, toward H1. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 2-6. When the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle: • Lock the bar tension adjuster in place. • Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the hitch. • Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by law or the trailer manufacturer. Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight. Hitches Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto the bumper or attaches to the axle. Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the total trailer weight is on the tongue. Safety Chains Weight-distributing Hitches Note: Never attach safety chains to the bumper. Always connect the safety chains to the hook retainers of your vehicle hitch. WARNING: Do not adjust the spring bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is higher than before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and could result in serious personal injury. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross them under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the chains to drag on the ground. 250 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Towing Before Towing a Trailer Trailer Brakes Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles. WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. When Towing a Trailer • Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer's specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations. • • The rating for the tow vehicle's braking system operation is at the gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating. • Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb (680 kg) when loaded. • Trailer Lamps • WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system resulting in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical equipment may be required. • Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. • • 1. 251 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 mi (800 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km). When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place the gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and transmission cooling and to help A/C performance. Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less effective. If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel economy and transmission cooling. Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and brake gradually. Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade: Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from traffic flow. Towing 2. Set your vehicle parking brake. 3. Place the automatic transmission in park (P). 4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included with vehicle.) TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Emergency Towing Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC) WARNING: If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water. If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: • Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction. • Place the transmission in neutral (N). If you cannot shift the transmission into neutral (N), you may need to override the gear shifter. See Automatic Transmission (page 184). • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km). When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components: • Causing internal damage to the components. • Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability. Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been submerged in water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or other axle repair is required. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS - 3.5L DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™ WARNING: If your vehicle has a steering wheel lock make sure the ignition is in the accessory or on position when being towed. 252 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Towing Emergency Towing 3. Switch the vehicle off by pressing the keyless start button once. 4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable from the battery. You need the door key to lock and unlock doors when the battery cable is disconnected. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 296). Note: The anti-theft system does not work until you reconnect the battery cable. If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies or vehicle transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission configuration) under the following conditions: • Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction. • Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot shift into neutral (N), you may need to override it. See Transmission (page 184). • Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). • Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km). Start the engine within 15 minutes of reconnecting the battery cable. Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and then turning the ignition key until the vehicle starts. 2. Press the brake pedal and shift the transmission into neutral (N). 3. Switch off your vehicle by turning the ignition key past the accessory position. The key position is between the accessory and off positions. See Ignition Switch (page 166). 4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable from the battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 296). Note: The anti-theft system does not work until you reconnect the battery cable. You can tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Start the engine within 15 minutes of reconnecting the battery cable. Recreational Towing Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. See Climate Control (page 129). If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground: • Tow only in the forward direction. • Release the parking brake. Vehicles with Keyless Start 1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal, and then pressing the keyless start button until the vehicle starts. 2. Press the brake pedal and shift the gearshift into neutral (N). 253 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Towing All Vehicles • • Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h). Start the engine and allow it to run for a few minutes at the beginning of each day and every six hours thereafter. With the engine running and your foot on the brake, shift into drive (D) and then into reverse (R) before shifting back into neutral (N). Front-wheel Drive Vehicles Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If you are using a tow dolly, follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider. Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Alternatively, you can tow your four-wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels off the ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do not tow your four-wheel drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground (by using a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the ground. This causes damage to your four-wheel drive system. If you are using a vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider. 254 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Hints Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel economy: • Sudden accelerations or hard accelerations. • Revving the engine before turning it off. • Idle for periods longer than one minute. • Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. • Use the air conditioner or front defroster. • Use the speed control in hilly terrain. • Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. • Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer. • Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of weight carried). • Driving with the wheels out of alignment. BREAKING-IN You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed frequently and change up through the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km). ECONOMICAL DRIVING Your fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the conditions you drive under, and how you maintain your vehicle. You may improve your fuel economy by keeping these things in mind: • Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion. • Drive at steady speeds without stopping. • Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. • Close the windows for high-speed driving. • Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]). • Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size. • Use the recommended engine oil. • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. Conditions • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. • Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski racks or luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed (if equipped). • Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 5–10 mi (12–16 km) of driving. • Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. 255 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Hints • • • • Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. Close the windows for high-speed driving. • • • Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the brakes and to check that they work. Check that the horn works. Check that the exterior lights work. Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works. FLOOR MATS DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING: Use a floor mat designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you may lose control of your vehicle. Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage. WARNING: Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the front rocker area of your vehicle. WARNING: Secure the floor mat to both retention devices so that it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. WARNING: Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This could result in the floor mat interfering with the operation of the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction could result in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal injury or death. E259345 When driving through standing water, drive very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your brake performance and traction may be limited. After driving through water and as soon as it is safe to do so: 256 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Driving Hints WARNING: Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while your vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control. E142666 To install the floor mats, position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make sure they are secure. 257 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Roadside Emergencies • ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • 24 hours a day, seven days a week. • For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner's Manual portfolio. • Roadside Assistance covers: • A flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles supplied with a tire inflation kit). • Battery jump start. • Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer's responsibility). • Fuel delivery — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery service to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. • Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m) of a paved or county maintained road, no recoveries. Towing — independent service contractors, if not prohibited by state, local or municipal law, shall tow Ford eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer within 35 mi (56 km) of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests a tow to an authorized dealer that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from the disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km). Roadside Assistance includes up to $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services. Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. This card is in the owner's information portfolio in the glove compartment. United States vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company reimburses a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement information, United States vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers need to submit their original receipts. 258 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Roadside Emergencies Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance HAZARD FLASHERS Note: The hazard flashers operate when the ignition is in any position, or if the key is not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not running, the battery loses charge. As a result, there may be insufficient power to restart your vehicle. To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is eligible within Canada or the continental United States. The flasher control is on the instrument panel. Use your hazard flashers when your vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage is concurrent with the powertrain coverage period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. • • If you require more information, please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction indicators flash. Press the button again to switch them off. FUEL SHUTOFF Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance WARNING: If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the fuel system checked. Failure to follow this instruction could result in fire, personal injury or death. Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty Guide in the glove compartment of your vehicle. Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once the vehicle determines the systems are safe, then the vehicle allows you to restart. Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third attempt, contact a qualified technician. The service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S. coverage. The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel to the engine in the event of a moderate to severe crash. Not every impact causes a shutoff. If you require more information, please refer to the coverage section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at www.ford.ca. Should your vehicle shut off after a crash, you may restart your vehicle. 259 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Roadside Emergencies If your vehicle has a key system: 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Switch to start position. 3. Switch off the ignition. 4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the fuel pump. 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps 1 through 4. WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. If your vehicle has a push button start system: 1. Press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle. 2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP to switch on your vehicle. 3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press START/STOP to switch off your vehicle. 4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal and START/STOP, or press START/STOP without pressing the brake pedal. 5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat steps 1 through 4. WARNING: Use only adequately sized cables with insulated clamps. Preparing Your Vehicle Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage. Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your vehicle. Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle electrical system. JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two vehicles do not touch. WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. Connecting the Jumper Cables WARNING: Do not attach the cables to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts. To avoid reverse polarity connections, make sure that you correctly identify the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both the disabled and booster vehicles before connecting the cables. 260 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Roadside Emergencies 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle's engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system, or connect the negative (-) cable to a ground connection point if available. WARNING: Do not attach the end of the positive cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located above the positive (+) terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow through and cause damage to the fuses. WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. Jump Starting Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle represents the booster vehicle. 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and rev the engine moderately, or press the accelerator gently to keep your engine speed between 2000 and 3000 RPM, as shown in your tachometer. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both vehicle engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. 1 Removing the Jumper Cables 3 Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 4 2 E142664 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. 261 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Roadside Emergencies POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the direction indicators and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners. 4 2 The horn and indicators turn off when: • You press the hazard control button. • You press the panic button on the remote entry transmitter (if equipped). • Your vehicle runs out of power. • Sounding of the horn is only enabled in specific markets. 1 TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE 3 E142665 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable from the disabled vehicle. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle battery. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle battery. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. E143886 262 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Roadside Emergencies If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. Recovery Hook Location We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means. Installing the Recovery Hook If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in recovery hook, it is with the spare tire kit or the rear under floor storage. There is an installation point for the recovery hook located behind the fascia. Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install it. Make sure that the recovery hook is fully tightened. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. It is acceptable to have your front-wheel drive vehicle towed from the front if using proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front wheels off the ground. When towing in this manner, the rear wheels can remain on the ground. Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the front wheels placed on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission. E146284 Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive vehicle requires that all wheels be off the ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents damage to the transmission, all-wheel or four-wheel drive system and vehicle. TOWING POINTS (IF EQUIPPED) E188420 Due to local market requirements in some countries, some vehicles may be equipped with a recovery hook. Remove the recovery hook cover by prying it off at the notch with a screwdriver or similar object. Note: Use a soft cloth to cover the prying tool. This helps prevent scratch marks to the vehicle's paint. 263 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Website www.owner.ford.com Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. These are some of the items that can be found online: • U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State or Zip Code. • Owner Manuals. • Maintenance Schedules. • Recalls. • Ford Extended Service Plans. • Ford Genuine Accessories. • Service specials and promotions. Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and equipment, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer. In Canada: A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford. Mailing address Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8 Away From Home Telephone If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer. 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Website www.ford.ca In the United States: Twitter Mailing address @FordServiceCA (English Canada) @FordServiceQC (Quebec) Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, MI 48126 Additional Assistance If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: Telephone 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) 1. Additional information and resources are available online: 264 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or servicing authorized dealer. Customer Assistance 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. 3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. In order to help us serve you better, please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center: • Vehicle Identification Number. • Your telephone number (home and business). • The name of the authorized dealer and city where located. • The vehicle’s current odometer reading. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs first: In some states within the United States, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state's warranty laws, and Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt. Additionally, in some states within the United States, a consumer has the option of submitting a warranty dispute to the BBB Auto Line before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time). In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 265 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Customer Assistance You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter. BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below, please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle, information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines. THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY) Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer. If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program. You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or writing to: The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing. BBB AUTO LINE 3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600 Arlington, Virginia 22201 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673. Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation. 266 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur fuel for diesel engines. If you cannot find the proper fuel recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship Center. The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. The use of improper fuels in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the United States. In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact the corresponding Ford Customer Assistance Center: CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit www.camvap.ca. FORD MOTOR COMPANY Customer Relationship Centers in: 267 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Customer Assistance Customer Relationship Center Phone Fax E-mail Asia Pacific N/A N/A [email protected] Caribbean and Central America +1 313 594 4857 - [email protected] 971 4 3327 266 [email protected] Ford 80004443673 Lincoln 80004441066 Middle East UAE 80004441066 Saudi Arabia 8008443673 Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi 800850078 North Africa N/A N/A [email protected] Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands +1-800-841-3673 N/A [email protected] Sub-Saharan Africa +1-313-594-4857 N/A [email protected] South Korea +82-02-1600-6003 N/A [email protected] or [email protected] If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require additional assistance or clarification, please contact the respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Global Trade Services by emailing, [email protected]. Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673. 268 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Customer Assistance If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, Michigan 48170 Attention: Customer Service Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual French Owner’s Manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed previously in this section. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada and Ford of Canada. E142557 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. 269 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Customer Assistance Transport Canada Contact Information Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English) Website http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French) Phone 1–800–333–0510 Ford of Canada Contact Information Website www.ford.ca Phone 1–800–565-3673 270 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from overloads. FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART Power Distribution Box If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, some features will need to be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 296). WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs. E193713 271 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 1 2 3 4 Fuse Rating 1 Powertrain control module power. 1 Engine emissions (MIL). 20A 20A 1 20A 20A Protected Component 1 A/C clutch control relay coil. Variable Air Conditioning Compressor. Active grille shutters. Ignition coils. 5 — Not used. 6 — Not used. 7 — Not used. 8 — Not used. 9 — 10 11 12 15A — 40A — 14 — 16 Heated mirrors. Not used. 2 13 15 Not used. 1 Heated rear window. Not used. Powertrain control module relay. 1 Horn relay power. 1 A/C clutch relay power. 20A 10A 17 — Rear heated window and heated mirrors relay. 18 — Rear blower motor relay. 19 — Not used. 20 — Left hand side cooling fan relay. 21 — Cooling fans series/parallel relay. 22 25A 2 Electronic fan relay 2. 272 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating 23 — Not used. 24 — Right hand side electronic cooling fan 3 relay. 25 — Not used. 26 27 Protected Component 2 Anti-lock brake system valves. 2 Trailer tow battery charge relay power. 30A 30A 28 — Not used. 29 — Starter relay. 30 — 31 32 33 34 Not used. 1 Electric power-assisted steering. 1 Anti-lock brake system module. 10A 10A 1 10A 1 10A Powertrain control module (Ignition Switch Position - Run). Blind spot information system. Adaptive cruise control. Front view camera. Rear camera. 35 — Not used. 36 — Blower motor relay. 37 — Trailer tow battery charge relay. 38 — A/C compressor clutch relay. 39 — Horn relay. 40 — Not used. 41 42 43 2 40A — Rear blower motor. Not used. 40A 2 Front blower motor. 273 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 Fuse Rating Protected Component 3 Voltage quality module bus. 3 Electronic fan relay 1. 3 Trailer tow brake controller. 50A 40A 30A — Not used. 50A 3 — Body control module RP1 bus. Not used. 50A 50A 3 Body control module RP2 bus. 3 Electronic fan relay 3. 3 Anti-lock brake system pump. 60A 53 — Not used. 54 — Not used. 55 — 56 Not used. 2 40A Power inverter. 57 — Not used. 58 — Not used. 59 — 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 Not used. 20A 2 — Not used. 20A 2 Power point (instrument panel). 2 Fuel pump. 30A — 20A — Power point (front console bin). Not used. 2 Power point (2nd row) (without USB charger). Not used. 274 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 Fuse Rating 20A — 2 2 15A — 30A 2 30A 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 Driver seat module. Driver seat power. 2 Front wiper motor. Not used. Not used. 2 3rd row power folding seat module relay. 2 Starter relay. 30A 30A — Not used. 1 Trailer tow back-up lamp relay. 2 Steering column lock (if equipped). 1 Brake on/off switch. 10A 20A 10A — 5A Heated/cooled seats. Passenger seat power. 30A — Trailer tow left-hand and right-hand stop and direction indicator lamps. 2 30A 77 Power liftgate. Not used. 2 — Power point (cargo area). Not used. 30A 76 78 2 Protected Component Not used. 1 2nd row USB charger (if equipped). 86 — Not used. 87 — Not used. 88 — Not used. 275 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating 89 — Not used. 90 — Not used. 91 — 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Not used. 1 Multi-contour seat module relay. 1 Alternator sense. 1 Rear washer relay. 1 Rear wiper relay. 15A 10A 15A 15A 1 10A 5A Protected Component Rain sensor. 1 20A 20A Powertrain control module relay coil power. 1 2nd row seat motors. 1 Trailer tow parking lamp relay. 1 Micro 2 fuse. fuse. 3 J-case fuse. 2 M-case Note: It may be easier to access the fuse panel if you remove the finish trim piece. Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. 276 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses E145984 Fuse or Relay Number Fuse Rating 1 — 2 3 4 5 Protected Components Not used. 1 Memory seat switch (lumbar power). 1 Driver unlock relay. 7.5A 20A 5A Aftermarket electronic brake controller. 1 20A 1 Rear heated seat module. 6 — Not used. 7 — Not used. 8 — Not used. 9 — 10 11 5A 5A Not used. 2 2 Embedded modem. Hands free liftgate. Rear climate control module. Securicode™ keyless entry keypad. Power liftgate module. 277 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Fuse Rating 2 7.5A 2 7.5A 2 10A 2 10A — Protected Components Front climate control module. Instrument cluster. Smart data link. Steering column control module. Extended power module. Smart datalink connector power. Heads up display. Not used. Electronic finish panel. 2 5A Push button start switch. Ignition switch. Key inhibit. 2 5A 2 7.5A — 5A 5A Transmission control switch. Not used. Terrain management switch. Heads up display. Humidity sensor. 2 Occupant classification sensor. 2 1 10A 20A 1 1 30A 1 30A 1 30A Delayed accessory power. Power windows. Moonroof. Folding mirror relay. DC inverter. Window/moonroof switch illumination. Central lock relay. Left-hand front smart window motor. Door zone module. Right-hand front smart window motor. Door zone module. Moonroof. 278 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Fuse or Relay Number 28 29 Fuse Rating 31 — 33 34 35 36 37 38 Sony amplifier - 10 channel. 1 Sony amplifier - 14 channel. 30A — 32 1 20A 30 Not used. Not used. 1 10A 20A SYNC module. GPS module. Display. Radio frequency receiver. 1 Radio. 1 Starter relay. 30A 5A Protected Components Restraints control module. Extended power module. 1 1 15A 20A 1 3 30A Lane departure warning module. Auto high beam. EC mirrors. Rear heated seats. Heated steering wheel. Left-hand front window motor. Rear power window motors. 1 Micro 2 fuse. 3 fuse. 3 Circuit breaker. 2 Micro 279 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses CHANGING A FUSE Fuses WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. E217331 If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. Fuse Types E207206 Callout Fuse Type A Micro 2 B Micro 3 C Maxi D Mini 280 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Fuses Callout Fuse Type E M Case F J Case G J Case Low Profile 281 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Working with the Engine On GENERAL INFORMATION Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. There is a large network of authorized dealers that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your vehicle. WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 1. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission to park (P). 2. Block the wheels. If your vehicle requires professional service, an authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD Opening the Hood Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. Precautions • • • • Do not work on a hot engine. Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes) away from the battery and all fuel related parts. Working with the Engine Off 1. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission to park (P). 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Block the wheels. 1 E203008 282 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the left-hand side of the instrument panel. 2. Slightly lift the hood. 2 4 3 E203009 3. Move the catch to the left. E203320 4. Open the hood. Support the hood with the strut. Closing the Hood 1. Remove the hood strut from the catch and secure it correctly after use. 2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop under its own weight for the last 8–12 in (20–30 cm). Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly closed. UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ 283 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance E270722 A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 289). B Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 286). C Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 287). D Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 295). E Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 296). F Engine compartment fusebox. See Changing a Fuse (page 280). G Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 304). H Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 296). UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC 284 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance A E223186 B I H G D C F E F Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 295). Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 293). G C Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 296). Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 287). H D Engine compartment fusebox. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 271). Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 287). I E Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 304). Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 296). A Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 289). B UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ 285 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance E270723 A. Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 289). B. Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 287). C. Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 287). D. Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 295). E. Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 296). F. Engine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 271). G. Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 304). H. Automatic transmission dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 293). I. Washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 296). ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ A E161560 286 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing A Minimum. B Maximum. B Maintenance 7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check the oil level. See Under Hood Overview (page 283). 8. Make sure that the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks. If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil immediately. See Capacities and Specifications (page 351). 9. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the engine is running. ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™ Note: If the oil level is between the maximum and minimum marks, the oil level is acceptable. Do not add oil. E146429 A MIN B MAX Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3,000 mi (5,000 km). Adding Engine Oil ENGINE OIL CHECK To check the engine oil level consistently and accurately, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. WARNING: Do not remove the filler cap when the engine is running. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make sure the transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N). Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. Checking the engine oil level too soon after you switch the engine off may result in an inaccurate reading. Open the hood. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 282). Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood Overview (page 283). Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. E142732 287 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC). From the main menu scroll to: Message To top up the engine oil level do the following: 1. Clean the area surrounding the engine oil filler cap before you remove it. 2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See Under Hood Overview (page 283). Turn it counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Add engine oil that meets our specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 351). You may have to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 4. Recheck the oil level. 5. If the oil level is correct, replace the dipstick and make sure it is fully seated. 6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage. Action and description Settings Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Vehicle Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Oil Life Press the right arrow button, then from this menu scroll to the following message. Hold OK to Press and hold the OK Reset button until the instrument cluster displays the following message. Reset Successful When the oil change indicator resets the instrument cluster displays 100%. Remaining Life {00}% If the instrument cluster displays one of the following messages, repeat the process. Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap correctly. Not Reset Reset Cancelled Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately. OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET Use the information display controls on the steering wheel to reset the oil change indicator. 288 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Maintain coolant concentration within 48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F (-37°C). Coolant concentration should be checked using a refractometer. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test strips for measuring coolant concentration. ENGINE COOLANT CHECK WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. Adding Coolant WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when you loosen the cap slightly. WARNING: Do not put coolant in the windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on the windshield, coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark. When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the coolant at the intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance information. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495). Note: Make sure that the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant reservoir. Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants, or non-specified additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. 289 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance 5. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir the next few times you drive your vehicle. If necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant level to the correct level. It is very important to use prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification in order to avoid plugging the small passageways in the engine cooling system. See Capacities and Specifications (page 340). Do not mix different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using an incorrect coolant may harm the engine or cooling system components and may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of engine coolant per month, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, use the approved concentrated coolant diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See Capacities and Specifications (page 340). Using water that has not been deionised may contribute to deposit formation, corrosion and plugging of the small cooling system passageways. Note: During normal vehicle operation, the coolant may change color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the coolant is clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the coolant has degraded nor does it require the coolant to be drained, the system to be flushed, or the coolant to be replaced. Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and models may not be approved to our specifications and may cause damage to the cooling system. Resulting component damage may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. In case of emergency, you can add a large amount of water without engine coolant in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, qualified personnel: 1. Must drain the cooling system. 2. Chemically clean the coolant system. 3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as possible. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. To top up the coolant level do the following: Water alone, without engine coolant, can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. 1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure escapes as you unscrew the cap. 2. Add prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 340). 3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach the correct level. 4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Do not use the following as a coolant substitute: • Alcohol. • Methanol. • Brine. • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze. Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. 290 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Coolant Change Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the coolant. At specific mileage intervals, as listed in the scheduled maintenance information, the coolant should be changed. Add prediluted coolant approved to the correct specification. See Capacities and Specifications (page 340). Recycled Coolant We do not recommend the use of recycled coolant as an approved recycling process is not yet available. Fail-Safe Cooling Note: Dispose of used coolant in the appropriate manner. Follow your community's regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily drive your vehicle before any incremental component damage occurs. The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperature, vehicle load and terrain. Severe Climates How Fail-Safe Cooling Works If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone: If you drive in extremely cold climates: • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • A coolant concentration of 60% provides improved freeze point protection. Coolant concentrations above 60% decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. A warning lamp illuminates and a message may appear in the information display. If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine automatically switches to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • You can decrease the coolant concentration to 40%. • Coolant concentrations below 40% decrease the freeze and corrosion protection characteristics of the coolant and may cause engine damage. When this occurs, your vehicle still operates, however: • Engine power is limited. • The air conditioning system turns off. Continued operation increases the engine temperature, causing the engine to completely shut down. Your steering and braking effort increases in this situation. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use prediluted coolant for optimum cooling system and engine protection. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. 291 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated 4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. 5. When the engine temperature cools, you can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle checked as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. Note: Driving your vehicle without repair increases the chance of engine damage. WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only. Operate your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs. When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have limited power, will not be able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist, and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash resulting in serious injury. Engine Coolant Temperature Management (If Equipped) WARNING: To reduce the risk of crash and injury, be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the coolant temperature reduces. WARNING: Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility of scalding and slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury. If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the engine may temporarily reach a higher temperature during severe operating conditions, for example ascending a long or steep grade in high ambient temperatures. Your vehicle has limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not maintain high-speed operation and the engine may operate poorly. At this time, you may notice the coolant temperature gauge moves toward the red zone and a message may appear in the information display. You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed caused by reduced engine power in order to manage the engine coolant temperature. Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain high-temperature and high-load conditions take place. The amount of speed reduction depends on vehicle loading, grade and ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is no need to stop your vehicle. You can continue to drive. Remember that the engine is capable of automatically shutting down to prevent engine damage. In this situation: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and switch the engine off. 2. If you are a member of a roadside assistance program, we recommend that you contact your roadside assistance service provider. 3. If this is not possible, wait for a short period of time for the engine to cool. 292 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Have an authorized dealer check and change the transmission fluid at the correct service interval. See Maintenance (page 282). Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. The air conditioning may automatically turn on and off during severe operating conditions to protect the engine from overheating. When the coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, the air conditioning turns on. If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red zone, or if the coolant temperature warning or service engine soon messages appear in your information display, do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Fully apply the parking brake, shift into park (P) or neutral (N). Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle returns to the normal position. If the temperature does not drop after several minutes, follow the remaining steps. Switch the engine off and wait for it to cool. Check the coolant level. If the coolant level is at or below the minimum mark, add prediluted coolant immediately. If the coolant level is normal, restart the engine and continue. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK - 3.5L DURATEC/ 3.5L ECOBOOST™ (IF EQUIPPED) Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to transmission damage that may not be covered by the vehicle Warranty. The transmission does not consume fluid. However, if the transmission slips or shifts slowly you should check the fluid level. If you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an authorized dealer. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ (IF EQUIPPED) Checking the Transmission Fluid Level Note: Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer. WARNING: The dipstick and surrounding components are hot. Use gloves when moving components and checking the transmission fluid level. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. 293 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Note: If the fluid level is below the minimum range do not drive your vehicle. A low fluid level can damage the transmission. Only check the transmission fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C). Normal operating temperature is reached after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km). A Correct Fluid Level If the fluid level is within the hash mark area (between points A and B) do not add any fluid. B High Fluid Level If the fluid level is above the maximum range (above point B) fluid may need to be removed. High fluid levels may be caused by a overheating condition. If you have operated your vehicle at high speeds, towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking the level. E190273 A Minimum. B Maximum. Note: Check the fluid level with the engine running and the transmission in park (P). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Note: An overfill condition can damage the transmission. Make sure that your vehicle is on level ground. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise direction. See Under Hood Overview (page 284). Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add fluid immediately. See Adding Transmission Fluid. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Adding Transmission Fluid 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Low Fluid Level 6. If the fluid level is within the minimum range (below point A) add the correct specification fluid to be within the hash mark area. See Capacities and Specifications (page 351). 294 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing * Rotate the automatic transmission fluid cap in a counterclockwise direction. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Add fluid that meets the Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications (page 351). Pour the fluid directly into the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick hole. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove it again to check the fluid level. Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks. Replace the automatic transmission fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until you feel a strong resistance. Maintenance * Vehicles With Turbocharged Engines WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the affected areas immediately with plenty of water and contact your physician. WARNING: Do not start the engine with the air filter removed. This can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty and can result in serious injury. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. WARNING: A fluid level between the MAX and MIN lines is within the normal operating range and there is no need to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating range could compromise the performance of the system. Have your vehicle checked immediately. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter assembly to the rubber hose. Remove the air filter assembly securing bolts. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage the locating pins. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly in a counterclockwise direction. Check the transmission fluid level. Install the air filter assembly in reverse order. Tighten the air filter assembly securing bolts until you feel a strong resistance. BRAKE FLUID CHECK WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than the recommended brake fluid as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. E170684 WARNING: Only use brake fluid from a sealed container. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this warning could result in the loss of vehicle control, serious personal injury or death. To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir cap must remain in place and fully tight, unless you are adding fluid. Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications. 295 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide correct ventilation. WASHER FLUID CHECK WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same reservoir. WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid that meets our specifications. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after handling. Your vehicle has a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. 296 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically-controlled by a computer, some engine control settings are maintained by power from the low voltage battery. Some engine computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy, optimize the driveability and performance of the engine. Some other computer settings, like the clock and radio station presets, are also maintained in memory by power from the low voltage battery. When a technician disconnects and connects the low voltage battery, these settings are erased. Complete the following procedure in order to restore the settings: Note: See an authorized dealer for low voltage battery access, testing, or replacement. When a low voltage battery replacement is necessary, see an authorized dealer to replace the low voltage battery with a Ford recommended replacement low voltage battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. To ensure proper operation of the battery management system (BMS), do not allow a technician to connect any electrical device ground connection directly to the low voltage battery negative post. A connection at the low voltage battery negative post can cause inaccurate measurements of the battery condition and potential incorrect system operation. 1. 2. 3. 4. Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic accessories or components to the vehicle, the accessories or components may adversely affect the low voltage battery performance and durability and may also affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. 5. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. 6. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. 7. When a battery replacement is required, the battery should only be replaced with a Ford recommended replacement battery that matches the electrical requirements of the vehicle. 9. 8. 297 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. Shift the transmission into park (P). Switch off all accessories. Fully press the brake pedal and start the vehicle. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. While the engine is warming up, complete the following: Reset the clock. See Audio System (page 362). Reset the power windows bounce-back feature. See Windows and Mirrors (page 90). Reset the radio station presets. See Audio System (page 362). Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. If the engine turns off, press the accelerator pedal to start the engine. While the engine is running, press the brake pedal and shift into neutral (N). Allow the engine to run for at least one minute by pressing on the accelerator pedal. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km) to completely relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. Maintenance Front Wiper Blades Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the engine computer eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. 1 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally friendly way. Seek advice from your local authority about recycling old batteries. 1 CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES E129990 2 1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the wiper blade locking buttons together. Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting the wiper arm. Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached. 2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade. 3. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Install in the reverse order. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. E142463 Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade to check for roughness. Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES You can improve poor wiper quality by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield. Replace the wiper blades at least annually for optimum performance. 298 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Rear Window Wiper Blade E142592 E183236 A 8 ft (2.4 m) B Ground to the center of the headlamp high beam bulb C 25 ft (7.6 m) D Horizontal reference line Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure 1. Lift the wiper arm. Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when lifting the wiper arm. 1. Park your vehicle on level ground approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall or screen. 2. Measure the distance from the ground to the center of the headlamp high beam bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m) long horizontal reference line on the wall or screen at this height. Note: There may be an identifying mark on the lens to help you locate the center line of the headlamp high beam bulb. Refer to the graphic below step 4. Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does not spring back against the glass when the wiper blade is not attached. 2. Remove the wiper blade. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS Vertical Aim Adjustment Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting, you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other. If your vehicle has been involved in a crash, have the aim of the headlamp beam checked by an authorized dealer. 3. Switch on the low beam headlamps and open the hood. 299 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance 5 E142465 4. On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light located at the top of the beam pattern. If the top edge of the flat zone of high intensity light is not on the horizontal reference line, adjust the aim of the headlamp beam. E203691 5. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver or socket wrench, to turn the adjuster clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the vertical aim of the headlamp. The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line. 6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps. CHANGING A BULB WARNING: Switch the lamps and the ignition off. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury. 300 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Front Direction Indicator WARNING: Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb cool down before removing it. Failure to do so could result in personal injury. Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb Specification Chart (page 360). Install in the reverse order unless otherwise stated. Headlamp (If Equipped) 2 A 3 B 4 E203698 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. E203696 A Headlamp high beam or Daytime running lamp. B Front direction indicator. 301 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Headlamp High Beam Front Fog Lamp (If Equipped) Halogen Bulb 2 4 E203699 4 1. Use a screwdriver, to carefully remove the housing cover. Note: To remove push pins, use a flat-bladed screwdriver to pull up the center release pin. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3 E203697 1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. 2. Carefully remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. E174588 3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Note: You cannot separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. LED Bulb (If Equipped) LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an authorized dealer if they fail. Note: Do not touch the bulb glass. 302 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing Lamp 2 A B 5 3 6 E203701 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 4 Switch all of the lamps and the ignition off. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the screw covers. Remove the retaining bolts from the lamp assembly. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle. Release the wire from the securing clip. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. E203702 A Reverse lamp. B Rear direction indicator. LED Lamps (If Equipped) LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an authorized dealer if they fail. The following lamps are LED: • Front fog lamps. • Rear fog lamps. • Front side marker lamps. • Front signature lamps. • Daytime running lamps. • Headlamp high beam. • Headlamp low beam. • Side direction indicator. • Rear side marker lamp. 303 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance • • When changing the engine air filter, do not allow debris or foreign material to enter the air induction system. Engine components are susceptible to damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Brake and rear lamp. Central high mounted brake lamp. License Plate Lamp (If Equipped) Change the air filter element at the correct interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495). Incorrect component use can cause damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page 342). To replace the air filter element do the following: 1 2 3 E203703 1. Use a suitable tool, for example a screwdriver, to carefully remove the lamp. 2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR FILTER E200522 1. Remove the clips that secure the air filter housing cover. 2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover. 3. Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing. WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. 304 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Maintenance 4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter housing and cover to make sure no dirt gets in the engine and that you have a good seal. 5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if it is not properly seated. 6. Install the air filter housing cover. 7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter housing cover to the air filter housing. 305 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS Your dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. Materials For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Name Specification Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada) WSS-M14P19-A Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada) Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.) Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada) • CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. • 306 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Never use strong household detergents or soap, for example dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to the touch, or during strong or direct sunlight. Vehicle Care • • • • Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel to eliminate water spotting. Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird droppings, insect deposits and road tar. These may cause damage to your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. We recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Remove any exterior accessories, for example antennas, before entering a car wash. When filling with AdBlue®, remove any residue on painted surfaces immediately. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers. Exterior Plastic Parts For routine cleaning we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped) Hand washing your vehicle is preferred however, pressure washing may be used under the following conditions: • Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage painted surfaces. If these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as possible. • • • Cleaning the Headlamps Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or chemical solvents to clean them. Do not use water pressure higher than 2,000 psi (14,000 kPa). Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C). Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle pattern. Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's surface. Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they are dry. Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle at an angle to the vehicle's surface may damage graphics and cause the edges to peel away from the vehicle's surface. Exterior Chrome Parts Underbody • Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle using water. Keep body and door drain holes free of debris or foreign material. • • Apply a high quality-cleaning product to bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. We recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Do not apply the cleaning product to hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer than the time recommended. Using non-recommended cleaners can result in severe and permanent cosmetic damage. Under Hood For removing black rubber marks from under the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. Note: Never use abrasive materials, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface. 307 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Vehicle Care When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo. • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the area in and around these locations. • Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. WAXING Regular waxing is necessary to protect your car's paint from the elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface once or twice a year. When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax. • • • • • • Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax. Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles. Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. • Roof racks. • Bumpers. • Grained door handles. • Side moldings. • Mirror housings. • Windshield cowl area. Do not apply wax to glass areas. After waxing, your car's paint should feel smooth, and be free of streaks and smudges. CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES Car wash chemicals and environmental fallout can result in windshield and wiper blade contamination. Dirty windshield and wipers will result in poor windshield wiper operation. Keep the windshield and wiper blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance. CLEANING THE ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. 308 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Vehicle Care For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats equipped with side airbags: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner. • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set. • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. To clean the windshield and wiper blades: • Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior of the windshield, avoid getting any glass cleaner on the instrument panel or door panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these surfaces immediately. • For windshields contaminated with tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the entire windshield using steel wool (no greater than 0000 grade) in a circular motion and rinse with water. • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or windshield washer concentrate. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. The vehicle warranty does not cover damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. Mirrors CLEANING THE INTERIOR Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products. WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LENS WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a crash. WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system. Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page 310). 309 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Vehicle Care Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas. • • • • 5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area. 6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use any household cleaning products or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens. Wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Your warranty may not cover these damages. CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. For cleaning and removing stains such as dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces: You should: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Clean and treat spills and stains as soon as possible. 1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft cloth as quickly as possible. 2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area. 3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth. 4. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the soiled area. Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes. Do not use the following products as these may damage the leather: • Oil and petroleum or silicone-based leather conditioners. • Household cleaners. • Alcohol solutions. • Solvents or cleaners intended specifically for rubber, vinyl and plastics. 310 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Vehicle Care Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel cleaners or abrasive materials could damage wheel rims and covers. REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle color code is printed on a sticker on the front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your color code to your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color. VEHICLE STORAGE If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30 days or more, read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition. Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout. CLEANING THE WHEELS We engineer and test all motor vehicles and their components for reliable, regular driving. Under various conditions, long-term storage may lead to degraded engine performance or failure unless you use specific precautions to preserve engine components. 1. General Always read the instructions before using cleaning products. Regularly clean them with a wheel cleaner. We recommend that you use Ford approved wheel cleaner if available. 2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a sponge. 3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and tar remover. We recommend that you use Ford approved bug and tar remover if available. 4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water after cleaning. • • • Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place. Protect from sunlight, if possible. If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to protect against rust and damage. Body • If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. This reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings. • • • Do not clean the wheels when they are hot. Note: Some car washes could damage wheel rims and covers. • 311 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the underside of front fenders. Periodically wash your vehicle if it is stored in exposed locations. Touch-up exposed or primed metal to prevent rust. Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when you wash your vehicle. Lubricate all hood, door and luggage compartment hinges and latches with a light grade oil. Vehicle Care • • Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. Note: It is necessary to reset memory features if battery cables are disconnected. Brakes Engine • • • • • Change the engine oil and filter prior to storage because used engine oil contains contaminates which may cause engine damage. Start the engine every 15 days for a minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle with the climate controls set to defrost until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the engine is running. We recommend that you change the engine oil before you use your vehicle again. Tires • • • When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following: • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on window surfaces. • Check windshield wipers for any deterioration. • Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected during storage such as mice or squirrel nests. • Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. • Check brake pedal operation. Drive your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to remove rust build-up. Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. Protect against freezing temperatures. When removing your vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level. Confirm that there are no cooling system leaks and that fluid is at the recommended level. Battery • • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under your vehicle are covered with grease to prevent rust. Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every 15 days to lubricate working parts and prevent corrosion. Removing Vehicle From Storage Cooling system • • Maintain recommended air pressure. Miscellaneous Fuel system • Make sure the brakes and parking brake release fully. Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean. If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the battery, we recommend that you disconnect the battery cables to maintain battery charge for quick starting. 312 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Vehicle Care • • Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks, and fluids are at recommended levels. If you remove the battery, clean the battery cable ends and check for damage. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues. 313 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires Notice to utility vehicle and truck owners GENERAL INFORMATION Use only approved wheel and tire sizes, using other sizes could damage your vehicle. If you change the diameter of the tires from that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. If you intend to change the size of the wheels from that fitted by the manufacturer, you can check the suitability with an authorized dealer. WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity (utility and four-wheel drive vehicles) handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt steering in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously increases the risk of losing control of your vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additional information related to the functionality and maintenance of your tires can be found later in this chapter. See Tire Care (page 316). You can find the recommended tire inflation pressures can on the Tire Label, which is on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver door. You can also find this information on the Safety Compliance Certification Label, affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door latch post; next to the driver seating position. WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. We strongly recommend maintaining these tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced fuel economy, and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the ambient temperature in which you are intending to drive your vehicle and when the tires are cold. Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Note: Check your tire pressures at least once per month. If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the pressure to the highest value given for your vehicle and tire size combination. 314 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the spare tire relative to the remaining tires can have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there is a significant difference between the size of a spare and the remaining tires, four-wheel drive functionality may be limited. See Principle of Operation (page 188). Study your owner's manual and any supplements for specific information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury. Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped) How your vehicle differs from other vehicles WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed. Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be: • • A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive, when selected, has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select different modes as necessary. For information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel Drive (page 188). For information on transfer case maintenance, See Maintenance (page 282). You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. • Higher - to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. Shorter - to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. All other things held equal, a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase. Narrower - to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces, particularly in off-road use. As a result of the above dimensional differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks often have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition. These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel drive when the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal and are not cause for concern. 315 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires U.S. Department of Transportation Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. TIRE CARE Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1½ times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. E142542 Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A. These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2). Traction AA A B C WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. 316 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Glossary of Tire Terminology *Tire label: A label showing the original equipment tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. *Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code. *Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. *Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. *Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability. Temperature A B C WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the 317 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall *kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. *PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. *Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mi (1.6 km). *Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. * B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. *Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. *Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. *Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. Information on P Type Tires C D B E F G H A I J M L K E142543 P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.) 318 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association. B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer. Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law. 319 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Letter rating Speed rating M 81 mph (130 km/h) N 87 mph (140 km/h) Q 99 mph (159 km/h) R 106 mph (171 km/h) S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) U 124 mph (200 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) Wheels and Tires Letter rating Speed rating W 168 mph (270 km/h) J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades: *Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. Y 186 mph (299 km/h) Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR. H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or AT: All Terrain, or AS: All Season. 320 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires *Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers' maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load or radial tubeless. Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. B C A D E142544 B LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below. A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for service on light trucks. B. Load Range and Load Inflation Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits. 321 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single, defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. B A C D E Information on T Type Tires T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire. E142545 T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires; these differences are described below: A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light trucks. B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire. 322 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall. D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire. E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter. control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat! You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge. Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. You will find a Tire Label containing the Ford recommended tire inflation pressure by the tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Recommended Tire Pressures and Inflating Your Tires Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat. Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check the pressure of all tires and adjust if required. At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company. WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle 323 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is also found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch on the B-pillar, or on the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist: Tire Wear Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail. E142546 When the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear bars, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars, the tire is worn out and must be replaced. 324 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected, have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. Both United States and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall. This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall. Age WARNING: Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives. In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently. You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used. Tire Replacement Requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability. 325 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver's seating position), or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver's door. If this information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again. WARNING: For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting. WARNING: Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. WARNING: When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire: • • 326 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again. Wheels and Tires • Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the wheel and tire assembly. • Use both eye and ear protection. Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle. It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair. The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels. The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, your system is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may be damaged. Safety Practices WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds. WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. *Observe posted speed limits *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns *Avoid potholes and objects on the road *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking Highway Hazards No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important. 327 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected. Tire Rotation Note: If your tires show uneven wear, ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation. Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation. Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements. Rotating your tires at the recommended interval will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life. Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495). Tire and Wheel Alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically. Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels. The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear. 328 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires inflation. Do not place tires near heaters or heating devices used to warm the room where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat or blow heated air directly on the tires. Always inspect the tires after storage periods and before use. USING SNOW CHAINS WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, and speed rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury, and death. Additionally, the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case, or power transfer unit failure. It is also strongly advised to follow the Ford recommended tire inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. E142547 USING SUMMER TIRES Summer tires provide superior performance on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on the tire side wall. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as All-season or Snow tires, we do not recommend using summer tires when temperatures drop to approximately 45°F (7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and environmental conditions) or in snow and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer tire performance is affected by tire wear and environmental conditions. If you must drive in those conditions, we recommend using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires. Always store your summer tires indoors at temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The rubber compounds used in these tires lose flexibility and may develop surface cracks in the tread area at temperatures below 19°F (-7°C). If the tires have been subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warm them in a heated space to at least 41°F (5°C) for at least 24 hours before installing them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle with the tires installed, or checking tire The tires on your vehicle (excluding the 265/45ZR20 Sport Tire) may have all-weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates you may need to use snow chains. 329 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires Your vehicle may not be compatible with snow chain or cable usage with the factory-fitted wheels and tires. Only certain chains or snow cables have been approved by Ford as safe for use on your vehicle with the following wheel and tire combination(s): 18”x8”x44mm Wheel and P245/60 R18 Tire. You should only install chains or cables that have been rated as 10 mm or less in dimension as measured on the sidewall of your tire. Not all S-class snow chains meet these restrictions. Chains of this size restriction will include a tensioning device. The chains should be mounted in pairs on the front tires only. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specification) be used, as chains may chip aluminum wheels. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressures. You should periodically check tire pressures using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain tire pressures could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Note: You should only use tire sealants in roadside emergencies as they may cause damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensor. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and traction devices • • • • • • Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system sensor becomes damaged, it may not function. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body to tire dimension restrictions. When driving with tire cables do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the maximum speed recommended by the chain manufacturer, whichever is less. Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the cables to prevent vehicle damage. Remove the cables when they are no longer needed. Do not use cables on dry roads. If a temporary spare wheel is mounted on your vehicle, do not use snow chains on the axle with the temporary spare tire. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires). As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables, please contact your authorized dealer. 330 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. E142549 Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor located inside the wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure sensor is attached to the valve stem. The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor. You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer. Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 331 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare, the system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle. To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have the damaged road wheel and tire assembly repaired and remounted on your vehicle. When You Believe Your System is Not Operating Properly E250820 The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. You can view the tire pressure readings through the information display. See General Information (page 104). The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still needs to be checked. The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system: 332 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure warning light Possible cause Customer action required Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire is Installed in this section. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Solid warning light Flashing warning light When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires. When Inflating Your Tires WARNING: Do not use the tire pressure displayed in the information display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death. It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure. 333 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires If you get a flat tire when driving, do not heavily apply the brake. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. How Temperature Affects Your Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected by the tire pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure. Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 330). Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible. During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage. Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death. If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road wheel and tire assembly that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired. CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it may not function. A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types: Note: You should only use tire sealants in roadside emergencies as they may cause damage to the tire pressure monitoring system sensor. Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light illuminates when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle. 1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall. 334 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. • Wet weather driving capability. • All-wheel driving capability. 2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY. When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not: • • • • • • • Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label. Tow a trailer. Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire. Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time. Use commercial car washing equipment. Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly additional caution should be given to: • Towing a trailer. • Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body. • Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack. Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and seek service as soon as possible. Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following: • Handling, stability and braking performance. • Comfort and noise. • Ground clearance and parking at curbs. • Winter weather driving capability. • Wet weather driving capability. • All-wheel driving capability. Tire Change Procedure WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P). 3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel WARNING: To help prevent your vehicle from moving when changing a wheel, shift the transmission into park (P), set the parking brake and use an appropriate block or wheel chock to secure the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed. For example, when changing the front left wheel, place an appropriate block or wheel chock on the right rear wheel. When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly, do not: • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). • Use more than one dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly at a time. • Use commercial car washing equipment. • Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. 335 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires WARNING: Do not work on your vehicle when the jack is the only support. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. E194295 4. Turn the two knobs on the floor filler counterclockwise, then remove the floor filler and carpeted floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle. WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided, make sure the jack capacity is adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate, contact the authorized dealer. Note: Passengers should not remain in your vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle. 1. Park on a level surface, set the parking brake and activate the hazard flashers. 2. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off. E226763 5. Remove the wing nut securing the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise. 6. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire well. 7. Remove the wing nut bolt that secures the jack kit by turning it counterclockwise. 8. Remove the jack kit, which includes the jack, lug wrench, L-shaped bolt and tow recovery hook. E142551 3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel. 336 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires 15. 9. Turn the lead screw, where the lug wrench attaches, of the jack by hand to release the lug wrench from the jack. Press the button on the wrench to extend the handle. Fold down the wrench socket. 10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but do not remove them until the wheel is off the ground. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, marking sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 16. 1 4 3 E145908 11. 12. The vehicle jacking points are shown here, and are depicted on the warning label on the jack. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills show the location of the jacking points. 5 2 E75442 17. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. See Technical Specifications (page 338). Stowing the flat tire 1. E201156 13. 14. Raise the wheel by turning the jack handle clockwise. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 337 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Stand the flat tire vertically in the mini-spare tub with the tire's valve stem facing rearward toward the luggage compartment. Wheels and Tires Stowing the jack E194296 2. Fasten the flat tire to the luggage compartment back panel by inserting the L-shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt holes in the wheel. 3. Turn the L-shaped bolt clockwise into the threaded hole in the luggage compartment back panel until the tire is secured. 4. Unblock the diagonally opposite wheel. E194297 With the road wheel in the vertical position in the spare tire tub, the jack assembly does not fit in its standard position. Secure the jack in the alternate position by inserting the wing bolt through the jack as shown. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death. Bolt size Ib-ft (Nm) 1/2-20 x 1.5 100 (135) * * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal). 338 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Wheels and Tires E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 339 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Engine 2.3L EcoBoost Cubic inches 138 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-3-4-2 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0.027 - 0.031 in (0.70 - 0.80 mm) Compression ratio 10:1 Drivebelt Routing 2.3L EcoBoost Engine A B E161383 A. Long drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine. B. Short drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC 340 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Engine 3.5L V6 Cubic inches 214 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm) Compression ratio 10.8:1 Drivebelt Routing 3.5L Engine E191904 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ Engine 3.5L EcoBoost Cubic inches 214 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 Ignition system Coil on plug Spark plug gap 0.033 - 0.037 in (0.75 mm - 0.85 mm) Compression ratio 10.0:1 341 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Drivebelt Routing 3.5L EcoBoost Engine E191904 MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Component Part Number Air filter element FA-1884 Oil filter FL-910-S Battery BXT-59 * BXT-65-650 Spark plugs SP-537 Cabin air filter FP-68 Windshield wiper blade WW-2600 (driver side) WW-2206 (passenger side) Rear window wiper blade * WW-1106 This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access. We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495). 342 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC Component Part Number Air filter element FA-1884 Oil filter FL-500-S Battery BXT-59 * BXT-65-650 Spark plugs SP-520 Cabin air filter FP-68 Windshield wiper blade WW-2600 (driver side) WW-2206 (passenger side) Rear window wiper blade * WW-1106 This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access. We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495). 343 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ Component Part Number Air filter element FA-1884 Oil filter FL-500-S Battery BXT-59 * BXT-65-650 Spark plugs SP-534 Cabin air filter FP-68 Windshield wiper blade WW-2600 (driver side) WW-2206 (passenger side) Rear window wiper blade * WW-1106 This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access. We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts. If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36. For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 495). 344 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the instrument panel. E142477 E142476 Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information: 345 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, Restraint Devices and their locations C Make, vehicle line, series, body type D Engine type E Check digit F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION E167469 E167814 The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or the edge of the door near the door latch, next to the driver's seating position. The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. Description Code Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35 6 Six-speed automatic transmission 6F55 C Six-speed automatic transmission 6F50 J 346 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™ Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 5.7 qt (5.4 L) Engine coolant (without oil cooler) 12.0 qt (11.31 L) Engine coolant (with oil cooler) 12.2 qt (11.52 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Rear axle fluid (four-wheel drive) 2.11 pt (1.0 L) Automatic transmission fluid 9.0 qt (8.5 L) Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (fourwheel drive) 1 23.7 fl oz (700 ml) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank 18.6 gal (70.4 L) A/C refrigerant 2.80 lb (1.27 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil 7.3 fl oz (215 ml) 1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 347 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-B1 XO-5W30-QSP Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-B1 Engine coolant (U.S.): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear axle fluid (U.S.): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S.): WSL-M2C192-A Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) WSL-M2C192-A (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant 348 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification CXY-75W140-1L Windshield washer fluid (U.S.): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-134a Refrigerant CYN-19-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - • • • If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. 349 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Reduced engine performance. Reduced fuel economy. Degraded brake performance. Capacities and Specifications We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates E142732 To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by your vehicle warranty. Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine oil - SAE 0W-30 XO-0W30-QSP WSS-M2C953-A1 350 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications E240523 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant (without oil cooler) 12.4 qt (11.73 L) Engine coolant (with oil cooler) 13.5 qt (12.79 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Rear axle fluid (four-wheel drive) 2.11 pt (1.0 L) Automatic transmission fluid (6F50) 10.9 qt (10.3 L) Automatic transmission fluid (6F55) 11.6 qt (11 L) Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (fourwheel drive) 1 1 17.9 fl oz (0.53 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required 351 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Fuel tank 18.6 gal (70.4 L) A/C refrigerant (front wheel drive) 2.56 lb (1.16 kg) A/C refrigerant (four-wheel drive) 2.38 lb (1.08 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (front wheel drive) 6.6 fl oz (195 ml) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (four-wheel drive) 7.3 fl oz (216 ml) 1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. Specifications Materials Name Specification Motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C945-B1 Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W20-QSP Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W20-LSP12 WSS-M2C945-B1 Motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C945-B1 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL 352 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Rear axle fluid (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S. WSL-M2C192-A and Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant XY-75W140-QL Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) WSL-M2C192-A (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-75W140-1L Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-134a Refrigerant CYN-19-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: 353 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 - If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. E142732 We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by your vehicle warranty. 354 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine oil - SAE 0W-20 XO-0W20-QSP WSS-M2C947-B1 E240522 CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™ 355 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Capacities WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Item Capacity Engine oil (with oil filter) 6.0 qt (5.7 L) Engine coolant (without oil cooler) 12.4 qt (11.73 L) Engine coolant (with oil cooler) 13.5 qt (12.79 L) Brake fluid Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir Rear axle fluid (four-wheel drive) 2.11 pt (1.0 L) Automatic transmission fluid (6F50) 10.9 qt (10.3 L) Automatic transmission fluid (6F55) 11.6 qt (11 L) Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (fourwheel drive) 1 1 17.9 fl oz (0.53 L) Windshield washer fluid Fill as required Fuel tank 18.6 gal (70.4 L) A/C refrigerant (front only) 2.1 lb (0.96 kg) A/C refrigerant (front and rear) 2.8 lb (1.27 kg) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (front only) 5.6 fl oz (165 ml) A/C refrigerant compressor oil (front and rear) 7.3 fl oz (216 ml) 1 Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. 356 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Specifications Materials Name Specification Motor oil (U.S.): WSS-M2C946-B1 Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil XO-5W30-QSP Motor oil (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil CXO-5W30-LSP12 WSS-M2C946-B1 Motor oil (Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil MXO-5W30-QSP WSS-M2C946-B1 Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant VC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Engine coolant (Canada): Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant CVC-3DIL-B WSS-M97B44-D2 Brake fluid: WSS-M6C65-A2 Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid PM-20 Rear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant XY-80W90-QL Rear axle fluid (Canada): WSP-M2C197-A Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-80W90-1L Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV XT-10-QLVC Automatic transmission fluid (Canada): WSS-M2C938-A Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV CXT-10-LV12 Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S. WSL-M2C192-A and Mexico): Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant 357 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification XY-75W140-QL Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) WSL-M2C192-A (Canada): Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant CXY-75W140-1L Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico): Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant ZC-32-B2 WSS-M14P19-A Windshield washer fluid (Canada): Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, F) WSS-M14P19-A A/C refrigerant (U.S.): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Canada): R-134a Refrigerant CYN-19-R WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant (Mexico): Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant MYN-19 WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant compressor oil: Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B pedal shift grease: Premium Long-Life Grease XG-1-E1 Multi-purpose grease: Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray XL-5-A ESB-M1C93-B 358 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Lock cylinders (U.S.): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant XL-1 - Lock cylinders (Canada): Penetrating Fluid CXC-51-A - Lock cylinders (Mexico): Penetrating and Lock Lubricant MXL-1 - An oil that displays this symbol conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel economy performance standards of ILSAC. If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the defined specification and viscosity grade, this may lead to: • Component damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. • Longer engine cranking periods. • Increased emission levels. • Reduced engine performance. • Reduced fuel economy. • Degraded brake performance. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives because they are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by your vehicle warranty. Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet our performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure. We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available, use motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines. Note: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The use of any other fluid may cause transmission damage. Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates To improve engine cold start performance, we recommend that you use the following alternative engine oil in extremely cold climates, where the ambient temperature reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below. E142732 359 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Name Specification Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil: Engine oil - SAE 0W-30 XO-0W30-QSP WSS-M2C953-A1 E240523 BULB SPECIFICATION CHART Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North America to make sure they have the proper lamp performance, light brightness, light pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb illumination time. Exterior Lamps Specification Power (Watt) Front side marker lamps. Lamp LED LED Front signature lamps. LED LED 3757NAK 27 Front direction indicator. 360 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Capacities and Specifications Lamp Specification Power (Watt) Daytime running lamps. LED LED Headlamp low beam. LED LED 9005LL 55 Headlamp high beam (halogen). Headlamp high beam (LED). LED LED Front fog lamps. LED LED Side direction indicator. LED LED Rear side marker lamp. LED LED Brake and rear lamp. LED LED Central high mounted brake lamp. LED LED WY21W 21 Reversing lamps. W21W 21 License plate lamp. W5W 5 Rear direction indicator. Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. Interior Lamps Lamp Specification Power (Watt) 194 4 W5W 5 A6224PF - Glove compartment lamp. Interior lamp. Vanity mirror lamp. W5W 5 Rear dome lamp. Overhead console lamp. LED LED Luggage compartment lamp. LED LED Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail. 361 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors GENERAL INFORMATION AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: • AM: 530-1710 kHz • FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: Listening to loud audio for long periods of time could damage your hearing. Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an authorized dealer for more information. CD and CD Player Information Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in the vehicle’s CD player. Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch protection film attached. 362 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular motion. extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This enables you to use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods. In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were only one level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of being in a specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files in the current folder. MP3 and WMA Track and Folder Structure Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and folder structures work as follows: • There are two different modes for MP3 and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA track mode (system default) and MP3 and WMA folder mode. • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 and WMA disc. The player numbers each MP3 and WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. The maximum number of playable MP3 and WMA files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present. • MP3 and WMA folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. • Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation through the disc files. AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: SONY AM/FM/CD WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Note: Some features, such as satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer. Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information. If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA discs, it is important to understand how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may be present (files with extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA Accessing the Sound Settings E265271 363 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Press and release to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Balance. Audio System Adjusting the Volume Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse In radio mode, select a frequency band and press and release either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In CD mode, press and release to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. E265373 In satellite radio mode, press and release to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select. Turn to adjust the volume. Changing Radio Stations E265272 AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: PREMIUM AM/FM/CD In radio mode, press and release + or - to search through the radio frequency band. In satellite radio mode, press and release + or - to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Ejecting the CD Press and release to eject a CD. E265032 Inserting a CD Insert a CD into the CD slot. Switching the Audio Unit On and Off Press and release the button. 364 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Note: The touchscreen system controls most of the audio features. See your SYNC information. In satellite radio mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. Note: Some features, such as satellite radio, may not be available in your location. Check with an authorized dealer. Ejecting the CD Press and release the button to eject a CD. Adjusting the Volume E265032 Inserting a CD Insert a CD into the CD slot. Selecting the Audio Modes E265035 Press and release the button to access different audio modes, for example AM, FM and CD. Switching the Audio Unit On and Off Press and release the button. E265373 Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse Turn to adjust the volume. Changing Radio Stations E265044 E265045 In radio mode, select a frequency band and press and release either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In CD mode, press and release to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. In satellite radio mode, press and release to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select. E265696 In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. 365 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Accessing the Phone Features AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH: AM/FM/CD/SYNC Press and release the button to access the phone features of the E265037 SYNC system. See your SYNC information. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Accessing the Sound Settings E142611 Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. Press OK to confirm a selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. You can set sound settings for each audio source independently. Adjusting the Volume Accessing the Clock Settings E265036 Press and release the button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade and Press and release the button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrow controls to change the hours and minutes. Accessing the Media Source Menu Press and release the button to open the media source menu. E265035 You can press this multiple times to change to a SYNC-Media device or scroll through the media sources using the arrow buttons. Press OK to select a source. E265373 Accessing the Menu E265038 Turn to adjust the volume. Press and release the button to access different audio system features. 366 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Changing Radio Stations Listening to Satellite Radio Press and release the button to listen to satellite radio. E265034 Muting the Audio Press and release the button to mute the playing audio. E265043 Playing or Pausing Media Press and release the button to either play or pause the audio. Switching the Audio Unit On and Off E265696 In radio mode, turn to search through the radio frequency band. Press and release the button. In satellite radio mode, turn to find the previous or next available satellite radio station. Using a Cell Phone Press and release to either answer an incoming phone call or to make a phone call. Ejecting the CD Press and release the button to eject a CD. Press and hold to end a phone call. E265032 Inserting a CD E265040 Insert a CD into the CD slot. Using the Display Control Listening to a CD Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. Press and release the button to listen to a CD. E265039 Press and release to confirm a selection. Listening to the Radio E265033 E265041 Press and release the button to listen to the radio or change radio stations. Press and release the function buttons below the display to select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode). 367 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Using the Number Block In CD mode, press and release to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or backward through the current track. In radio mode, store and recall your favorite radio stations. To store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. In phone mode, enter a phone number. In satellite radio mode, press and release to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If you select a specific category (such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous station in the category you select. Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse Menu Structure Press MENU. Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options. In radio mode, select a frequency band and press and release either button. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a menu. Press OK to confirm a selection. Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly different. Radio Manual Tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band. Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands. Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country). RDS Text Display Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. 368 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Satellite Radio Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). You need this number when communicating with your satellite radio provider to activate, modify or track your account. Check Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK to open a list of the following options for this channel. Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number. Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN. Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category. Alerts Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams. The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel. Save up to 20 alerts. Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations. Skip No Stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped. Parental Lockout Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. Audio Settings Speed Compensated Volume Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7. Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade or Balance. Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position. DSP Choose between the stereo modes. 369 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections. Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder. CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level. Clock Settings Set Date and Time Select to set the time and calendar date. 24 Hour Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode. Display Settings Brightness Select to change display brightness. Language Select to display the language in English, French or Spanish. Temp. Setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit www.hdradio.com. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. 370 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: • Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the station has a digital broadcast. • Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access a station you save if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. 371 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Potential Station Issues Issues Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Cause Action This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. The previously stored No action required. The multicast preset or direct station is not available in tune is not available in your your current location. current reception area. Text information does not match currently playing audio. Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. Fill out the station issue form at website listed below. * There is no text information Data service issue by the shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. frequency. Fill out the station issue form at website listed HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables when Scan is pressed. HD2-HD7 channel search. No action required. This is normal behavior. below. * * http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. 372 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute. SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. When in satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0. E208625 373 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Audio System Troubleshooting Message Condition Action Acquiring… Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present. tion key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. SIRIUS system failure No action required. This message should disappear shortly. Invalid Channel The channel is no longer available. Tune to another channel or choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. No Signal The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna. The signal is blocked. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. 1-888-539-7474 None found Check Channel Guide Subscription Updated All the channels in the Use the channel guide to selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. function on that station. SiriusXM has updated the channels available for your vehicle. 374 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing No action required. Audio System USB PORT primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The media hub may be on the instrument panel or center console. The media hub may contain one or more of the following inputs: See USB Port (page 375). E201595 The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks and charge devices, if supported. MEDIA HUB WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your 375 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) GENERAL INFORMATION E198355 SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. • This allows you to: • Make and receive calls. • Access and play music from your portable music player. • Use 911 Assist and applications, via * SYNC Applink . * • Support • • • Use the advanced voice recognition system. Charge your USB device (if your device supports this). These features are not available in all markets and may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. Access phonebook contacts and music using voice commands. Stream music from your connected phone. Text message. The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you cannot answer on your own. Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST. 376 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) When using SYNC: • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's manual for further information. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See an authorized dealer. Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST. In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673. In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673. Times are subject to change due to holidays. SYNC Owner Account Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • • Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available for SYNC. Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Privacy Information Driving Restrictions When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cellular phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short development log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h). Safety Information WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. The cellular profile, media device index, and development log will remain in the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. 377 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada will not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further privacy information, see the section on 911 Assist. See SYNC™ Applications and Services (page 392). USING VOICE RECOGNITION This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is around you. Initiating a Voice Session E142599 Press the voice button. A list of available voice commands appears in the display. Global Voice Commands These voice commands are always available. You can say them at any time. Global voice commands (cancel | exit) This command ends the voice session. You can also cancel a session by holding the voice button for two or more seconds. help This command provides you with hints, examples and instructions. (main menu | start again) This command restarts the voice session from the initial starting point. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit. • Helpful Hints • • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system from correctly recognizing spoken commands. Before giving a voice command, wait for the system announcement to finish, followed by a single tone. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. • 378 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Speak naturally, without long pauses between words. You can interrupt the system at any time while it is speaking by pressing the voice button. You can cancel a voice session by pressing and holding the voice button. SYNC™ (If Equipped) System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction. You can customize the voice recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback. Adjusting the Interaction Level Press the voice button. When prompted, say: E142599 Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. (Recommended for first time users.) interaction mode advanced Provides less audible interaction and guidance. Confirmation Prompts Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there is more than one possible response to your request. To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then either of the following: confirmation prompts off Make a best guess from the command; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. confirmation prompts on Clarify your voice command with a short question. Phone Confirmation Using phone confirmations the system asks you to verify before placing any calls. 379 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say: Voice Command Action and Description voice settings Then any of the following: phone confirmation on When enabled, this feature will prompt you to confirm any voice initiated call command prior to the call being placed. phone confirmation off The system will make a best guess; you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence. Changing the Voice Settings In addition to using voice commands to change the voice settings, you can also use the menu in the audio display. To change the voice settings press the Menu button then select: USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR PHONE Menu Item SYNC-Settings Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular phone's functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Using privacy mode. • Dialing a number. • Redialing. • Call waiting notification. • Caller ID. Voice settings Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. Fan speed can also be adjusted normally during a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan speed to desired setting. 380 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) 4. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone's compatibility, see your phone's manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. Pairing a Phone for the First Time Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive hands-free calls. Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 4000 entries per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. Using Voice Commands Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature E142599 before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Using the Audio System Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. Press the voice and when prompted say: 1. Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. 2. Press the PHONE button. When the audio display indicates there is no paired phone, select the option to add. 3. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone to start the pairing process. Voice Command Action and Description (pair ([Bluetooth] device | phone | Bluetooth audio) | add phone) Follow the instructions on the audio display. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. The commands that have [ ] around the word means that the word is optional. 381 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s manual and visit the website. Depending on your phone's capability and your market, the system may prompt you with questions, such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and downloading your phonebook. Phone Voice Commands Pairing Subsequent Phones Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. Shift the transmission into park (P) for automatic transmission or first gear for manual transmission. E142599 Voice Command Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on your audio system. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Press the voice button. When prompted, say any of the following: (phone | Blackberry | iPhone) Then say any of the following: Make sure to switch on your phone's Bluetooth feature before starting the search. See your device's manual if necessary. Press the PHONE button. Select the option for Bluetooth Devices. Press the OK button. Select the option to add. This starts the pairing process. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your device. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Your phone is now paired and the display indicates that the pairing was successful. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. call (___) call ___ at home call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work) call ___ on (cell | mobile) call ___ on other dial [[a] number] ([go to] privacy | transfer to phone | privacy on) 2 join (calls | call) 2 mute call [on] 2 (mute call off | un-mute call) 2 (turn ringer off | silent mode [on]) Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing 2 (hold call [on] | place call on hold) (turn ringer on | silent mode off) 382 1 SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command [text] (messages | message) To access text messages say: 3 Voice Command help [text] (messages | message) ___ is a dynamic listing that should be the name of a contact in your phonebook. For example you could say "Call Home". Then say any of the following: 1 forward (text | [text] message) (listen to | read) ([text] message) See Dial table below. 2 These commands are only valid while in a phone call. 3 reply to (text | [text] message) call [sender] See the text message table below. Phonebook Hints Dial Commands To hear how the SYNC system speaks a name browse phonebook, select a contact and press: Press the voice button and when prompted say any of the following commands: Voice Commands Menu Item 411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one) Hear it 700 (seven hundred) Changing Devices Using Voice Commands 800 (eight hundred) 900 (nine hundred) Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch devices say: Clear (deletes all entered digits) Delete (deletes last set of digits entered) Number <0-9> Plus Pound (#) Star (*) Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press any button on the audio system. 383 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) on the steering wheel or select the end call option in the audio display. Voice Command (connect | device) ___ Receiving Calls You can state the name of the desired device, such as “My iPhone”,“My Galaxy” or“My iPod”. SYNC may ask you to confirm the type of device (Phone, USB, or Bluetooth Audio). Accepting calls When receiving a call, you can answer the call by pressing the accept call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. To use the screen to accept a call select: Making Calls Menu Item Accept E142599 Press the voice button. When prompted, say: Rejecting Calls When receiving a call, you can reject the call by pressing the reject call button on the steering wheel or use the screen. Voice Command call [[a] name] dial [[a] number] To use the screen to reject a call select: SYNC prompts you to say the numbers that you wish to dial. After you say the numbers, the system confirms it. You can then say: Menu Item Reject Ignore the call by doing nothing. Phone Options during an Active Call When the system has stated the number, you say any of the following: During an active call, you have more menu features that become available, such as putting a call on hold or joining calls. Voice Command (dial | send) This initiates the call. (delete | correct) To access this menu, choose one of the options available at the bottom of the audio display or select More to choose from the following options: This erases the spoken digits. To end the call, press the end call button 384 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Description and action Mic. off Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the microphone on, select the option again. Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is private. Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display indicates the call is on hold. Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad (for example, numbers for passwords). Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty or conference call. 1. Select the More option. 2. Access the desired contact through the system or use voice commands to place the second call. Once actively in the second call, select the More option. 3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button. Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access your call history log. 1. Select the More option. 2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK button. 3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming, outgoing or missed). 4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. 1. Press the PHONE button to enter the phone menu. 2. Select one of the options available. Accessing Features through the Phone Menu You can access your call history, phonebook, sent text messages, as well as access phone and system settings. 385 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Display Description and action Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad. Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook. 1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use the options at the bottom of the screen to access an alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. 2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts. 3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection appears in the audio display. 4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Call History Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection. 3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection. Speed Dial Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry, go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad. Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages. BT Devices Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add, connect, set as primary, on or off, delete). Phone settings View various settings and features on your phone. Note: This is a speed-dependent feature and is only available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less. Text Messaging Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the audio display indicates you have a new message. SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages. The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road. To hear the message you can say: Voice command Receiving a Text Message Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. (listen to | read) ([text] message) 386 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Description and action Select this option to have the system read the message to you. SYNC™ (If Equipped) Using the screen you also have the following options: Menu Item Description and action Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message inbox. View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For additional options select: More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the following options: Reply to sender Press the OK button to access, and then scroll through a list of pre-defined messages to send. Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the message. Forward msg. Press the OK button to forward the message to anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can also choose to enter a number. 2. Select the text messaging option, and then press the OK button. Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages 1. Press the PHONE button. Choose from the following options: Menu Item Description and action New Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15 messages. View Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the message. Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your text messages. More... Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all unread messages from your cellular phone. 387 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Sending a Text Message Note: You can send text messages either by choosing a contact from the phonebook and selecting the text option from the audio display or by replying to a received message in the inbox. Note: You can only send a text message to one recipient at a time. 1. Select the send option when the desired selection highlights in the audio display. 2. Select the confirmation option when the contact appears. 3. Press the OK button again to confirm when the system asks if you want to send the message. A pre-defined signature appears on each text message. Accessing Your Phone Settings These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone and text message notification, modify your phonebook, and set up automatic download. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until the phone settings option appears, and then press the OK button. Scroll to select from the following options: Menu Item Description and action Set as master If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone as the master when there is more than one cellular phone paired to the system. This option can be changed for all cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the Bluetooth Devices menu. Phone status See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu. Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone option. 1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each ringtone. 2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone. Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to switch the audible tone off or on. Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add, delete or download). Press the OK button to select and scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences table below. 388 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Phonebook preferences Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK button to add more contacts from your phonebook. Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to the menu for phone settings. Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system. Auto-download When automatic download is on, the system deletes any changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since your last download. When automatic download is off, the system does not download your phonebook when your cellular phone connects to SYNC. You can only access your phonebook, call history and text messages when your paired cellular phone connects to the system. Check or uncheck this option to download your phonebook automatically each time your phone connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent. Sorting Pref. Enabling this feature allows you to select how your contacts are displayed. You can select: First/Last name Last/First name 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears, and then press the OK button. Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as set a phone as primary. Select from the following options: Menu Item Add Description and action Pair additional phones to the system. 1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process. 389 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Menu Item Description and action 2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's manual if necessary. 3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the screen. The display indicates when the pairing is successful. 4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears, select either yes or no. 5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC permission to access information. For more information on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s manual and visit the website. Delete Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair it again. Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone as master by selecting the master option and confirming it as the primary. Conn. Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous phone disconnects from the telephone services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio music playback feature at the same time. Discon. Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone, you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing process. 2. Select the SYNC settings option, and then press the OK button. System Settings 1. Press the MENU button. 390 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Scroll to select from the following options: Display Description and action Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then press the OK button to change the option's status. Set defaults Return to the factory default settings without erasing your indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices). Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. Master reset Completely erase all information stored in the system (such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices) and return to factory default settings. Install on SYNC Install downloaded applications or software updates. Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation successfully. System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial number. Press the OK button to select. Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See Using Voice Recognition (page 378). Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB device. Press the OK button and use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder. You can select media content for playback from this menu. 391 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone's compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. • 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency. • SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications (if your phone is compatible). Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. These features may require activation. Available AppLink enabled apps vary by market. 911 Assist Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If you switch on 911 Assist, either a voice message plays or a display message or an icon comes on when you start your vehicle and after a previously paired phone connects. WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca. See Supplementary Restraints System (page 44). Important information about airbag deployment is in this chapter. 392 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) See Roadside Emergencies (page 258). Important information about the fuel pump shut-off is in this chapter. • • Setting 911 Assist On or Off Press Menu then select Menu Item Action and Description In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC then attempts to call the emergency services. SYNC-Applications 911 Assist Select the desired option, on or off. If you choose not to activate this feature you will have the following options: Menu Item A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel". Action and Description Voice Provides a display and voice Reminder reminder at phone connection ON at vehicle start. Provides a display reminder Voice Reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection. OFF If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. To make sure that 911 Assist works properly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. • A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • 393 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. SYNC™ (If Equipped) 911 Assist Privacy Notice Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps work automatically with no setup. Other apps want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites. We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. Note: AppLink is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the MyFord Touch system. To Access Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the menu on-screen. Then select: SYNC Mobile Apps Menu Item The system enables voice and steering wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled smartphone apps. When an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. Scroll through the list of available applications and select a particular app or select: Find New Apps Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC AppLink app, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Note: Android users need to connect the phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit the local website. Accessing an App's Menu When an app is running through SYNC, press the right arrow button on the steering wheel control to access the app menu. Note: Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps will vary by region. You can access various app features from here, for example thumbs up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow button on the steering wheel control to exit the app menu. 394 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To Access Using Voice Commands Press the voice button then when prompted say: Menu Item Action and Description Say the name of the application after the tone. The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip". mobile (apps | applications) help Use this command to discover the available voice commands. SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands The following voice commands are always available: Menu Item Action and Description mobile (apps | applications) SYNC prompts you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC. list [mobile] (apps | applications) SYNC lists all of the currently available mobile apps. find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications) Searches your connected mobile device for SYNC-compatible mobile apps. help You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC. When you launch an app using SYNC, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example: • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle information to the app such as, but not limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel consumption, engine speed, rain sensor, odometer, VIN, external temperature, gear position, tire pressure, and head lamp status. • To allow your vehicle to provide driving characteristic information such as, but not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status, engine revolutions per minute, gear position, braking events, steering wheel angle, and accelerator pedal position. App Permissions The system organizes app permissions by groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. 395 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) • • To allow your vehicle to provide location information, including: GPS and speed. To allow the app to send push notifications using the vehicle display and voice capabilities while running in a background state. Push notifications may be particularly useful for news or location based apps. Note: You only need to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC. Note: We are not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you approve us to provide to an app. Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select: Menu Item Action and Description SYNC-Apps Mobile Apps All Apps You can also select a specific app. If the app supports push notifications, this setting is listed. Select to enable or disable the feature as required. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: Standard data rates apply. We are not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Data is sent to us in the United States through the connected device. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place. App Status You can view the current status of an app in the settings menu. 396 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) There are three possible statuses: Menu Item Action and Description Update Needed The system has detected a new app requiring authorization or a general permissions update. Up-To-Date No update is required. Updating... The system is trying to receive an update. Update settings Menu Item Action and Description Request Update Select this option from the settings menu to manually preform a needed update. Disable Updates Select this option from the settings menu to disable automatic updates. Doing so also disables the use of Mobile Apps on SYNC. Confirm that the USB device has been formatted correctly and has the following specifications: • USB 2.0. • File format must be FAT16/32. USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER You can access and play music from your digital music player over your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media menu or voice commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories, such as artist and album. The format of the audio files on the USB device must be: • MP3. • Non DRM protected WMA. • WAV. • AAC. Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 15,000 songs. SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including: iPod, Zune, plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also supports audio formats, such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC. Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, make sure you switch it on before plugging it in. 397 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) To Connect Using Voice Commands To Connect Using the System Menu Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports. 1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's USB ports. 2. Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display. Press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice Command Action and Description (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice commands. See the media voice commands. Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player]) appears, you can say USB or USB stick. To view USB content select: Message Browse USB Description and Action Depending on how many media files are on your connected device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback audio automatically. Message You can browse the files on the USB device in categories. Select BROWSE from the buttons at the bottom of the audio display and choose from the following: Albums Genres Browse USB Message Reset USB Play all Media Voice Commands Playlists Press the voice button and when prompted say: Songs E142599 Artists 398 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command Description and Action (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate [player]) voice commands. You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or what is. You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets. For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or "what is playing". Command pause play Description and Action Pauses device playback. Resumes device playback. play [album] ___ play all Play all media on the device from the first track to the last. play [artist] ___ play [genre] ___ play [playlist] ___ next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the next track on the current media. previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Plays the previous track on current media. [play] (similar music | more like this) Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the one currently playing. play [song | track | title | file] ___ repeat off repeat (one | track) [on] Repeats the current track. 399 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Command Description and Action shuffle [all] [on] Plays the current playlist in a random order. (Not all devices support this command.) shuffle off At any time during playback, you can press the voice button and ask the system what is playing. The system reads the metadata tags (if populated) of the current track. ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) • • ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles". Bluetooth Audio Examples of USB Commands SYNC provides the user with many intuitive ways to find and play a song using voice. For example, if we have a song called "Penny Lane" from the album "Magical Mystery Tour" we can say the following to play this song: • • Play album "Magical Mystery Tour". Play "Magical Mystery Tour". The system is also capable of playing music from your cellular phone through Bluetooth. To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press the MEDIA button and select: Menu Item BT audio Play song "Penny Lane". Play "Penny Lane". Then any of the following: If we wanted to play the entire album, we can say: Voice Command pause play next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode] Media Menu Features The media menu allows you to select how to play your music (such as by artist, genre, shuffle or repeat), find similar music or reset the index of your USB devices. 400 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Press the MEDIA button and select either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media source list in the audio display to start USB playback. SYNC™ (If Equipped) Message Options Description and Action This will enter the media menu. Then any of the following: Message Description and Action Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your choice, it remains on until you switch it off. Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing. Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any unpopulated metadata tag. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete you can choose what to play from the USB song library. 2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the audio display) to select USB playback. Accessing Your USB Song Library 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Message Browse USB Description and Action This menu allows you to select and play your media files by artist, album, genre, playlist or track. If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no media. 401 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) If there are media files, you have the following options: Display Play all Description and Action Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time * in numerical order. Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears in the display. Playlists Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL, * or MTP). 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the OK button. Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK button. Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists * * and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK button. Albums Sort all indexed media files by album. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the OK button. Genres Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type. 1. Press the OK button to select. 2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the OK button. Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player connected to the USB port. You can only view media files that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not visible.) 1. Press the OK button to select. * * 402 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Display Description and Action 2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and then press the OK button. Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete, you can choose what to play from the USB song library. * You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list. USB 2 (If Equipped) Using Voice Commands Your vehicle may come equipped with an additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of the instrument panel. USB 2 is located inside the storage compartment of the vehicle's center console. You can access and view your USB songs using voice commands. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB port. Press the voice button and when prompted, say any of the following commands: You can plug in an additional USB device into the second USB port. You can access both USB devices by using voice commands. Accessing and Viewing USB Media (browse | search | show) all (album | albums) To access a USB device press the voice button and when prompted say: (browse | search | show) all (artist | artists) Voice command USB 1 (browse | search | show) all (genre | genres) USB 2 (browse | search | show) all (playlist | playlists) Note: SYNC only supports one connected iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever one you plug in first). When you connect a second iOS device, the systems charges it, but does not support playback from it. (browse | search | show) all (song | songs | title | titles | file | files | track | tracks) (browse | search | show) album ___ Bluetooth Devices and System Settings (browse | search | show) artist ___ (browse | search | show) genre ___ You can access these menus using the audio display. See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 380). (browse | search | show) playlist ___ 403 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Commands for Audio Sources Voice Command ((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which) (song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this) Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple voice command. help E142599 * Press the voice button and when prompted say: If equipped. Radio Voice Commands Voice Command If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button, and then E142599 say any of the commands in the following table. (music | audio | entertainment) [system] Below are a few examples of voice commands you can use. If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) Voice Command Radio [tune [to]] AM 2 Bluetooth (audio | stereo) You can then say any of the following commands. (disc | CD [player]) play [tune [to]] AM [tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] AM1 [tune [to]] FM1 [tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) [tune [to]] AM 2 [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM]) Radio [tune [to]] AM preset ___ tune [to] SAT * [tune [to]] AM1 preset ___ Sirius * [tune [to]] FM [tune [to]] FM1 (USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player]) [tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST | autoset) preset ___ 404 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice Command Voice Commands [tune [to]] FM 2 [tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___ [tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM]) [tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___ [tune [to]] FM preset ___ FM ___ HD ___ tune [to] [Sirius] Help * [tune [to]] Sirius [channel] ___ [tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___ HD ___ * You can say the channel number (0233) to listen to that Sirius station. [tune [to]] preset ___ CD Voice Commands Tune If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button, and then say any of the commands in the following table. help * E142599 If equipped. Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands (If equipped) E142599 If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: To listen to Sirius satellite radio, press the voice button and, after the tone, say: Voice Command (disc | CD [player]) play Voice Commands You can then say any of the following commands. Sirius pause When you are listening to Sirius satellite radio, you can press the voice button, and say any of the commands in the following table. play [play] next track [play] previous track Voice Commands tune [to] SAT [play | change to] track [number] ___ [tune [to]] SAT 1 repeat (track | song) [on] [tune [to]] SAT 2 repeat folder [on] [tune [to]] SAT 3 repeat off [tune [to]] preset ___ (shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks | songs) [on]] [tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___ 405 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility, register your account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for more information. Voice Command (shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] | disc) [on] (shuffle | random | mix) folder [on] shuffle off SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see the tables below. Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) There is excessive background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your phone may be affecting SYNC performance. Review your phone's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the other person but they cannot hear me. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. SYNC is not able to download my phonebook. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try pushing your phonebook contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website. The system says Phonebook Try pushing your phonebook Downloaded but the This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using phonebook in SYNC is your phone's capability. the Add Contacts feature. empty or missing contacts. 406 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, try moving them to the device memory. Remove any pictures or special ring tones associated with the missing contact. Depending upon your phone, you may have to grant SYNC permission to access your phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm when prompted by your phone during the phonebook download. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This is a phone-dependent feature. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting SYNC from your device and trying again. I am having trouble connecting my phone to SYNC. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. Update your device's firmware. 407 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting. Text messaging is not working on SYNC. This is a phone-dependent feature. Go to the website to review your phone's compatibility. This may be a possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device, resetting the device or removing the device's battery, then trying again. USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Try turning off the device, resetting the device, removing the device's battery, then trying again. I am having trouble connecting my device. This may be a possible device malfunction. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly into the device and the USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an autoinstall program or active security settings. SYNC does not recognize my device when I turn on the car. Bluetooth audio does not stream. This is a device limitation. Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures. Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC This is a phone-dependent website to confirm your feature. phone supports the Bluetooth audio streaming function. 408 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The device is not connected. Make sure you correctly connect the device to SYNC, and that you have pressed play on your device. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, song title, album or genre information. SYNC does not recognize music that is on my device. Make sure that all song details are populated. The file may be corrupted. The song may have copyright protection, which does not allow it to play. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to MTP class. Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Review the phone voice commands and the media You may be using the wrong voice commands at the voice commands. beginning of their respective sections. SYNC does not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken before this does not register with the system. Review the media voice SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong commands at the beginning the name of a song or artist. voice commands. of the media section. 409 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You may be saying the name differently than the way you saved it. Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you say "Play Artist Prince", the system does not play music by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. Make sure you are saying the complete title, such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to spell them. LOLA requires you to The system may not be say "L-O-L-A". reading the name the same way you are saying it. Do not use special characters in the title. The system does not recognize them. Review the Phone voice commands at the beginning of the phone section. You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly as they are voice commands. listed. For example, if you save a contact as Joe SYNC does not understand Wilson, say "Call Joe or is calling the wrong Wilson". contact when I want to Using the SYNC phone make a call. menu, open the phonebook and scroll to the name You may be saying the SYNC is having trouble name differently than the understanding. SYNC will way you saved it. read the name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation SYNC is expecting. 410 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system may not be reading the name the same way you are saying it. The system works better if you list full names, such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe". Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as may be very short and similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them. special characters. Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS. If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it. JAKE requires you to say "Call JA-K-E". AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone paired and connected to New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC. SYNC in order to find find any applications. AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to SYNC's USB port with an Apple USB cable. Ensure you have downloaded and installed the AppLink-enabled apps are latest version of the app My phone is connected, but not installed and running on from your phone's app store. I still cannot find any apps. your mobile device. Ensure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or 411 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) login on the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit' option, select that then restart the app. If the app does not have that option, you can also manually "Force Close" the app by going to the phone's settings Sometime apps do not menu, selecting 'Apps.' then My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open finding the particular app app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC, and choosing 'Force stop.' over ignition cycles, for cannot find any apps. Don't forget to restart the example. app afterwards, then select "Find New Apps" on SYNC. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tab the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tab the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC's Mobile App's Menu. My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth bug on some older versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you have not turned off Bluetooth. 412 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Reset the Bluetooth on your phone by turning it off and then turning Bluetooth back on. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC should be able to automatically re-connect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. SYNC™ (If Equipped) AppLink issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable My iPhone phone is back in to the phone. After a connected, my app is The USB connection to few seconds, the app should running, I restarted the app SYNC may need to be reset. appear in SYNC's Mobile but I still cannot find it on Apps Menu. If not, "Force SYNC. Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. The bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. Some Android devices have a limited number of bluetooth ports apps can I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of phone listed in SYNC's available Bluetooth ports, Mobile Apps Menu. you will not see all of your apps listed in SYNC's mobile apps menu. Try increasing the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. SYNC System Reset The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC system. 413 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Getting to Know Your System GENERAL INFORMATION The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact with a variety of features using the touchscreen and voice commands. By integrating with your Bluetooth enabled phone, the touchscreen provides easy interaction with audio, multimedia, climate control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC 3 compatible apps. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Using the Touchscreen To operate the touchscreen, you can simply touch the item or option that you want to select. The button changes color when you select it. The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly select the feature you wish to use. E269856 414 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Menu Item Action and Description A Status Bar This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages. B Home This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view. C Clock This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See Settings (page 463). D Outside Temperature This displays the current outside temperature. E Feature Bar You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature. The Status Bar The touchscreen allows you quick access to all of your comfort, navigation, communication and entertainment options. Using the status and feature bar you can quickly select the feature you want to use. Additional icons also display in the status bar depending on market, vehicle options and current operation. If a feature is not active, the icon does not display. Certain icons may move to the left or right depending on what options are active. Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off (and no doors open). 415 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 i E270077 Callout Item Description A Driver Temperature This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system. B Heated steering wheel When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering wheel. (If equipped) C Passenger Temperature When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are linked, the passenger's temperature does not display. D Microphone Mute This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you. E Mute This icon displays when the audio system is muted. 416 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Callout Item Description F Download This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows more details about the new software. G Wi-Fi This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected. H Wi-Fi in Range An available Wi-Fi network is within range. I Signal Strength This icon displays the phone signal strength and the roaming signal strength. J Text Message This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone. K 911 Assist Off This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC. L In-Call This icon displays when a phone call is active. Messages may also appear in the status bar to provide you with notifications. You can select the message to view the associated feature. Feature Bar Feature Bar Item Functions Audio Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs, and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB connection. Climate Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within the vehicle. Phone Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook of your connected device. Navigation Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along your route. (If equipped) 417 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Feature Bar Item Functions Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped). Apps If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or electric this is also where your settings and power information is located. You can customize your system with various settings for the touchscreen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact with your vehicle. Settings The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request. Cleaning the Touchscreen You can remove fingerprints with a dry, clean, soft cloth. When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the status bar indicating the status of the voice command session. See Using Voice Recognition (page 427). If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth and try to clean it again. Note: Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the touchscreen. Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Vehicle Information Display (If Equipped) Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the touchscreen. Using Voice Recognition Depending on your vehicle and selected options you may be able to control some of the SYNC 3 features on your information display. Using voice commands allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings). Option You can make the following adjustments using the information display SYNC 3 screen: Information Entertain- Information for current audio playing. ment Select source. Navigation View current road and speed limit (if information is available). 418 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Option Information View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to cancel route. If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown. Phone 1 If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: All calls Incoming calls Outgoing calls Missed calls If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display. If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls. 1 Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display. Using the Controls on the Steering Wheel Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll through the available modes. Depending on your vehicle and option package, you can use different controls on your steering wheel to interact with the touchscreen system in different ways. The selection menu expands and different options appear. • Press the up and down arrows to scroll through the modes. • Press the right arrow to enter the mode, use the left arrow to exit the mode. • Press the up and down arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode. • Press OK to confirm your selection. VOL: Control the volume of audio output. Mute: Mute the audio output. Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press again to stop the voice prompt and immediately begin speaking. Press and hold to end a voice session. Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation, compass appears in the display instead of navigation. If you press the right arrow to go into the compass menu, you can see the compass graphic. The compass displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling, not true direction (for example, if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of the compass graphic displays west; north displays to the left of west though its true direction is to the right of west). SEEK NEXT: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. SEEK PREVIOUS: • While in radio mode, press to seek between memory presets. • While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD mode, press to seek between songs or press and hold to fast seek. 419 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 911 Assist (If Equipped) PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or switch between calls. PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject an incoming call. WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE ACCEPT. M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media sources (modes). WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be damaged or non-functional. See Steering Wheel (page 77). Using the Controls on the Bezel Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these controls on your instrument panel: • • • • • • • • • Power: Switch the audio system on and off. VOL: Control the volume of playing audio. Seek and Tune: Use as you normally would in audio modes. Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system. SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to advance through available media modes. SOUND: Press to access the Sound menu where you can adjust sound and other audio settings. 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory preset. See Audio System (page 362). DISP: Switch the display on or off. You can also touch the screen to switch the display back on. Temperature, fan and climate control buttons: Control the temperature, fan speed or settings of the climate control system. See Climate Control (page 129). WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important information. Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off, that setting applies for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is switched off and the phone is connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the status bar. 420 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature. • • If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth enabled phone. You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting: A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have adequate network coverage, battery power and signal strength. The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number. In the Event of a Crash Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains damage or loses its connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the emergency services. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Before making the call: • SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911. • SYNC says the following, or a similar message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and hold the phone button on your steering wheel." For important information about airbag deployment and the fuel pump shut-off please see the Supplementary Restrains and Roadside Emergencies sections of your owner manual. To switch 911 Assist on and off please view the settings information. See Settings (page 463). To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly: • SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the incident and throughout feature activation and use. • The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident. • You must pair and connect a Bluetooth enabled and compatible cell phone to SYNC. • A connected Bluetooth enabled phone must have the ability to make and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident. If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911 systems are capable of receiving this information electronically. 421 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 • 911 Assist May Not Work If • • • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a crash. The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system has no power. The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle are the ones paired and connected to the system. • • 911 Assist Privacy Notice When you switch on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not switch the feature on. • Do not attempt to service or repair the system. Have an authorized dealer check your vehicle. Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats, compartments or safe driving abilities. Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it could cause them damage. See your device's user guide for further information. For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions are speed-dependent. Their use is limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC 3. Speed-restricted Features Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is stationary. Safety Information • WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. • • Screens crowded with information, such as Point of Interest reviews and ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link sports scores, movie times or ski conditions. Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as entering a navigation destination or editing information. All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries). See the following table for more specific examples. 422 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Restricted features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone. Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls. System Functionality Editing the keypad code. Enabling Valet Mode. Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active. Wi-Fi Editing Wi-Fi settings. Editing the list of wireless networks. Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network. Text Messages Viewing received text messages. Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination. Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas. Website Creating a SYNC Owner Account www.syncmaroute.ca Why do I need a SYNC owner account? • • • Essential for keeping up with the latest software and connected features. Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Maintain account permissions. FordPass™ Connect (If Equipped) With a FordPass-equipped vehicle, you can use FordPass to track your vehicle’s location and remotely access vehicle features such as start, lock and unlock and vehicle status including fuel level and approximate mileage. You can also schedule specific times to remotely start your vehicle so it’s ready to hit the road as soon as you are. FordPass is available through a free download via the Apple App Store® or Google Play™. Message and data rates may apply. Services may be limited by mobile phone network coverage area. Visit the website to sign up and register. Website www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca 423 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Updating Your System Updating Over Wi-Fi You can choose to download the update onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic updates. To update your System over Wi-Fi your vehicle must be connected to a Wi-Fi access point. Data rates may apply. USB Updates To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select: To use the USB update you need to log into your owner account and visit the SYNC software update page. Menu Item Settings Website Wi-Fi www.owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Available Wi-Fi Networks The website notifies you if an update is available. You can then select to download the update. You will need an empty USB drive. Please check the website for minimum requirements. Once you have inserted the USB drive into your computer, choose to start the download. Follow the instructions provided to download the files to the USB drive. You can then select your Wi-Fi network. You may have to enter the security code if the network is secured. The system confirms when it has connected to the network. You must also give the system permission to update automatically. Upon vehicle delivery, the System asks you if you would like to use the automatic update feature. If you agree to automatic updates, you can press OK to confirm. If this selection does not appear upon vehicle delivery you can access it through the General Settings. See Settings (page 463). You can also perform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 477). The installation of most files occurs in the background, and does not interrupt your use of the system. Navigation updates cannot be installed in the background, because the files are too large. To install the update in your vehicle, remove anything that is plugged in the USB ports on the media hub and plug in the USB drive containing the update. When the USB drive is plugged in, the installation should begin immediately. After a successful installation, the update is available the next time the vehicle is started. Please reference the website for any further actions. 424 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Customer Assistance If you would like to switch this feature on later, select: The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you are not able to answer on your own. Menu Item Settings Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST. General United States: 1-800-392-3673. Automatic System Updates Canada: 1-800-565-3673. From this menu, you can enable automatic updates. If you have not done so already, the system prompts you to set up a Wi-Fi connection when you enable this feature. Mexico: 01-800-719-8466. Times are subject to change due to holidays. Privacy Information When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within your vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This profile helps in offering you more cellular features and operating more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread), and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The system also records a short diagnostic log of approximately 10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems that may occur. When the system is connected via Wi-Fi and automatic updates are enabled, your system checks for software updates periodically. If a new version is available, it downloads at that time. Software downloads can take place for up to 30 minutes after you have switched your vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download does not complete for any reason, the download continues where it left off at the next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon activation of an update, a banner displays on the touchscreen indicating the system update. Select the icon to see more detail. This icon displays for two ignition cycles. To switch this feature off: The cellular profile, media device index, and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in your vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. Menu Item Settings General Automatic System Updates If you no longer plan to use the system or your vehicle, we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. You can find more information about the Master Reset in General Settings. See Settings (page 463). System In this menu selection, you can change the selection for automatic updates to OFF. 425 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor Company do not access the system data for any purpose other than as described absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement, other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful authority. Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada and The Lincoln Motor Company. HOME SCREEN E224962 Item A Tile Audio Home screen display Shows the active media source. 426 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Tile Home screen display If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass. B Phone The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, text messaging and roaming. C Navigation * This map displays your current location or current route in real time. When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and distance to your destination. If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information. * If equipped. You can access each feature controlled by SYNC 3 through a variety of commands. You can touch any of the feature displays to access that feature. To activate the SYNC 3 voice commands push the voice E142599 button on the steering wheel and wait for the prompt. Anytime you select the home button, the system returns you to this screen. USING VOICE RECOGNITION ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can be the name of anything, such as artist, the name of contact or number. The context and the description of the command tell you what to say for this dynamic option. The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice commands, to control features like audio and climate controls. By using voice commands, you can keep your hands on the wheel and your eyes on the road. Voice Command There are some commands that work for every feature, these commands are: Action and Description Main Menu Brings you to the main menu. Go back Returns you to the previous screen. Cancel Ends the voice session. List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands. ___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For example, you could say: 427 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice Command Action and Description Phone List of Commands Navigation List of Commands Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given. Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen. Audio Voice Commands Included here are some of the most popular commands for each SYNC 3 feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for audio voice commands it can be the name of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a radio frequency number, or the name of an artist, album, song or a genre. To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Sirius Channel ___ Description 1 You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16". You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse". AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580". FM ___ FM ___ HD ___ 1 Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”. Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth connected device. USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device. Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song, Penny Lane". Play Playlist ___ Play Artist ___ Play Album ___ 428 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command Description Play Podcast ___ Play Song ___ Play Audiobook ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk". Browse ___ 1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for climate voice commands it can be the desired degrees for the temperature setting. Climate Voice Commands You can control the temperature of the vehicle using voice commands. To adjust the temperature, say: Voice command Description Set Temperature ___ Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F (15.5–29.5°C). Phone Voice Commands Pairing a Phone You can use voice commands to connect your Bluetooth enabled phone to the system. To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say: Voice command Pair Phone Description Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 463). Making Calls ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for phone voice commands it can be the name of the contact you wish to call or the digits you want to dial. 429 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following: Voice command Description Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny". Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home". Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”. Please make sure that you are saying the contact name exactly as it appears in your contact list. Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands: Voice Command Description <0-9> If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you can continue saying the number. Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call. Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state. Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number. Text Message Voice Commands To access text message options, press the voice button and say: Voice command Description Listen to Message Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you would like to hear. Reply to Message 430 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Navigation Voice Commands (If point of interest. Equipped) ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for navigation voice commands it can be a POI category or a major brand name, where major brand name is a chain with more than 20 locations Setting a Destination You can use any of the following commands to set a destination or find a You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category: Voice command Description Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can also search for an address in a specific state or province. Find a ___ State the name of the POI category or major brand name you would like to search for such as "Find restaurants". Find a POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality. Find an Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality. Find the Nearest State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would like to search for. Show Previous Destinations Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations. Show Favorites Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations. Drive Home Allows you to route to your home address. Drive to Work Allows you to route to your work address. In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active: Voice command Description Cancel Route Cancels the current route. Detour Allows you to select an alternate route. Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt. Show Route Displays the active route. Route Summary Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers. 431 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command Description Where Am I Provides current location. Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map. Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map. Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped) The following voice commands are always available: Voice command Description Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3. List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps. Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3: Voice command Description Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the app mobile app on SYNC 3. Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app, followed by app if the app is running on SYNC 3. help SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. Activation and a subscription are required. 432 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link: Voice command Show Traffic Description Displays a list of traffic incidents. Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map. Show Fuel Prices Displays a list of fuel prices. Show 5 Day Forecast Displays the 5 day weather forecast. Help Voice Settings Commands You can say the following commands to access the voice settings: Voice command Description Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality. Interaction Mode Standard Sets standard prompting with longer prompts. Interaction Mode Advanced Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts. Call Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call. Call Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call. Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands. Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands. Note: Depending on the current climate control settings, the fan speed may automatically go down while issuing voice commands or while making and receiving phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount of background noise in the vehicle. The fan speed will automatically return to normal operation once the voice session ends. You can adjust the fan speed during a voice session, simply press the fan buttons (or turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease the fan speed to the setting you prefer. You can use the volume control to adjust the volume of the system voice prompts. While prompt is active, adjust the volume control up or down to your desired setting. 433 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 To disable this automatic fan speed reduction feature during voice sessions, press and hold the climate control AC and Recirculated air buttons simultaneously, release and then increase fan speed within 2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat the above sequence. ENTERTAINMENT E242502 Message Message and Description A Sources B Direct Tune C Presets 434 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Sources Note: Your vehicle may allow you to save presets from different audio sources on the same page. Press this button to select the source of media you want to listen to. You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands. Menu Item AM FM SIRIUS 1 CD 1 USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here. Bluetooth Stereo Apps 1 This If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections. feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. Once you have entered the station's call numbers, you can select: AM/FM Radio Tuning a Station Menu Item You can use the tune or seek controls on the radio bezel to select a station. Action and Description Enter Press to begin playing the station you have entered. Menu Item Cancel Press to exit without changing the station. A pop up appears, allowing you to type in the frequency of a station. You can only enter a valid station for the source you are currently listening to. Presets To tune a station using the touchscreen, select: Direct Tune To set a new preset, tune to the station and then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and then returns. You can press the backspace button to delete the previously entered number. 435 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 There are two preset banks available for AM and three banks for FM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. SiriusXM satellite radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic and entertainment programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM satellite radio system includes hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated) Note: This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required), the online media player and a list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474. Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming. This includes canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. We are not responsible for any such programming changes. E234451 Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos is published under the eCos License. The following buttons are available for SiriusXM: Menu Item Action and Description Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations. Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station. Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select: Enter The system tunes to the station you select. Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play. You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number. 436 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Replay Action and Description Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio. When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you to the live broadcast. Live ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on any channel. Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 463). There are three preset banks available for SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap the preset button. The indicator on the preset button shows which bank of presets you are currently viewing. Memory Presets To set a preset, tune to the station then press and hold one of the memory preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the system saves the station and returns once the station is stored. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. See Settings (page 463). SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible. Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. Satellite radio signal interference Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute. 437 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting Tips Message Acquiring Signal Cause Action Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel. Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or system failure present. SIRIUS system failure Invalid Channel No action required. This message should disappear shortly. If this message does not clear shortly, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See an authorized dealer for service. The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or able. choose another preset. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not include this channel. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the channel, or tune to another channel. Satellite acquiring signal… The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area, tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return. Updating… Update of channel programming in progress. No action required. The process may take up to three minutes. Questions? Call 1888-539-7474 Your satellite service is no longer available. Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. None found. Check channel guide. All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on locked. that station. SIRIUS Subscription updated SiriusXM has updated the channels available for your vehicle. No action required. HD Radio™ Information (If Available) To activate HD radio, please see the Radio Settings in the Settings Chapter. See Settings (page 463). Note: This feature may not be available in all markets. Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets. 438 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please visit: The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital station, and then changes to orange when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify available digital channels where new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. Website www.hdradio.com Note: There is also an additional feature for stations that have more than 1 HD multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this button allows you to cycle through all of the HD stations on that specific frequency. For example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly causes the radio to cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic increasing order. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen: E142616 When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions: Message Presets Action and Description Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. 439 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential Reception Issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to weak signal strength. If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each station. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. Potential Station Issues Issues Cause Action Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue. Increase or decrease in audio volume. Sound fading or blending in and out. The radio is shifting between analog and digital audio. There is an audio mute delay when selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast preset or Direct Tune. The digital multicast is not No action required. This is available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available. decoded, the audio is available. 440 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. SYNC™ 3 Potential Station Issues Issues Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast channel when recalling a preset or from a direct tune. Cause Action The previously stored multicast No action required. The station preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current available in your current recep- location. tion area. 1 Text information does Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. not match currently broadcaster. playing audio. There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form. 1 information shown for broadcaster. currently selected frequency. 1 You can find the form here: Website http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback CD (If equipped) HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS. The vehicle manufacturer and DTS are not responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. Once you select this option, the system returns you to the main audio screen. The current audio information appears on the screen. The following buttons are also available: Button Function Browse You can use the browse button to select a track. Repeat Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat. 441 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Function For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays). Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order. Bluetooth Stereo or USB You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to access media that you store on your Bluetooth device or USB device such as music, audio books or podcasts. The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB: Button Function Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number one). Shuffle Play the tracks in random order. For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide 30-second skip buttons when you listen to audio books or podcasts. These buttons allow you to skip forward or backward within a track. You can use the forward, reverse, pause or play buttons to control the audio playback. To get more information about the currently playing track, press the cover art or Info button. While playing audio from a USB device you can look for certain music by selecting the following: Button Function Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist. New Search This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories. Play All 442 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Function Playlists Artist Albums Songs Genres Podcasts Audio books Composers A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the category you are browsing. Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your USB device. Select this option to play audio from your USB device. USB Ports Apps The system supports the use of certain audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or Bluetooth enabled device. Each app gives you different on-screen options depending on the app's content. See Apps (page 460). Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information E211463 The system is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including iPod, iPhone, and most USB drives. The USB ports are in the center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel. Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. This feature allows you to plug in USB media devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this feature. Supported audio file extensions include MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC. 443 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Supported USB file systems include: FAT, exFAT, and NTFS. You can direct air through any combination of these air vents. SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media from your USB device by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software identifiers embedded in the media files, provide information about the file. Setting the Blower Motor Speed If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these metadata tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty metadata tags as unknown. Setting the Temperature Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that circulates in your vehicle. Touch up or down on the left-hand temperature control to set the left-hand temperature. SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices. Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode. Touch up or down on the right-hand temperature control to set the right-hand temperature. CLIMATE Touch the climate button on the touchscreen to access your climate control features. Switching Auto Mode On and Off Touch the button to switch on automatic operation, then set the temperature. Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See Settings (page 463). The system adjusts the blower motor speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air to reach and maintain the temperature you have set. Accessing the Climate Control Menu E265038 Touch the button to access additional controls for the front climate system. Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off Directing the Airflow A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options. Touch the button to direct airflow to the windshield air vents and de-mister. MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed. Touch the button to direct airflow to the instrument panel air vents. Touch the button to direct airflow to the footwell air vents. 444 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On and Off A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Touch the button. Note: In certain conditions, such as maximum defrost, the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though you switch off the air conditioning. Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off Touch the button for maximum cooling. Switching the Climate Control On and Off Touch the button. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off E265282 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off Touch the button to cycle through the various climate controlled seat settings and off. Touch the button for maximum defrosting. Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off E265280 Air flows through the windshield air vents, and the blower motor adjusts to the highest speed. Touch the button to switch on temperature control for the right-hand side of the vehicle. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On and Off Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when maximum defrost is on. Touch the button. Note: The heated rear window also turns on when you select maximum defrost. E266189 Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Off Switching Recirculated Air On and Off Touch the button to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Touch the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. E184884 Switching the Heated Seats On and Off The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior, when used with A/C, and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Touch the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off. 445 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and Off Note: Recirculated air may turn off, or prevent you from switching on, in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on and off in various air distribution control combinations during hot weather to improve cooling efficiency. Touch the button to cycle through the various heat settings and off. Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On and Off Switching the Ventilated Seats On and Off E268558 Touch the button to cycle through the various ventilated seat settings and off. E268558 PHONE Accessing Rear Climate Controls E270447 Touch the button to access additional controls for the rear climate system. WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator Touch the button. When on, you can only operate the rear passenger settings through the front controls. E265289 Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off Touch the button to switch on rear automatic operation, then set the temperature. Hands-free calling is one of the main features of the system. Once you pair your cell phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cell phone’s functionality. Switching the Rear Climate Controlled Seats On and Off E265282 Touch the button to cycle through the various ventilated seat settings and off. Touch the button to cycle through the various climate controlled seat settings and off. Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. 446 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. 3. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add a Bluetooth Device 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. At a minimum, most cell phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following functions: • Answering an incoming call. • Ending a call. • Dialing a number. • Call waiting notification. • Caller identification. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. Alternatively, to add a phone, select: Menu Item Phone Menu Add a Bluetooth Device This menu becomes available after pairing a phone. Then select: Discover Other Bluetooth Devices 447 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 G E251249 Item A Menu Item Recent Call List Action and Description Displays your recent calls. You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list. You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You can choose: All B Contacts Incoming Phone Settings Missed All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order. A-Z Jump C Outgoing Selecting this button allows you to choose a specific letter to view. Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options. From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts. 448 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Menu Item Action and Description D Change Device Gives you access to the list of paired or connected Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a device. E Text Messages Displays all recent text messages. F Phone Keypad Use this keypad to dial in a phone number. Use the backspace button to delete numbers. Call G Do Not Disturb Press this button to begin a call. Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do not display on the screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent. Users with phones having voice services may see a button to access the feature. For example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A press and hold of the voice button on the steering wheel also accesses this feature. Making Calls There are many ways to make calls from the SYNC 3 system, including using voice commands. See Using Voice Recognition (page 427). You can use the touchscreen to place calls as well. 449 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 To accept the call, select: To call a number in your contacts, select: Menu Item Contacts Menu Item Action and Description Accept You can then select the name of the contact you want to call. Any numbers stored for that contact display along with any stored contact photos. You can then select the number that you want to call. The system begins the call. Note: You can also accept the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To reject the call, select: Menu Item Reject Note: You can also reject the call by pressing the phone button on the steering wheel. To call a number from your recent calls, select: Menu Item Action and Description Recent Call List You can then select an entry that you want to call. The system begins the call. Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3 logs it as a missed call. During a Phone Call During a phone call, the contacts name and number display on the screen along with the call duration. To call a number that is not stored in your phone, select: Menu Item The phone status items are also visible: • • Action and Description Phone Keypad Select the digits of the number you wish to call. Call The system begins the call. Signal Strength. Battery. You can select any of the following during an active phone call: Pressing the backspace button deletes the last digit you typed. Receiving Calls During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Caller information appears in the display if it is available. 450 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Item Item End Call Privacy Immediately end a phone call. You can also press the button on the steering wheel. Transfer the call to the cell phone or back to SYNC 3. Text Messaging Keypad Press this to access the phone keypad. Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are cell phone-dependent features. Mute You can switch the microphone off so the caller does not hear you. Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h). Receiving a Text Message When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the sender name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select: Menu Item Action and Description Hear It Have SYNC 3 read the message to you. View View the text on the touchscreen. Call To call the sender. Reply You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully. Close To exit the screen. Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped) Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable some SYNC 3 features. SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and Android Auto to access your phone. Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto features use mobile data. When you use Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, you can: • Make calls. • Send and receive messages. • Listen to music. • Use your phone's voice assistant. Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest iOS version is recommended. 1. 451 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Plug your phone into a USB port. See USB Port (page 375). SYNC™ 3 2. Follow the prompts on the touchscreen. 3. Follow the prompts that appear on your phone to allow access to Apple CarPlay. To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select: Menu Item Android Auto Preferences After completing the setup, your phone connects to CarPlay automatically when plugged into a USB port. Your device is listed if SYNC detects Android Auto. Select the name of your device and set the Android Auto switch to off. To disable this feature from the Settings screen, select: Note: You may need to slide your Settings screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay Preferences or Android Auto Preferences. Menu Item Apple CarPlay Preferences To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch the option to return to SYNC. Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your device and set the Apple CarPlay switch to off. To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC app. Note: Contact Google for Android Auto support. Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay support. NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED) Android Auto Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination mode and map mode. Android Auto is compatible with most devices with Android 5.0 or newer. Map Mode 1. Download the Android Auto app to your device from Google Play to prepare your device (this may require mobile data usage). Note: The Android Auto App may not be available within your current market. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks and 3D city models (when available). 2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use, landscape features, and detailed railroad infrastructure for the most essential cities around the globe. 2. Plug your device into a USB port. See USB Port (page 375). 3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen. 4. Follow the prompts that appear on your device. Note: You may be prompted to update additional apps on your device (this may require mobile data usage). 3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically recognizable and have a certain tourism value. 452 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 3D city models are complete 3D models of entire city areas including navigable roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D landmarks and city models appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage of these varies and improves with updated map releases. E207751 Select the zoom in icon to see a closer view of the map. E251780 Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll the map away from your vehicle’s current location. Mute: Press to mute the audio navigation guidance. Press the button again to un-mute the guidance. E207752 Select the zoom out icon to see a farther away view of the map. E251779 Points of Interest (POI) grouping icon: You can choose up to three POI icons to display E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs are located close together or are at the same location a box is used to display a single category icon instead of repeating the same icon, in order to reduce clutter. When you select the box on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how many POIs are in this location. Select the pop up to see a list of the available POIs. You can scroll through and select POIs from this list. E207753 You can adjust the view in preset increments. You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the map. The information bar tells you the names of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over them with the crosshair curser. You can change your view of the map by tapping on the location indicator icon on the right hand side of the screen. You can choose from the following options: E207750 Heading up (2D map) This always shows the direction of forward travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km). If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel, station icons automatically display on the map. If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow will be indicated on the map by green (clear), yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the information is available and varies across the US. North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be upward on the screen. E207749 3D map mode provides an elevated perspective of the map. Adjust this viewing angle and rotate the map 180 degrees by E207748 touching the map twice, and then dragging your finger along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map. You can choose to display traffic icons on the map representing twelve different types of incidents. See Settings (page 463). You can set a destination by hovering above a location and selecting: 453 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button Button Start Destination Mode To set a destination, press: Menu Item Description Destination Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats: Search Street Address (number, street, city, state) For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI" Partial Address (number, street) if searching in current state (number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane". City (name or zip code) Point of Interest (name or category) Intersection (street 1 / street 2) (street 1 and street 2) (street 1 & street 2) (street 1 @ street 2) (street 1 at street 2) Latitude and Longitude (##.###### , ##.######) This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are accepted. You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type. 454 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Description If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections. Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here. tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination. Delete All Home Select this option to remove all previous destinations. Select to navigate to your set Home destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays. To set your Home, press: Home A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Work Select to navigate to your set Work destination. The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays. To set your Work: Work A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select: Yes Enter a location into the search bar and press: Save Favorites Favorites include any location you have previously saved. To add Favorites: Add a Select this button and enter a location into the destination Favorite bar. Search Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered. Save Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen. The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the favorites screen. Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle (POI) Categories configuration): Food 455 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Description Fuel Hotel ATM See All Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking for. Inside of these categories you can search by: Nearby Along Route Near Destination In a City Once you have chosen your destination, press: Menu Item Action and Description Save This saves the destination to your favorites. Start This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options. Fastest Uses the fastest moving roads possible. Shortest Uses the shortest distance possible. Economical Route Uses the most fuel-efficient route. The time and distance for each route also displays. Cancel On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode screen. Once you have chosen your destination, press: Menu Item Start Action and Description The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination. 456 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving. The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your destination. SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually. During active navigation, touch the bottom of the screen to view the menu and other buttons. Navigation Menu In map mode and during active navigation you can access the navigation menu. To access the Navigation menu, press: Button Menu You can then select: Screen View Full Map A full screen map displays during navigation. Highway Exit Info Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation. Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations. You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired. Turn List Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route. You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears and you can press: Avoid The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list. Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. 457 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Button When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present). When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route. Navigation Settings Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 463). Where Am I? Provides your current location city and the nearest road. The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route: Cancel Route The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen. View Route Press this to see a map of the full route. Detour An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route. Edit Waypoints Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set waypoints. Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints. You can also have the system set the order for you by pressing: Optimize Order To return to Go your route press: 1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass) while on an active route. This brings up the destination menu. 2. Set your destination using any of the given methods. Once the destination has been selected, the screen allows you to set the destination as a waypoint by selecting: Waypoints You can add a waypoint to a navigation route as a destination along your route. To add a waypoint: 458 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Add Waypoint The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the location. You can select up to five waypoints. You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order for you by pressing: To return to your route, press: Go SYNC AppLink cityseeker (If Equipped) The AppLink app allows you to use some SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone. Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI) information is limited to approximately 1,110 cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in Canada and 15 in Mexico). First Mile Navigation When you switch your ignition off, the location of your vehicle is recorded and sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The location of your vehicle can be viewed within the app. You can also view walking directions to your vehicle. Last Mile Navigation E225487 When you park near your destination, the system provides walking directions to your destination. POI Search cityseeker, when available, is a service that provides more information about certain points of interest such as restaurants, hotels and attractions. Your paired phone can be used to access additional points of interest (POI). These points of interest can only be access when your phone is paired. When you have selected a point of interest, the location and information appear, such as address, phone number and a star rating. Send To Car Press More Information to see a photo, a review, a list of services and facilities, the average room or meal price and the web address. This screen displays the point of interest icons. You can send destinations to your navigation system using a computer or phone using AppLink. 459 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 The system calculates a reasonable efficient route based on available speed limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may know a local short cut that is more efficient at a given time than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight difference in minutes or miles with the SYNC 3 route. For restaurants, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website address. For hotels, cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, price category, review, check-in and checkout times, hotel service icons and website address. Hotel service icons include: • • • • • • • • • • Navigation Map Updates Restaurant Business center Handicap facilities Laundry Refrigerator 24 hour room service Fitness center Internet access Pool Wi-Fi Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also visit: Website www.navigation.com/sync You need to specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an update available. Attractions include nearby landmarks, amusement parks, historic buildings and more. cityseeker can provide information such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation and admission price. HERE is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you find map data errors, you may report them directly to HERE by going to www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE evaluates all reported map errors and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail. SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If Equipped) SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available on vehicles equipped with navigation and only in select markets. You must activate and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information. It helps you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see current sports scores. See Apps (page 460). Map coverage includes the USA (including Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands), Canada and Mexico. APPS The system enables voice, steering wheel, and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Once an app is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app through voice commands and steering wheel controls. 460 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will vary by market. Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure the required app is running on the mobile device. Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to access AppLink. Menu Item Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port. Find Mobile Apps Note: For information on available apps, supported smartphone devices and troubleshooting tips please visit: Websites Action and Description SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device. Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: Make sure you have an active account for the app that you have downloaded. Some apps will work automatically with no setup. Other apps will want you to configure your personal settings and personalize your experience by creating stations or favorites.We recommend you do this at home or outside of your vehicle. The connected device sends data to Ford in the United States. The information is encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, odometer, usage statistics and debugging information. We retain this data for only as long as necessary to provide this service, troubleshoot, and improve products and services and to offer you products and services that may interest you where allowed by law. Note: We encourage you to review the smartphone app’s terms of service and privacy policies because Ford is not responsible for your app or its use of data. Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system feature. Accessing mobile apps through AppLink is only possible when Android Auto or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps may only be accessible in the car through AppLink and others only through Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the Smartphone Connectivity information to disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay. Note: You must enable mobile apps for each connected device the first time you select a mobile app using the system. Note: Ford reserves the right to limit functionality or deactivate mobile apps at any time. Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3, the app needs to be running in the background of your phone. If you shut down the app on your phone, it shuts down the app on SYNC 3 as well. 461 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 You can enable and disable apps through settings. See Settings (page 463). primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. App Permissions The system organizes the App permissions into groups. You can grant these group permissions individually. You can change a permission group status any time when not driving, by using the settings menu. While in the settings menu, you can also see the data included in each group. Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be available in all markets. When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the system may ask you to grant certain permissions, for example Vehicle information, Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You can enable all groups or none of them during the initial app permissions prompts. The settings menu offers individual group permission control. Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, your vehicle must have navigation. Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features. Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information. Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click on Coverage map and details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. Note: You are only prompted to grant permissions the first time you use an app with SYNC 3. Note: If you disable group permissions, apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings menu. Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in vehicles. SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link, it can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the current weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current sports games. Equipped) WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. Your 462 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Traffic on Route Traffic Nearby Action and Description Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite places, if programmed. Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route. Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available. Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the chosen area. Map Select to see the weather map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds. Area Select to choose from a listing of weather locations. Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress. Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area. Sound SETTINGS Pressing this button allows you to adjust the following: Under this menu, you can access and adjust the settings for many of the system features. To access additional settings, swipe the screen left or right. Sound Settings Reset All Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels. Treble Adjusts the high frequency level. Midrange Adjusts the middle frequency level. Bass Adjusts the low frequency level. Balance / Fade Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back. 463 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Sound Settings Speed Compensated Vol. Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off. Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners. Sound Settings Stereo Surround Your vehicle might not have all of these features. Media Player This button is available when a media device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is the active audio source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following options for active devices only. Menu Item Podcast Speed Action and Description For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose: Slower Normal Faster Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose: Cover Art Priority Gracenote® Management Slower Normal Faster Media Player Cover art displays from your device’s music files. If no cover art for the files exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art. Gracenote® The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files. This overrides any cover art from your device. Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information such as genre, artist, album. 464 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database. base Info Device Information This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device. Update Media Index Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index. You can adjust the following features: Clock To adjust the time, select the up and down arrows on either side of the screen. The arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows on the right adjust the minute. You can then select AM or PM. Menu Item Action and Description Clock Format Select how time displays. Auto Time Zone Update When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes. This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation. Reset Clock to GPS Time When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time. Bluetooth The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings. Pressing this button allows you to access the following: Menu Item Bluetooth Action Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit new connections. Phone You must activate Bluetooth to pair a Bluetooth-enabled device. Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the system before using the functions in hands-free mode. The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a device and the available options. Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if necessary. 465 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Select your phone's name when it appears on the touchscreen. 3. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 4. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 5. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. To add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone 1. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. A prompt alerts you to search for the system on your phone. 3. Select your vehicle's make and model as it displays on your phone. 4. Confirm that the six-digit number appearing on your phone matches the six-digit number on the touchscreen. 5. The touchscreen indicates when the pairing is successful. 6. Your phone may prompt you to give the system permission to access information. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website. Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s manual or visit the website: Website owner.ford.com www.syncmyride.ca www.syncmaroute.ca Alternatively, to add a phone, select: Menu Item Add Phone Once you have paired a device you can adjust the following options. Then select: Discover Other Bluetooth Devices Menu Item Action and Description View Devices You can then select: Add a Bluetooth Device You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in the previous table. You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options: Connect Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected device. 466 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Disconnect Make Primary Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device. Delete Removes the selected device from the system. Pressing the info icon next to the device name allows you to see phone and device information Menu Item Action and Description Manage Contacts You can then select: Auto-Download Contacts Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to date. Sort By: Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose: First Name Last Name Re-download Contacts Select this option to re-download your contact list manually. Delete Contacts Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone. Menu Item Action and Description Set Phone Ringtone You can then select: No Ringtone No sound plays when a call comes to your phone. Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive tone a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting. You can also select one of the three available ringers. 467 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Text Messaging You can then select: No Alert (Silence) No sound plays when a message comes to your phone. You can select one of the three available notification sounds. Voice Readout When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message. You can enable and disable the following options as well: Menu Item Action and Description Mute Audio in Privacy When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy. Roaming Warning When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call. Low Battery Notification When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low. Select this button to modify the on or off setting for this feature. If the mobile phone’s contacts have been downloaded, you can adjust the following option: 911 Assist Note: This service is only available in the United States and Canada. Menu Item Action and Description Set Emergency Contacts You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911 Assist call process. Radio This button is available if a Radio source such as AM or FM is the active media source. Pressing the button allows you to access the following features: 468 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item FM HD Radio Action and Description Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts. AM HD Radio (Dependent on current radio source, If Available) Radio Text This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system display radio text. Autoset Presets Refresh (AST) Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source. Sirius XM (If equipped) Menu Item Action and Description Set Category for After selecting a category, the seek function only stops on channels Seek that are inside that selected category. Parental Lockout Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234. Edit Alerts Select to switch on, off or delete alerts. The Electronic Serial Number is on this screen. This number is necessary to activate, modify or track your account through Sirius XM. Navigation You can adjust many of the Navigation preferences by selecting the following menus. 469 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Map Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Map Preferences Then select any of the following: 3D City Model When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings. Breadcrumbs When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots. POI Icons Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting. When this feature is active you can select the Select POIs icons you want displayed by selecting: Incident Map Icons This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map. Route Preferences Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions Route Preferences Then select any of the following: Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type. Shortest Always Use ___ Route Fastest Eco Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred route setting. When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination. Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance. Automatically Find Parking The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination. Eco Time Penalty Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route. 470 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow Guidance information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible. Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation route. Avoid Toll Roads If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation route. Avoid Ferries/Car Trains If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing a navigation route. Navigation Preferences Menu Item Action and Description Navigation Preferences Guidance Prompts You can adjust how the system provides prompts. Then select any of the following: Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions. Voice Only Only voice instructions are given. Tones Only Only a tone sounds to prompt you. The connected devices send data to us in the United States. The encrypted information includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number, anonymous usage statistics and debugging information. Updates may take place. Mobile Apps You can enable the control of compatible mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent to send and receive app authorization information and updates using the data plan associated with the connected device. Note: All Mobile Apps may not be compatible with the system. 471 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Note: Standard data rates will apply. We are not responsible for any additional charges you may receive from your service provider, when your vehicle sends or receives data through the connected device. This includes any additional charges incurred due to driving in areas when roaming out of a home network. Menu Item Mobile Apps Action and Description Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3. You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu. Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options: Update Mobile Apps This provides information on the current state of available app updates. There are three possible statuses: Update Needed Up-To-Date Updating Mobile Apps… The system has No update is detected a new app required. requiring authorization or a general permissions update is required. The system is trying to receive an update. Request Update Select this button if an update is required and you want to request this update manually. For example, when your mobile device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select: 472 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Request Update All Apps Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once. There may also be SYNC 3 enabled apps listed under these options. Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group. Note: We are not responsible or liable for any damages or loss of privacy relating to usage of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle data that you give us approval to provide to an app. General Access and adjust the system settings, voice features, as well as phone, navigation and wireless settings. Menu Item Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French. Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles. Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit. Touch Panel Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen. Automatic System Updates When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection. About SYNC Information pertaining to the system and its software. Software Licenses Documentation of the software license for the system. Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data. System Wi-Fi Wi-Fi & Hotspot You can access the following: Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot settings and information. 473 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Action and Description Wi-Fi Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates. Available Networks This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range. Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may require a security code to connect. When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such as the signal strength, connection status and security type. Wi-Fi Available Notifications The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already connected. Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped) You can access the following: Menu Item Action and Description Wi-Fi Hotspot On/Off Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off. Settings Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and password. Data Usage Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage. Manage Devices Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot. Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle Hotspot) may be operational while ignition is On and may remain operational while the ignition is Off. Note: It is the account owner’s responsibility to remove the vehicle from the vehicle network carrier account when ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the owner would like to remove the vehicle from the account for any reason, please contact your vehicle network carrier for more information. Note: The vehicle network carrier provides Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability. 474 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) Note: Data you share, e.g. the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan usage, between us and the vehicle network carrier is used to provide the Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with your vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage and availability, and may be used to enable a seamless transition from an old to new embedded modem and to confirm any successfully delivered updates. Tap a color once to active ambient lighting. This sets the color to the highest intensity. You can drag the colors up and down to increase or decrease the intensity. To switch ambient lighting off, press the active color once or drag the active color all the way down to zero intensity. Note: For your convenience data usage may be available for monitoring under Settings but may not reflect actual or current usage. The vehicle network carrier is responsible for providing information about your account. Please contact the vehicle network carrier for more information. Vehicle Note: We may need to update operating system software on your vehicle, including security updates and bug fixes, to keep connected services current, like Vehicle Hotspot, without prior notice to you. Door Keypad Code (If equipped) Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these features. You can select the following features to update their settings. Select this button to add or erase a personal door keypad code. To add or erase a personal code, you first need to enter the five-digit factory set code. You can find this code on the owner's wallet card in the glove box or from your authorized dealer. Note: If you do not have an active vehicle hotspot data plan, open your web browser and go to a website using the HTTP protocol to be automatically redirected to the vehicle network carrier landing page where you can purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will not automatically redirect. Camera Settings To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Message Action and Description Camera Settings Then select from the following: Enhanced Park Aids When the reverse sensing system detects an object, it displays red, yellow and green highlights at the top of the image. Rear Camera Delay You can enable or disable this option using the slider. You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner manual. 475 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN) shows you the ESN number for your system. You need this number for certain registrations such as Satellite Radio. Selecting this button on the settings menu Display To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select: Menu Item Action and Description Display Off The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen. Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer. Calm Screen Enable this option to have your screen display minimal content. Pressing anywhere on the screen, using the reverse camera, or touching an interactive icon returns the screen to normal content. Background Allows you to select a screen background color. Mode Auto Dim You can select: Auto The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside light level. Day The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing. Night The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier. Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions. Voice Control You can adjust the voice control settings by selecting the following options. 476 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Menu Item Advanced Mode Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations. Phone Confirmation Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts name with you before making a call. Voice Command List Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands when the voice button is pressed. To enable valet mode, enter your chosen PIN. The system then asks to confirm your PIN by reentering it. The system then locks. Valet Mode Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN. To unlock the system, enter the same pin number. The system reconnects to your phone and all of your options are available again. When you select valet mode a pop up appears informing you that a four digit code must be entered to enable and disable valet mode. You can use any PIN you chose but you must use the same PIN to disable valet mode. The system asks you to input the code. SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, please refer to the tables below. Note: If the system is locked and you cannot remember the PIN, please contact the Customer Relationship Center. To check your cell phone's compatibility, refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website. United States: 1-800-392-3673 Canada: 1-800-565-3673 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution There is background noise during a phone call. The audio control settings on your cell phone may be affecting SYNC 3 performance. Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments. During a call, I can hear the Possible cell phone other person malfunction. but they cannot hear me. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone icon on the phone screen. 477 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution During a call, I cannot hear the The system may need to other person be restarted. and they cannot hear me. This is a cell phonedependent feature. SYNC 3 is not able to download my phone- Possible cell phone book. malfunction. To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. The system says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability. book is empty or is missing contacts. This is a cell phonedependent feature. I am having trouble connecting my cell phone to SYNC 3. Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone. Refer to your cell manual. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to your cell phone's memory. You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook download feature on SYNC 3. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your device, then trying again. Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone. Update your cell phone's firmware. 478 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Cell phone issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Switch the auto download setting off. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Check your cell phone's compatibility. Possible cell phone malfunction. Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery, then try again. iPhone • • • • • Text messaging is not working on SYNC 3. Go to your cell phone's Settings. Go to the Bluetooth Menu. Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with your vehicle make and model to enter the next menu. Turn Show Notifications on. Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system to activate this settings update. Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3. Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application. Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone. Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported. This is a cell phonedependent feature. Audible text messages do not work on my This is a cell phone limitacell phone. tion. Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages. Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider and software version. 479 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3. I am having trouble connecting my device. Make sure you are using the manufacturer's Possible device malfunc- cable. tion. Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your vehicle's USB port. Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or active security settings. The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. SYNC 3 does not recognize Make sure you are not leaving the device in my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold I start my temperatures. vehicle. This is a devicedependent feature. Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have started the media player on your device. Bluetooth audio The device is not does not connected. stream. The device is in a bad state. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3. Your music files may not contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated. information. SYNC 3 does not recognize The file may be music that is on corrupted. my device. The song may have copyright protection that does not allow it to play. Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version. Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass storage to media transfer protocol class. 480 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution The file format is not supported by SYNC 3. Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 434). The device needs to be re-indexed. Update media index. See Settings (page 463). The device has a lock screen enabled. Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3. Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3. When I connect my device, I To listen to Apple devices through USB, sometimes do This is a device limitation. select AirPlay from the devices Control not hear any Center, then select Dock Connector. sound. To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC. SYNC 3 does not display the The device or media song informaplayer is incompatible. tion, repeat, or shuffle buttons. Connect a compatible device or media player. Wi-Fi Access Point issues Issue Failed connection. Possible cause Possible solution Password error. Verify password. Weak signal. Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal. Multiple Access points within range with the same SSID. Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use the default name unless it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address. 481 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Wi-Fi Access Point issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution Weak signal probably Disconnecting after successful due to distance from the access point, obstruction connection. or high interference. Poor signal seen by SYNC 3 despite being near a access point. There may be an obstruction between SYNC 3 and the access point. An access point The access point was is not listed in defined as a hidden the list of avail- network. able networks. Position the vehicle close to the access point with the front of the vehicle facing the access point direction and remove obstacles if possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones may cause interference. If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try positioning the vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the access point. If you have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the vehicle to face the access point. If all windows are tinted, you can open the windows in the direction of the access point if that is feasible. Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such as opening the garage door. Please set the network to visible and try again. 482 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Wi-Fi Access Point issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 is not SYNC 3 does not seen when currently provide a searching for access point. Wi-Fi networks from your phone or other devices. SYNC 3 currently does not provide an access point. Software down- Poor signal strength, too far from the access point, load takes too access point is long. supporting multiple connections, slow Internet connection or other problems. Check the signal quality (under network details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped access point where the environment is more predictable. SYNC 3 seems to connect with a access point and the signal strength is excellent but the software is not being updated. It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if no new software. The the access point requires a subscription, connected access point you may contact the service provider. may be a managed one and it requires either a subscription or agreeing to the terms and conditions. 483 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 AppLink Issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) You did not connect an Applink Compatible phone to SYNC 3. Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable. My phone is connected, but I still cannot find any apps. AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and running on your mobile device. Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of the app from your phone's app store. Make sure the app is running on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login to the app on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone. My phone is connected, my app(s) are running, but I still cannot find any apps. Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC 3 find the application if you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select it and restart the app. If the app does not have that option, select the phone's Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.' properly close and reopen their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3. SYNC 3, over ignition cycles, for example. On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu. AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select "Find Mobile Apps," SYNC 3 does not find any applications. 484 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 AppLink Issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) My Android phone is connected, my app(s) are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot find any apps. There is a Bluetooth issue on some older versions of the Android operating system that may cause apps that were found on your previous vehicle drive to not be found again if you did not switch Bluetooth off. Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC 3 should be able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you press the "Phone" button. My iPhone is connected, my app is running, I You may need to reset the USB connection to restarted the SYNC 3. app but I still cannot find it on SYNC 3. Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application and restart it. I have an Android phone. I found and started my media app on SYNC 3, but there is no sound or the sound is very low. Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the device. The Bluetooth volume on the phone may be low. I can only see some of the AppLink apps running on my phone listed in the SYNC 3 Mobile Apps Menu. Some Android devices have a limited number of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to connect. If you have more AppLink apps on your phone than the number of available Bluetooth ports, you will not see all of your apps listed in the SYNC 3 mobile apps menu. Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's settings menu on the phone. 485 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution You may be using the SYNC 3 does wrong voice commands. not understand what I am saying. You may be speaking too soon or at the wrong time. Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice commands at the beginning of their respective sections. Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list of voice commands there. Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command. You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section. Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device. For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain". You may not be saying SYNC 3 does the name exactly as it not understand appears on your device. the name of a song or artist. SYNC 3 does not understand or is calling the wrong contact when I want to make a call. Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N". The song or artist name may have some special characters that are not being recognized by SYNC 3. Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom". The contact name may contain special characters. Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters like *, - or +. 486 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Voice command issues Issue Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the contact names stored on your cell phone. The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign names stored on my cell phone. You may not be saying the name exactly as it appears on your phonebook. The SYNC 3 voice control system is having trouble recognizing foreign tracks, artists, albums, genres and playlist names from my media player or USB flash drive. You may be saying the foreign names using the currently selected language for SYNC 3. The system generates voice prompts and SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt ation of some technology. words may not be accurate for my language. Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE. Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you, giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting. SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names (for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunciation for these artists. SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded human voice. SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). 487 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Personal Profiles Issue Possible cause and solution Personal Profiles have not been set up. An invalid profile name was entered. I cannot create a profile. A memory button was not selected when prompted. The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while creating a profile. Personal Profiles is turned off. The lock button was not selected on a keyfob when prompted. The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and an overwrite was declined. I cannot link a keyfob. A profile recall was performed while linking a keyfob. The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while linking a keyfob. The old linking method is used. The unsaved setting is not supported by Personal Profiles. My personalized settings do not save. A different Personal Profile is active than expected. Another user has changed settings for the wrong Personal Profile. A Personal Profile has not been created. Personal Profiles is turned off. My profile will not recall. The requested profile is already active. The memory button being used is not linked to a profile. 488 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 Personal Profiles Issue Possible cause and solution The keyfob being used is not linked to a profile. The wrong keyfob is being used. A button other than unlock or remote start is being pressed on a linked keyfob. The Personal Profile was deleted. My preset positions recall but my profile does not. My profile recalls but my preset positions do not. I lost a keyfob. I lost all profiles. Personal Profiles is turned off. The vehicle is in motion. The preset positions are the same as the Guest or previously active profile. Unlink and relink your keyfob in the Personal Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer. Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed. This could happen if you let dealership add a new keyfob to replace lost one. Master Reset had been performed without your acknowledgement. 489 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing SYNC™ 3 General Issue The language selected for the instrument cluster and information and entertainment display does not match the SYNC 3 language (phone, USB, Bluetooth audio, voice control and voice prompts). Possible cause Possible solution SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most popular SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the the currently selected language for the instru- current active language. ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages. display. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player (for example, "play artist Madonna"). SYNC 3 System Reset The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system. For additional assistance with SYNC 3 troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website. 490 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Accessories For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle, please contact your authorized dealer or visit the online store web site: • • Lifestyle • • • • • • • • • • • Web Address (United States) www.Accessories.Ford.com Web Address (Canada) www.Accessories.Ford.ca Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories. • • • • • • • • Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Exterior Style Cargo shade. In-vehicle safe*. Keyless entry keypad. Parking sensors*. Remote start. Roadside assistance kits*. Vehicle security systems. Wheel locks. *Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer’s limited warranty details, and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited warranty from the accessory manufacturer. Bumper protector. Hood deflectors. Running boards. Side window deflectors*. Splash guards. Interior Style • • • Ash cup or smoker's package. Bluetooth speaker*. Camping tent*. Car covers*. Cargo organization and management. Rear seat entertainment*. Roof crossbars. Roof racks and carriers*. Telematics*. Trailer hitch balls. Trailer hitch drawbars and towing accessories. Peace of Mind Ford Motor Company will warrant your Ford Original Accessory through the warranty that provides the greatest benefit: • 24 months, unlimited mileage. • The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. • • • • • Rear console. Seat covers*. Ambient lighting. Cargo area protector. Floor mats. 491 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Accessories For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for example two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be installed only by an authorized dealer. • An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems. Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile communication system specifically for automotive use. • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems in the vehicle. 492 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Ford Protect PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN. That means you get: • Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership. • Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts. Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only) Rental Car Reimbursement Ford Protect extended service plan means peace of mind. It’s the extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides more protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford Protect extended service plans! 1st day Rental Benefit If you bring your car into your dealer for service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the day. Extended Rental Benefits Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for rental car coverage, including warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions. One trip to the Service Center could easily exceed the price of your Ford Protect extended service plan. With Ford Protect extended service plan you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs. Roadside Assistance Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including: Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components • There are four mechanical Ford Protect extended service plans with different levels of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for details. • • 1. • PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000 covered components, this plan is so complete it’s probably easier to list what’s not covered. 2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech items. 3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. 4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components. Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts. Out of fuel and lock-out assistance. Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car. Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage or other transportation. Transferable Coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Protect extended service plan coverage expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Which should give you and your potential buyer a little more peace of mind. Ford Protect extended service plans are honored by all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S., Canada and Mexico. 493 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Ford Protect Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY) Ford Protect extended service plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect extended service plan. Ford Protect extended service plan is the only service contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford Protect extended service plan provides benefits such as: Covered maintenance includes: • Windshield wiper blades. • Spark plugs. • The clutch disc (if equipped). • Brake pads and linings. • Shock absorbers. • Struts. • Engine Belts. • Engine coolant hoses, clamps and o-rings. • Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if equipped). • Cabin air filter replacement every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric vehicles only). • • • • Rental reimbursement. Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items. Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage expires. Roadside Assistance benefits. There are several Ford Protect extended service plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When you purchase Ford Protect extended service plan, you receive added peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada, the United States and Mexico, provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company dealers. Interest Free Finance Options Just a 10% down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford Protect extended service plan has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit check or hassles. To learn more, call our Ford Protect extended service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada, the United States and Mexico are not eligible for Ford Protect extended service plan coverage. This information is subject to change. For more information; visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect extended service plan that is right for you. Ford Protect Extended Service Plan P.O. Box 321067 Detroit, MI 48232 494 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor limited warranty. Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle. If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance. We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your cost of owning your vehicle down. Convenience Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping. They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from general maintenance to collision repairs. It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in this owner's manual. See Capacities and Specifications (page 340). Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact your dealer for details. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. Protecting Your Investment Maintenance is an investment that pays dividends in the form of improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, make sure you have scheduled maintenance performed at the designated intervals. Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership? Factory-Trained Technicians Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored certification training to help them become experts on the operation of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification their technicians have received. Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a message in the information display at the proper oil change interval. This interval may be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km). 495 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance When the oil change message appears in the information display, it is time for an oil change. Make sure you perform the oil change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km) of the message appearing. Make sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 288). Additives and Chemicals This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop Manual list the recommended additives and chemicals for your vehicle. We do not recommend using chemicals or additives not approved by us as part of your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please consult your warranty information. If your information display resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil change intervals. Oils, Fluids and Flushing In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians at your dealership, should inspect discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating or foreign material contamination immediately. Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex, performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using different specifications and performance features. That is why it is important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle. Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and fluids at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system or using a Ford-approved flushing chemical. Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance information. Owner Checks and Services Make sure you perform the following basic maintenance checks and inspections every month or at six-month intervals. We strongly recommend the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized re-manufactured replacement parts engineered for your vehicle. 496 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Check Every Month Engine oil level. Function of all interior and exterior lights. Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure. Windshield washer fluid level. Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display). Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris. Check Every Six Months Battery connections. Clean if necessary. Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary. Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength. Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary. Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary. Parking brake for proper operation. Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function. Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation. Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary. Multi-Point Inspection In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify potential issues and prevent major problems. We recommend having the following multi-point inspection performed at every scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps running great. 497 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Multi-Point Inspection Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation Battery performance Horn operation Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hoses Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or damage Exterior lamps operation 1 Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Steering and linkage Tires (including spare) for wear and proper 2 pressure 1 For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer 2 If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed. This means you do not have to remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due by displaying a message in the information display. Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a thorough inspection of your vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. The following table provides examples of vehicle use and its impact on oil change intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil change intervals depend on several factors and generally decrease with severity of use. NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™ Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you should change the engine oil based on how your vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduces environmental waste at the same time. 498 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message Interval Vehicle Use and Example Normal Normal commuting with highway driving No, or moderate, load or towing Flat to moderately hilly roads No extended idling 7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km) Severe Moderate to heavy load or towing Mountainous or off-road conditions Extended idling Extended hot or cold operation 5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km) Extreme 3,000–5,000 mi (5,000–8,000 km) Maximum load or towing Extreme hot or cold operation Normal Maintenance Intervals 1 At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display 2 Change engine oil and filter. Rotate the tires. Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended. Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements. Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake. Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses. Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields. Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (four wheel drive only). Inspect the half-shaft boots. Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and Ujoints. 499 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance 1 At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth. Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. 1 Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals. 2 Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 287). Other Maintenance Items Every 20,000 mi (32,000 km) Replace cabin air filter. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Replace engine air filter. At 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Change engine coolant. Every 100,000 mi (160,000 km) Every 150,000 mi (240,000 km) 1 2 3 Replace spark plugs. Inspect accessory drive belt or belts. 4 Change automatic transmission fluid. Replace accessory drive belt or belts. 5 1 Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval. 2 Should be performed by an authorized dealer. 3 Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or 50,000 mi (80,000 km). 4 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced. 5 If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km). 500 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the message appearing in the information display prompting you to change your oil. • Example 1: The message comes on at 28,750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the 30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic transmission fluid replacement. • Example 2: The message has not come on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km). Perform the engine air filter replacement. SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions, you need to perform extra maintenance as indicated. If you operate your vehicle occasionally under any of these conditions, it is not necessary to perform the extra maintenance. For specific recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician. Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Inspect rear axle and U-joints (four wheel drive only). Inspect half-shaft boots. See axle maintenance items under Exceptions. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Change automatic transmission fluid. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace spark plugs. 501 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart. Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Change automatic transmission fluid. Every 60,000 mi (96,000 km) Replace spark plugs. Replace engine air filter. Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads) Inspect frequently, service as required Replace cabin air filter. Replace engine air filter. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag. Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth. Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1 or six months Perform multi-point inspection. Every 30,000 mi (48,000 km) Change automatic transmission fluid. 1 Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 288). Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only) Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel. Exceptions There are several exceptions to the Normal Schedule: 502 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (four wheel drive only) in your vehicle does not require any normal scheduled maintenance. Vehicles are electronically monitored and notify the driver required service by displaying a message in the information display. The PTU lubricant will be more likely to require a change if the vehicle has experienced extended periods of extreme/severe duty cycle driving. Changing or checking the PTU lubricant is not necessary unless the unit has been submerged in water, shows signs of leakage or a message indicating required service is displayed. Contact your authorized dealer for service. Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km). If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km). Engine air filter and cabin air filter replacement: The life of the engine air filter and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air filter and cabin air filter. California fuel filter replacement: If you register your vehicle in California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item does not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability before the completion of your vehicle's useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals and to record all vehicle service. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 503 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 504 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 505 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 506 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 507 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 508 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 509 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 510 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 511 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 512 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Scheduled Maintenance Dealer stamp Repair Order #: Distance: Engine hours (optional): Multi-point inspection (recommended): Signature: E146852 513 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY WARNING: Keep antenna and power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any electronic modules and airbags. WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Note: We test and certify your vehicle to meet electromagnetic compatibility legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other applicable local requirements). It is your responsibility to make sure that any equipment an authorized dealer installs on your vehicle complies with applicable local legislation and other requirements. WARNING: Do not fasten antenna cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and brake pipes. Note: Any radio frequency transmitter equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular telephones and amateur radio transmitters) must keep to the parameters in the following table. We do not provide special provisions or conditions for installations or use. Car E239120 514 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Van E239122 Truck E239121 515 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak MHz RMS) Antenna Positions 1-30 50 1 50-54 50 2, 3 68-88 50 2, 3 142-176 50 2, 3 380-512 50 2, 3 806-870 10 2, 3 Note: After the installation of radio frequency transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in your vehicle, both in the standby and transmit modes. END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Check all electrical equipment: • With the ignition ON. • With the engine running. • During a road test at various speeds. • VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) Check that electromagnetic fields generated inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter installed do not exceed applicable human exposure requirements. • 516 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have acquired a vehicle having several devices, including SYNC ® and various control modules, ("DEVICES") that include software licensed or owned by Ford Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. The SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY. Appendices IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). • GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the following license: • You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICES and as otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and service providers. Description of Other Rights and Limitations • Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR • • 517 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system. Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, translate, disassemble or attempt to discover any source code or underlying ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or to the extent as may be permitted by the licensing terms governing use of any open source components included with the SOFTWARE. Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICES and related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE. Appendices • • • • SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICES, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent may automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically downloaded to your DEVICES. Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its designated agent to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE ("Supplemental Components".) SOFTWARE updates may cause you to incur additional • • 518 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing charges from your wireless service provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to link to third party sites. The third party sites are not under the control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its designated agent are responsible for (I) the contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an endorsement of the third party site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its designated agent. Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and abide with the DEVICES operating instructions particularly as they pertain to safety and you agree to assume any risk associated with the use of the DEVICES. Appendices UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content outside its intended use. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third party software and service providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the DEVICES product support, such as the vehicle owner guide. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICES. No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE. 519 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices • SYNC® Automotive Important Safety Information Read and follow instructions: • Before using your SYNC® system, read and follow all instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following precautions found in the Owner Guide can lead to an accident or other serious injuries. • General Operation • Voice Command Control: Certain functions within the SYNC® system may be accomplished using voice commands. Using voice commands while driving helps you to operate the system without removing your hands from the wheel or eyes from the road. • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. • Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident. • Navigation Features: Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow instructions and safety information fully. • • • 520 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can distract your attention and could cause an accident or other serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting these operations. Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Route Safety: Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following the suggested routes. Emergency Services: Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Appendices Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of Risk • You agree to each of the following:(a) Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving an automobile or other vehicle in violation of applicable law or otherwise driving in an unsafe manner presents a significant risk of distracted driving and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE at excessive volume poses a significant risk of hearing damage and should not be attempted under any circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may not be compatible with new or different versions of an operating system, third party software, or third party services, and the SOFTWARE may potentially cause a critical failure of an operating system, third party software, or third party service.(d) Any third party service accessed by or third party software used with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an additional fee for access, (ii) may not work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii) may change streaming formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may contain adult, profane or offensive content; and (v) may contain inaccurate, false or misleading traffic, weather, financial or safety information or other content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may cause you to incur additional charges from your wireless service provider (WSP) and any data or minute calculators that may be included in the software program are for reference only, are not warranted in any way and should not be relied upon in anyway. • When using the SOFTWARE, you agree to be responsible for and assume the entire risk to the items set forth in Section (a) – (e) above. Disclaimer of Warranty YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL 521 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL. Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver (a) Application. This Section applies to any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’ INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute means any dispute, action, or other controversy between You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including its price) or this EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. (b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, which is a written statement of the name, address, and contact information of the party giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute, and the relief requested. You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve any dispute through informal negotiation within 60 days from the date the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may commence arbitration. Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction • The laws of the State of Michigan govern this EULA and Your use of the SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE may also be subject to other local, state, national, or international laws. Any litigation arising out of or related to this EULA shall be brought and maintained exclusively in a court of the State of Michigan located in Wayne County or in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby consent to submit to the personal jurisdiction of a court in the State of Michigan located in Wayne County and the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Michigan for any dispute arising out of or relating to this EULA. (c) Small claims court. You may also litigate any dispute in small claims court in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business, if the dispute meets all requirements to be heard in the small claims court. You may litigate in small claims court whether or not You negotiated informally first. (d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any dispute by informal negotiation or in small claims court, any other effort to resolve the dispute will be conducted exclusively by binding arbitration. You are giving up 522 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices the right to litigate (or participate in as a party or class member) all disputes in court before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose decision will be final except for a limited right of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction over the parties may enforce the arbitrator’s award. may award the same damages to You individually as a court could. The arbitrator may award declaratory or injunctive relief only to You individually, and only to the extent required to satisfy Your individual claim. (g) Arbitration fees and incentives. • (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum will be conducted solely on an individual basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute heard as a class action, as a private attorney general action, or in any other proceeding in which any party acts or proposes to act in a representative capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will be combined with another without the prior written consent of all parties to all affected arbitrations or proceedings. (f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration will be conducted by the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an individual and use the SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not You are an individual or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes will also apply. To commence arbitration, submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You may request a telephonic or in-person hearing by following the AAA rules. In a dispute involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds good cause to hold an in-person hearing instead. For more information, see adr.org or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence arbitration only in your county of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of business. The arbitrator • • 523 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less. FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly reimburse your filing fees and pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S last written settlement offer made before the arbitrator was appointed (“last written offer”), your dispute goes all the way to an arbitrator’s decision (called an “award”), and the arbitrator awards you more than the last written offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you three incentives: (1) pay the greater of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and (3) reimburse any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator will determine the amounts. ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000. The AAA rules will govern payment of filing fees and the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any arbitration you commence, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous or brought for an improper purpose. In any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY commences, it will pay all Appendices 1. Safe and Lawful Use filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses are not counted in determining how much a dispute involves. You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with the following when using the TeleNav Software: (h) Claims or disputes must be filed within one year. To the extent permitted by law, any claim or dispute under this EULA to which this Section applies must be filed within one year in small claims court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year period begins when the claim or dispute first could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is not filed within one year, it is permanently barred. (a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (I) Severability. If the class action waiver (Section e) is found to be illegal or unenforceable as to all or some parts of a dispute, then that portion of Section e will not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts will be severed and proceed in a court of law, with the remaining parts proceeding in arbitration. If any other provision of that portion Section e is found to be illegal or unenforceable, that provision will be severed with the remainder of Section e remaining in full force and effect. (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag). Telenav Software End User License Agreement Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch, or otherwise use the TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time, with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement and of the privacy policy. You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to comply with the directions above. 524 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices 2. Account Information distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav Software in any manner that You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete. I. infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any party, 3. Software License • ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license (except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes, and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties. iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software without advanced written permission of TeleNav. 4. Disclaimers • 3.1 License Limitations • (a) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its suppliers' trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) 525 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction, weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival of you or others Appendices • • is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas. TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you. REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 6. Arbitration and Governing Law • 5. Limitation of Liability • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY 526 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial. This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without giving effect to its conflict of law provisions. To the extent judicial action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and you agree to submit Appendices to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply. conferred by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement. 7. Assignment 8.3 • By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting them on TeleNav's Website or by downloading such Notices to your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software. You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav, in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement. 8.4 TeleNav's or your failure to require performance of any provision shall not affect that party's right to require performance at any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision itself. 8. Miscellaneous 8.1 8.5 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and you with respect to the subject matter hereof. If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. 8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software, including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or 527 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices 8.6 HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information. The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words "include" and "including" and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words "without limitation". ©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4 The Data for Mexico includes certain data from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía. 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions • 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:: The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights reserved Terms and Conditions 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE North America, LLC Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data together with the Telenav Software solely for the internal business and personal purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble, create any derivative works of, or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. The data (“Data”) is provided for your personal, internal use only and not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including: © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of Natural Resources Canada. 528 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Restrictions. Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not use this Data (a) with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. No Warranty. This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error-free. Export Control. You shall not export from anywhere any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A 529 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606 Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between Telenav (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-User Terms under which this Data was provided. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved. Governing Law. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands” where European HERE Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. I. US/Canada Territory A. United States Data. The End-User Terms for any Application containing Data for the United States shall contain the following notices: Government End Users. If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with these End-User Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following “Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with such Notice: “HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the United States Postal Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.” “©United States Postal Service® 20XX. Prices are not established, controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service®. The following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.” 530 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices 2. Copyright Notice: In connection with each copy of all or any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada, Client shall affix in a conspicuous manner the following copyright notice on at least one of: (i) the label for the storage media of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the copy; or (iii) other materials packaged with the copy, such as user manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information taken with permission from Canadian authorities, including © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Department of Natural Resources Canada. All rights reserved.” B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada, which may include or reflect data from third party licensors (“Third Party Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client agrees that its use of the Third Party Data is subject to the following provisions: a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors of such data, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. 3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion of the Data for the Territory of Canada to End-Users as may be authorized under the Agreement, Client shall provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms (set forth with other end user terms required to be provided under the Agreement, or as otherwise may be provided, by Client) which shall include the following provisions on behalf of the Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan: b. Limitation on Liability: The Third Party Data licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of such Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the Data. The Data may include or reflect data of licensors, including Her Majesty the Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) and the Department of Natural Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on an “as is” basis. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such data, 531 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices either express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a particular purpose. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in respect of any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action alleging any loss, injury or damages, direct or indirect, which may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be liable in any way for loss of revenues or contracts, or any other consequential loss of any kind resulting from any defect in the data or the Data. End User shall indemnify and save harmless the licensors, including Her Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and their officers, employees and agents from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expenses, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the data or the Data. II. Mexico. The following provision applies to the Data for Mexico, which includes certain data from the Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging containing Data for Mexico shall contain the following notice: “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” III. Latin America Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: 4. Additional Provisions: The terms contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations of the parties under the Agreement. To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions of this Section shall prevail. Territory Notice Argentina IGN “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL ARGENTINO” Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO MILITAR DEL ECUADOR AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO DE 2011” “source: © IGN 2009 - BD TOPO ®” Guadeloupe, French Guiana and Martinique Mexico “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y Geografía)” IV. Middle East Territory 532 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country Notice Jordan “© Royal Jordanian Geographic Centre”. The foregoing notice requirement for Jordan Data is a material term of the Agreement. If Client or any of its permitted sublicensees (if any) fail to meet such requirement, HERE shall have the right to terminate Client’s license with respect to the Jordan Data. V. Europe Territory A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe 1. General Restrictions Applicable to Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and agrees that in certain countries of the Europe Territory, Client will need to obtain rights directly from third party RDS-TMC code providers to receive and use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to deliver to End-Users Transactions in any way derived from or based on such Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE shall deliver the Data incorporating Traffic Codes to Client only after receiving certification from Client of its having obtained such rights. 2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for each Transaction that uses Traffic Codes for Belgium, provide the following notice to the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium are provided by the Ministerie van de Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Transports.” B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted sublicensees (if any) are restricted from licensing and/or otherwise distributing HERE’s database for the country of Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are restricted from using the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business asset management applications, call center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet applications or for providing geocoding services. B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license granted to Client relating to making, selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or paper-like medium): (a) such license with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s entering into and complying with a separate written agreement with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the OS any and all applicable paper map royalties, and Client’s complying with the OS copyright notice requirements; (b) such license for selling or otherwise distributing for charge with respect to Data for the Territory of Czech Republic 533 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior written consent from Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling or distributing with respect to Data for the Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from using Data for the Territory of France to create paper maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted from using any Data to create, sell or distribute paper maps that are the same or substantially similar, in terms of data content and specific use of color, symbols and scale, to paper maps published by the European national mapping agencies, including without limitation, Landervermessungämter of Germany, Topografische Dienst of the Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Landestopografie of Switzerland, Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National Land Survey of Sweden. Austria Croatia Cyprus, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Moldova, Poland, Slovenia and/or Ukraine “© Bundesamt für Eichund Vermessungswesen” “© EuroGeographics” France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD TOPO ®” Germany “Die Grundlagendaten wurden mit Genehmigung der zuständigen Behörden entnommen” Great Britain “Contains Ordnance Survey data © Crown copyright and database right 2010 Contains Royal Mail data © Royal Mail copyright and database right 2010” C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Client acknowledges and agrees that the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct action against Client to enforce compliance with the OS copyright notice (see Section IV(D) below) and paper map requirements (see Section IV(B) above) contained in this Agreement. D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Country(ies) Notice 534 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Greece “Copyright Geomatics Ltd.” Hungary “Copyright © 2003; TopMap Ltd.” Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è stata prodotta usando quale riferimento anche cartografia numerica ed al tratto prodotta e fornita dalla Regione Toscana.” Norway “Copyright © 2000; Norwegian Mapping Authority” Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal” Appendices Spain “Información geográfica propiedad del CNIG” Sweden “Based upon electronic data © National Land Survey Sweden.” Product incorporates data which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In addition to the foregoing, the End-User Terms for any Application containing RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall contain the following notice: “Product incorporates traffic location codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.” Switzerland “Topografische Grundlage: © Bundesamt für Landestopographie. E. Respective Country Distribution. Client acknowledges that HERE has not received approvals to distribute map data for the following countries in such respective countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may update such list from time to time. The license rights granted to Client under this TL with respect to the Data for such countries are contingent upon Client’s compliance with all applicable laws and regulations, including, without limitation, any required licenses or approvals to distribute the Application incorporating such Data in such respective countries. AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics Disclosure END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS, EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR VI. Australia Territory A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies of the Data and/or packaging relating thereto shall include the respective Third Party Notices set forth below and used as described below corresponding to the Territory (or portion thereof) included in such copy: Copyright. Based on data provided under license from PSMA Australia Limited (www.psma.com.au). 535 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM AROSE. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING CARRIER. (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT. (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE DEVICE. (iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES VII. China Territory THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT GUARANTEE ANY END USER UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER Personal Use Only You agree to use this Data together with [insert name of Client Application] for the solely personal, non-commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau, time-sharing or other similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as necessary for your personal use to (i) 536 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices rigCustomer Remedies view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not remove any copyright notices that appear and do not modify the Data in any way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s sole discretion, either (a) return of the price paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Data has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Data will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither these remedies nor any product support services offered by NAV2 are available without proof of purchase from an authorized international source. Restrictions Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any mobile or wireless-connected electronic or computer devices, including without limitation cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if you fail to comply with these terms and conditions. No Other Warranty: EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Limited Warranty NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt, and (b) any support services provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as described in applicable written materials provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will make commercially reasonable efforts to solve any problem issues. Limited Liability: TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR 537 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Governing Law. FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability exclusions may not be permitted under applicable law, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the People’s Republic of China, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder shall be submitted to the Shanghai International Economic and Trade Arbitration Commission for arbitration. Gracenote® Copyright CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523. Export Control You agree not to export to anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations. IP Protection Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of Gracenote. The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers and are protected by applicable copyright and other intellectual property law and treaties. The Data are provided solely on the basis of a license to use, not sale. Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA) Entire Agreement This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote"). These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between NAV2(and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. The software from Gracenote (the "Gracenote Software") enables this device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information ("Gracenote Data") from online servers 538 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device. This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are available to Gracenote. You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. including any copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this agreement against you, directly in each company's own name. Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote Privacy Policy. THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide, 539 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Taiwan Territory IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007. Note: In accordance with the management approach of low-power radio wave radiation motors: Article 12: For approved and certified low-power radiation motor models, companies, firms or users must not alter the frequency, increase the power or change the characteristics and functions of the original design without authorization. Article 14: The usage of low-power radio-frequency motors must not affect aviation safety and interfere with legal telecommunications. Should interference be detected, immediately stop using the device and only resume usage after ensuring that there is no longer any interference. For the legal telecommunication and wireless telecommunication of the telco, the low-power radio frequency motor must be able to tolerate legal limits of interference from telecommunication, industrial, scientific and radio wave equipment. Radio Frequency Statement FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND CONDITIONS By activating, using and/or accessing the SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or other content or material provided by Intelematics (together, SUNA Products and/or Services), you must accept certain terms and conditions. The following is a brief summary of the terms and conditions that apply to you. To view the full terms and conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, please consult: WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ 1. Acceptance 540 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices By using SUNA Products and/or Services, you will be deemed to have accepted and agreed to be bound by the terms and conditions fully detailed at: 5. Service Continuity and Reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel We will use reasonable endeavours to provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic Channel may occasionally be unavailable for technical reasons or for planned maintenance. We will try to perform maintenance at times when congestion is light. We reserve the right to withdraw SUNA Products and/or Services at any time. Website www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/ 2. Intellectual Property SUNA Products and/or Services are for your personal use. You may not record, or retransmit the content, nor use the content in association with any other traffic information or route guidance service or device not approved by Intelematics. You obtain no right of ownership in any Intellectual Property Rights (including copyright) in the data that is used to provide SUNA Products and/or Services. Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel RDS-TMC signal at any particular location. 6. Limitation of Liability Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or the manufacturer of your device (the “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to any third party for any damages either direct, indirect, incidental, consequential or otherwise arising out of the use of or inability to use SUNA Products and/or Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier has been advised of the possibility of such damages. You also acknowledge that the neither Intelematics nor any Supplier guarantees nor make any warranties that relate to the availability, accuracy or completeness of SUNA Products and/or Services, and to the extent which it is lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each Supplier excludes any warranties which might otherwise be implied by any State or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA Products and/or Services. 3. Appropriate Use SUNA Products and/or Services are intended as an aid to personal motoring and travel planning, and do not provide comprehensive or accurate information on all occasions. On occasions, you may experience additional delay as a result of using SUNA Products and/or Services. You acknowledge that it is not intended, or suitable, for use in applications where time of arrival or driving directions may impact the safety of the public or yourself. 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services while driving You, and other authorised drivers of the vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or Services are available or installed and active, remain at all times responsible for observing all relevant laws and codes of safe driving. In particular, you agree to only actively operate SUNA Products and/or Services when the Vehicle is at a complete stop and it is safe to do so. 7. Please Note Great care has been taken in preparing this manual. Constant product development may mean that some information is not entirely up-to-date. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. 541 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Radio Frequency Statement SYNC Version FCC Identification Number IC Identification Number 3.0 ACJ-SYNCG3-L 216B-SYNCG3-L 3.1 ACJ-FA-170-BCARHS 216B-FA170BCARHS 3.2 ACJ-FG-185-SG32MH 216B-FG185SG32MH TYPE APPROVALS WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term "IC:" before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) Argentina These devices comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. The device does not cause harmful interference. 2. The device accepts any interference received, including interference that could cause undesired operation. E207816 Brazil E197509 542 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Canada Mexico IC: 850K-11545917 European Union EU E253812 E253813 E207818 Moldova Ghana E253824 Jordan E197811 Morocco E253823 Malaysia E207821 Oman E253822 E253817 543 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Philippines South Africa E198001 E198002 Russia South Korea E253816 E253819 Serbia Taiwan E197844 Singapore E203679 Ukraine E253820 E253818 544 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices United Arab Emirates Jordan E207817 United States of America FCC ID: OUC11545917 E269660 Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid Range Radar Morocco Argentina E269661 South Africa E269659 Ghana E269664 E269662 545 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices United Arab Emirates Canada IC: 850K-11545917 Djibouti E269663 Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive Anti-Theft System E274068 Argentina Ghana E274065 E269674 Brazil E269675 546 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Jamaica Morocco E274067 E269670 Jordan Paraguay E269666 E274066 Malaysia Pakistan E269673 E275754 547 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Serbia Ukraine E269672 E269671 Singapore United Arab Emirates E269676 E269668 South Africa United States of America FCC ID: OUC11545917 E269667 548 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Vietnam Jamaica E269677 E272193 Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio Transceiver Module Jordan Canada IC: 3659A-F03AM315RX IC: 3659A-F04AM902TRX Djibouti E272194 Morocco E272192 E269683 549 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Pakistan South Africa E269684 E269685 Paraguay Ukraine E272195 E269682 Serbia United Arab Emirates E269681 E272196 550 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices United States of America South Africa FCC ID: LTQF03AM315RX FCC ID: LTQF04AM902TRX Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind Spot Information System Canada RSS-310 compliant, per FCC Test report no.: 1-8707/14-01-03 Ghana E269696 United Arab Emirates E269695 Malaysia E269694 United States of America FCC ID: OAYSRR3B E269697 551 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC 3 Vietnam Brazil E252722 E269693 Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless Charging United Arab Emirates E282218 Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise Control Module Canada E272903 IC: 3432A-0065TR South Korea United States of America FCC ID: L2C0065TR Radio Frequency Certifications for Body Control Module Canada IC: 7812A-A2C738448 Model # : M : A2C750526 Model # : M : A2C750561 E273475 552 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Appendices United States of America FCC ID: M3NA2C738448 Model # : M : A2C750526 Model # : M : A2C750561 Radio Frequency Certification for Keys and Remote Controls Canada IC : 7812A-A2C931423 IC: 7812A-A2C931426 IC: 3248A-A08TAA IC: 3248A-A08TDA United States of America FCC ID : M3N-A2C931423 FCC ID : M3N-A2C931426 FCC ID : N5F-A08TAA FCC ID : N5F-A08TDA Radio Frequency Statement for Audio Unit Canada IC: 3043A-UP375AHU United States FCC ID: NT8-16UP375AHU 553 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing 554 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index 1 Air Filter 180 Degree Camera.....................................215 Alarm See: Changing the Engine Air Filter............304 See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................76 Camera Views......................................................216 Using the System................................................216 Ambient Lighting...........................................89 Adjusting the Brightness...................................89 Changing the Color.............................................89 Switching Ambient Lighting Off.....................89 Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................89 4 4WD Anti-Theft Alarm............................................76 See: Four-Wheel Drive.....................................188 Arming the Alarm.................................................76 Disarming the Alarm...........................................76 A Appendices.....................................................514 Apps.................................................................460 A/C .................................................................................460 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link...................462 See: Climate Control.........................................129 About This Manual...........................................7 ABS At a Glance........................................................16 Audible Warnings and Indicators...........102 See: Brakes...........................................................193 Automatic Transmission Warning Chime.................................................................103 Engine On Warning Chime..............................102 Headlamps On Warning Chime....................102 Key in Ignition Warning Chime.......................102 Keyless Warning Alert ......................................102 Parking Brake On Warning Chime................102 ABS driving hints See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes................................................................194 Accessories.....................................................491 Exterior Style........................................................491 Interior Style.........................................................491 Lifestyle..................................................................491 Peace of Mind......................................................491 Audio Control...................................................79 Seek and Media....................................................79 Accessories Audio System................................................362 See: Replacement Parts Recommendation............................................12 General Information.........................................362 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/ SYNC.............................................................366 ACC See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............218 Accessing the Clock Settings.......................366 Accessing the Media Source Menu............366 Accessing the Menu.........................................366 Accessing the Phone Features.....................366 Accessing the Sound Settings.....................366 Adjusting the Volume......................................366 Changing Radio Stations................................367 Ejecting the CD...................................................367 Inserting a CD......................................................367 Listening to a CD................................................367 Listening to Satellite Radio............................367 Listening to the Radio......................................367 Menu Structure..................................................368 Muting the Audio................................................367 Playing or Pausing Media................................367 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off.........367 Using a Cell Phone............................................367 Active Park Assist........................................206 Using Active Park Assist..................................207 Adjusting the Headlamps........................299 Vertical Aim Adjustment................................299 Adjusting the Pedals......................................81 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Manual Adjustable Steering Column.............................................................77 Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles With: Power Adjustable Steering Column.............................................................77 End of Travel Position.........................................78 Memory Feature....................................................78 Airbag Disposal...............................................52 Air Conditioning See: Climate Control.........................................129 555 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.............................................................368 Using the Display Control...............................367 Using the Number Block.................................368 Switching the Climate Control On and Off........................................................................133 Switching the Heated Seats On and Off........................................................................133 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/FM/CD.................................................364 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/CD...........................130 Adjusting the Volume......................................365 Changing Radio Stations................................365 Ejecting the CD...................................................365 Inserting a CD......................................................365 Selecting the Audio Modes............................365 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........365 Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.............................................................365 Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................130 Setting the Temperature.................................130 Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................131 Switching Defrost On and Off.........................131 Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off.........................................................................131 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off................................................................131 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off........................................................................132 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off........................................................................132 Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off.........................................................................131 Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off................................................................131 Switching the Climate Control On and Off.........................................................................131 Switching the Heated Seats On and Off.........................................................................131 Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/ FM/CD...........................................................363 Accessing the Sound Settings......................363 Adjusting the Volume......................................364 Changing Radio Stations................................364 Ejecting the CD...................................................364 Inserting a CD.....................................................364 Switching the Audio Unit On and Off........364 Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.............................................................364 Autolamps........................................................85 Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........................................................85 Automatic High Beam Control..................87 Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles With: Premium AM/FM/CD....................132 Automatic High Beam Indicator....................88 Switching the System On and Off.................87 Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents...................................................................132 Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents...................................................................132 Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................132 Setting the Temperature..................................132 Switching Auto Mode On and Off................132 Switching Defrost On and Off........................133 Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off........................................................................133 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off...............................................................133 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off........................................................................133 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off........................................................................133 Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off........................................................................133 Automatic Transmission...........................184 Brake-Shift Interlock Override......................186 If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow...................................................................187 SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission...................................................185 Understanding the Positions of Your Automatic Transmission............................184 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................293 Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™............293 Adding Transmission Fluid ............................294 Checking the Transmission Fluid Level...................................................................293 Autowipers.......................................................82 Autowipers Settings............................................83 Auxiliary Power Points................................162 110 Volt AC Power Point...................................162 556 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Catalytic Converter.......................................181 12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................162 Locations...............................................................162 On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)....................182 Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) Testing...................................................182 B Center Console..............................................164 Battery See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................296 Rear Seat Armrest..............................................164 Second Row Center Console.........................164 Blind Spot Information System...............231 Changing a Bulb..........................................300 ....................................................................................231 Switching the System On and Off...............232 System Errors......................................................232 Using the Blind Spot Information System...............................................................231 Front Direction Indicator..................................301 Front Fog Lamp..................................................302 Headlamp.............................................................301 Headlamp High Beam.....................................302 LED Lamps...........................................................303 License Plate Lamp..........................................304 Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing Lamp.................................................................303 BLIS See: Blind Spot Information System...........231 Bonnet Lock Changing a Fuse..........................................280 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........282 Booster Seats..................................................29 Fuses......................................................................280 Types of Booster Seats......................................30 Changing a Road Wheel...........................334 Brake Fluid Check........................................295 Brakes...............................................................193 Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly Information.....................................................334 Tire Change Procedure....................................335 General Information..........................................193 Changing the 12V Battery.........................296 Changing the Engine Air Filter................304 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................298 Breaking-In.....................................................255 Bulb Specification Chart..........................360 C Front Wiper Blades...........................................298 Rear Window Wiper Blade.............................299 Checking MyKey System Status...............62 Cabin Air Filter...............................................138 Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™.................................................347 MyKey Distance....................................................62 Number of Admin Keys......................................63 Number of MyKeys..............................................63 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates...........................................................350 Specifications.....................................................348 Checking the Wiper Blades.....................298 Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance.................................................42 Child Restraint Positioning..........................31 Child Safety.......................................................18 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Duratec..........................................................351 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates...........................................................355 Specifications......................................................352 General Information.............................................18 Child Safety Locks..........................................33 Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................355 Left-Hand Side......................................................34 Right-Hand Side...................................................34 Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold Climates...........................................................359 Specifications......................................................357 Child Seats.........................................................19 Cleaning Leather Seats..............................310 Cleaning Products......................................306 Capacities and Specifications...............340 Cargo Nets......................................................239 Car Wash Cleaning the Engine...................................308 Cleaning the Exterior.................................306 Materials...............................................................306 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................306 Cleaning the Headlamps................................307 Exterior Chrome Parts......................................307 557 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Exterior Plastic Parts........................................307 Stripes or Graphics............................................307 Underbody............................................................307 Under Hood..........................................................307 Switching the Rear Ventilated Seats On and Off.............................................................446 Switching the Ventilated Seats On and Off......................................................................446 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and Instrument Cluster Lens........................309 Cleaning the Interior...................................309 Climate Control.............................................129 Climate Controlled Seats..........................155 Cooled Seats........................................................156 Heated Seats........................................................155 Mirrors....................................................................309 Cleaning the Wheels....................................311 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades...........................................................308 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................62 Climate............................................................444 Coolant Check See: Engine Coolant Check...........................289 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........51 Creating a MyKey............................................61 Programming and Changing Configurable Settings...............................................................62 Accessing Rear Climate Controls................446 Accessing the Climate Control Menu........444 Directing the Airflow........................................444 Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator..........446 Setting the Blower Motor Speed.................444 Setting the Temperature................................444 Switching Auto Mode On and Off...............444 Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off......................................................................445 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off.............................................................445 Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off......................................................................445 Switching Rear Auto Mode On and Off......................................................................446 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off......................................................................445 Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off......................................................................444 Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On and Off.............................................................445 Switching the Climate Control On and Off......................................................................445 Switching the Heated Exterior Mirrors On and Off.............................................................445 Switching the Heated Rear Window On and Off......................................................................445 Switching the Heated Seats On and Off......................................................................445 Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On and Off.............................................................445 Switching the Rear Climate Controlled Seats On and Off.........................................446 Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and Off......................................................................446 Cross Traffic Alert........................................232 Blocked Sensors.................................................234 Switching the System Off and On...............235 System Errors......................................................235 System Lights, Messages and Audible Alerts.................................................................234 System Limitations...........................................235 Using the Cross Traffic Alert System..........233 Cruise Control.................................................80 Principle of Operation........................................217 Cruise control See: Using Cruise Control.................................217 Customer Assistance.................................264 D Data Recording..................................................9 Event Data Recording..........................................10 Service Data Recording........................................9 Daytime Running Lamps............................86 Type One - Conventional (Non-Configurable).......................................86 Type Two - Configurable...................................86 Declaration of Conformity........................542 Radio Frequency Statement.........................542 Digital Radio..................................................370 HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting..............................................371 Direction Indicators.......................................88 Doors and Locks.............................................65 Driver Alert......................................................225 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................225 USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................226 558 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45 Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™..................................................341 Children and Airbags..........................................46 Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment........................................................45 Drivebelt Routing...............................................342 Entertainment..............................................434 Driving Aids.....................................................225 Driving Hints...................................................255 Driving Through Water...............................256 DRL AM/FM Radio......................................................435 Apps.......................................................................443 Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................442 CD (If equipped).................................................441 HD Radio™ Information (If Available)........................................................438 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated)........................................................436 Sources..................................................................435 Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information................................443 USB Ports.............................................................443 See: Daytime Running Lamps........................86 E Economical Driving.....................................255 Electromagnetic Compatibility...............514 Emission Law................................................180 Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited Tampering Acts and Maintenance...........181 Tampering With a Noise Control System..............................................................180 Environment......................................................15 Essential Towing Checks..........................250 Before Towing a Trailer.....................................251 Hitches..................................................................250 Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)........................................252 Safety Chains......................................................250 Trailer Brakes........................................................251 Trailer Lamps........................................................251 When Towing a Trailer......................................251 End User License Agreement..................516 VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) ..................................516 Engine Block Heater....................................170 Using the Engine Block Heater........................171 Engine Coolant Check...............................289 Adding Coolant..................................................289 Coolant Change..................................................291 Engine Coolant Temperature Management..................................................292 Fail-Safe Cooling................................................291 Recycled Coolant................................................291 Severe Climates..................................................291 Event Data Recording See: Data Recording..............................................9 Export Unique Options.................................14 Exterior Mirrors.................................................91 Auto-dimming Feature......................................93 Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................92 Blind Spot Information System......................93 Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................93 Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................92 Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................93 Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................93 Memory Mirrors ....................................................93 Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................91 Engine Emission Control...........................180 Engine Immobilizer See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75 Engine Oil Check..........................................287 Adding Engine Oil...............................................287 Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L EcoBoost™.................................................286 Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................287 Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™................................................340 F Fastening the Seatbelts..............................36 Drivebelt Routing...............................................340 Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................38 Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37 Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................36 Engine Specifications - 3.5L Duratec.........................................................340 Flat Tire Drivebelt Routing................................................341 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 559 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Gearbox Floor Mats......................................................256 Fog Lamps - Front See: Transmission..............................................184 General Information on Radio Frequencies...................................................53 See: Front Fog Lamps........................................88 Foot Pedals See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................81 Intelligent Access.................................................53 Ford Credit..........................................................11 General Maintenance Information.......495 US Only......................................................................11 Multi-Point Inspection.....................................497 Owner Checks and Services.........................496 Protecting Your Investment..........................495 Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................495 Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?.....................................................495 Ford Protect...................................................493 Ford Protect Extended Service Plan (CANADA ONLY)..........................................494 Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S. Only)..................................................................493 Four-Wheel Drive.........................................188 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and Canada..........................................................267 Getting the Services You Need..............264 Principle of Operation......................................188 Front Fog Lamps............................................88 Front Parking Aid.........................................203 Away From Home.............................................264 Obstacle Distance Indicator.........................204 Global Opening................................................91 Front Passenger Sensing System............46 Fuel and Refueling........................................172 Fuel Consumption........................................179 Moonroof..................................................................91 Remote Control Front Windows.....................91 H Advertised Capacity...........................................179 Fuel Economy.......................................................179 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................174 Fuel Quality - E85.........................................173 Handbrake See: Parking Brake.............................................194 Hazard Flashers...........................................259 HDC Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel Vehicles..............................................................173 Switching Between E85 and Gasoline.............................................................174 See: Using Hill Descent Control...................200 Headlamp Adjusting Fuel Quality - Gasoline................................172 See: Adjusting the Headlamps....................299 Choosing the Right Fuel...................................172 Headlamp Exit Delay....................................86 Headrest Fuel Shutoff...................................................259 Fuses..................................................................271 Fuse Specification Chart............................271 See: Head Restraints.........................................139 Head Restraints............................................139 Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........276 Power Distribution Box.....................................271 Adjusting the Head Restraint........................140 Tilting Head Restraints .....................................141 Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................137 Heated Rear Window..................................137 Heated Seats.................................................154 G Garage Door Opener....................................157 Garage Door Opener Front Seats............................................................154 Second Row Heated Seats.............................155 See: Universal Garage Door Opener............157 Heated Steering Wheel...............................80 Heating Gauges...............................................................96 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............99 Fuel Gauge.............................................................99 Information Display.............................................98 Type 1........................................................................96 Type 2........................................................................97 Type 3.......................................................................98 See: Climate Control.........................................129 Hill Start Assist..............................................194 Switching the System On and Off...............195 Using Hill Start Assist.......................................195 560 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate..........................................................134 Remote Start........................................................125 Seats........................................................................125 Starting System..................................................126 Terrain Management System.........................126 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................126 Traction Control...................................................127 Trailer.......................................................................127 Transmission.........................................................127 Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather.............................................................136 General Hints.......................................................134 Quickly Cooling the Interior.............................135 Quickly Heating the Interior............................135 Recommended Settings for Cooling...........136 Recommended Settings for Heating..........135 Installing Child Restraints...........................20 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes............................................................194 Home Screen................................................426 Hood Lock Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20 Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)............................................25 Using Tether Straps.............................................27 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........282 Instrument Cluster........................................96 Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................85 Instrument Panel Overview........................16 Interior Lamps.................................................88 Ignition Switch...............................................166 In California (U.S. Only)............................265 Information Display Control......................80 Information Displays...................................104 Battery Saver.........................................................89 Dome Lamp...........................................................88 Front Interior Lamps...........................................89 Rear Interior Lamps............................................89 General Information..........................................104 Interior Mirror...................................................94 Information Messages.................................115 Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................94 Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................94 I 4WD..........................................................................116 Adaptive Cruise Control....................................116 AdvanceTrac™.....................................................116 Alarm........................................................................117 Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................117 Automatic High Beam Control........................117 Battery and Charging System.........................118 Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System.....................................................118 Brake System........................................................119 Doors and Locks..................................................119 Driver Alert..............................................................119 Electronic Stability Control.............................120 Engine.....................................................................120 Fuel..........................................................................120 Hill Descent Control..........................................120 Hill Start Assist.....................................................121 Keys and Intelligent Access.............................121 Lane Keeping System........................................122 Maintenance.........................................................122 MyKey......................................................................123 Park Aid..................................................................124 Park Brake..............................................................124 Power Steering....................................................124 Pre-Collision Assist............................................125 Introduction.........................................................7 J Jump Starting the Vehicle........................260 Connecting the Jumper Cables....................260 Jump Starting.......................................................261 Preparing Your Vehicle....................................260 Removing the Jumper Cables........................261 K Keyless Entry...................................................68 SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad................................................................68 Keyless Starting............................................166 Ignition Modes......................................................167 Keys and Remote Controls.........................53 L Lane Keeping System................................226 Switching the System On and Off...............227 Liftgate...............................................................70 561 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Lighting Control..............................................84 Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and Off..............................................................130 Switching Recirculated Air On and Off.......................................................................130 Switching the Air Conditioning On and Off........................................................................129 Switching the Climate Control On and Off........................................................................129 Switching the Rear Climate Control On and Off.......................................................................130 Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............85 Headlamp High Beam.......................................84 Lighting..............................................................84 General Information...........................................84 Load Carriers See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers............240 Load Carrying................................................239 Load Limit........................................................241 Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type Vehicles............................................................246 Vehicle Loading - with and without a Trailer..................................................................241 Manual Liftgate...............................................70 Closing the Liftgate.............................................70 Opening the Liftgate...........................................70 Manual Seats.................................................142 Locking and Unlocking.................................65 Lumbar Adjustment..........................................143 Moving the Seat Backward and Forward.............................................................142 Recline Adjustment...........................................142 Activating Intelligent Access...........................66 Autolock...................................................................67 Battery Saver.........................................................68 Illuminated Entry..................................................67 Illuminated Exit.....................................................68 Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the Key Blade...........................................................65 Power Door Locks................................................65 Remote Control....................................................65 Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead Transmitter........................................................66 Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys.......................................................................67 Media Hub.......................................................375 Memory Function.........................................146 Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................147 Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob......................................................................146 Saving a PreSet Position.................................146 Message Center See: Information Displays...............................104 Mirrors Luggage Covers............................................240 Lug Nuts See: Windows and Mirrors...............................90 Mobile Communications Equipment.......13 Moonroof..........................................................94 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 Bounce-Back.........................................................95 Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............95 Opening and Closing the Sunscreen............95 Venting the Moonroof........................................95 M Maintenance..................................................282 Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™.................................................342 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............343 Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................344 MyKey — Troubleshooting..........................63 MyKey™............................................................60 General Information.........................................282 Manual Climate Control.............................129 Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents...................................................................129 Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air Vents...................................................................129 Locking the Rear Climate Control................130 Setting the Blower Motor Speed..................129 Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed.................................................................130 Setting the Rear Temperature.......................130 Setting the Temperature.................................129 Switching Defrost On and Off.......................129 Principle of Operation........................................60 N Navigation......................................................452 cityseeker.............................................................459 562 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Post-Crash Alert System..........................262 Power Door Locks Destination Mode..............................................454 Map Mode............................................................452 Navigation Map Updates...............................460 Navigation Menu................................................457 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................460 SYNC AppLink....................................................459 Waypoints............................................................458 See: Locking and Unlocking.............................65 Power Liftgate...................................................71 Hands-Free Feature.............................................73 Obstacle Detection..............................................73 Opening and Closing the Liftgate....................71 Setting the Liftgate Open Height...................72 Stopping the Liftgate Movement...................72 Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........498 Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................498 Normal Maintenance Intervals....................499 Power Seats....................................................143 Adjusting the Lumbar Support.....................144 Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion ......................................144 O Oil Change Indicator Reset......................288 Oil Check Power Steering Fluid Check....................296 Power Windows.............................................90 See: Engine Oil Check......................................287 Accessory Delay.....................................................91 Bounce-Back.........................................................90 One-Touch Down................................................90 One-Touch Up......................................................90 Window Lock..........................................................91 Opening and Closing the Hood..............282 Closing the Hood...............................................283 Opening the Hood.............................................282 Ordering Additional Owner's Literature.....................................................269 Pre-Collision Assist.....................................236 Using the Pre-Collision Assist System...............................................................237 Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........269 Overhead Console.......................................165 Protecting the Environment........................15 Puncture P See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 Parking Aids...................................................202 R Principle of Operation......................................202 Parking Brake.................................................194 Passenger Knee Airbag................................49 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................75 Rear Parking Aid...........................................202 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................203 Rear Passenger Climate Controls..........136 SecuriLock®...........................................................75 PATS Directing Air to the Overhead Air Vents..................................................................136 Directing Air to the Rear Footwell Air Vents..................................................................136 Rear Climate Control Lock Indicator...........136 Setting the Rear Blower Motor Speed........137 Setting the Rear Temperature........................137 Switching the Rear Heated Seats On and Off........................................................................137 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................75 Pedals..................................................................81 Perchlorate.........................................................11 Personal Safety System™..........................43 How Does the Personal Safety System Work?..................................................................43 Phone..............................................................446 During a Phone Call..........................................450 Making Calls........................................................449 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First Time..................................................................446 Phone Menu.........................................................447 Receiving Calls...................................................450 Smartphone Connectivity...............................451 Text Messaging....................................................451 Rear Seats........................................................147 Adjusting the Rear Seats..................................147 Rear Under Floor Storage.........................239 Adjustable Load Floor......................................239 Cargo Management System.........................239 Rear View Camera........................................212 Camera Guidelines.............................................213 563 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Manual Zoom.......................................................215 Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................214 Rear Camera Delay............................................215 Using the Rear View Camera System.........213 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance...................................258 Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance...................................258 Rear View Camera Roadside Emergencies..............................258 Roof Racks and Load Carriers................240 See: Rear View Camera....................................212 Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........83 Adjusting the Crossbar.....................................241 Thumbwheel Kit..................................................241 Rear Camera Washer..........................................83 Rear Window Washer.........................................83 Rear Window Wiper Blade...............................83 Running-In See: Breaking-In.................................................255 Running Out of Fuel.....................................174 Recommended Towing Weights...........248 Refueling..........................................................176 Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel Container...........................................................175 Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................175 Refueling System Overview............................176 Refueling System Warning..............................178 Refueling Your Vehicle.......................................177 S Remote Control..............................................53 Car Finder................................................................58 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................53 Intelligent Access Key.........................................54 Memory Feature....................................................57 Remote Start.........................................................58 Replacing the Battery.........................................55 Sounding the Panic Alarm................................58 Safety Canopy™............................................49 Safety Precautions.......................................172 Satellite Radio...............................................372 Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN).................................................................373 Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............373 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................373 Troubleshooting.................................................374 Remote Start.................................................138 Automatic Settings............................................138 Heated and Cooled Features.........................138 Last Settings........................................................138 Scheduled Maintenance Record...........503 Scheduled Maintenance..........................495 Seatbelt Extension........................................42 Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39 Seatbelt Reminder........................................40 Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................311 Replacement Parts Recommendation........................................12 Belt-Minder™.......................................................40 Collision Repairs....................................................12 Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs..................................................................12 Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12 Seatbelts...........................................................35 Principle of Operation.........................................35 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Chime..............................................................40 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control............................................................59 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)..............................................................269 Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)..............................................................269 Roadside Assistance..................................258 Conditions of operation....................................40 Seats.................................................................139 Security...............................................................75 Settings...........................................................463 911 Assist..............................................................468 Ambient Lighting................................................475 Bluetooth..............................................................465 Clock......................................................................465 Display....................................................................476 General...................................................................473 Media Player.......................................................464 Mobile Apps..........................................................471 Navigation............................................................469 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance.......................................................259 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance Program Coverage.................259 Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance.......................................................259 564 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Steering Wheel................................................77 Storage Compartments.............................164 Sunroof Phone.....................................................................465 Radio......................................................................468 Sound.....................................................................463 Valet Mode............................................................477 Vehicle....................................................................475 Voice Control.......................................................476 Wi-Fi & Hotspot..................................................473 See: Moonroof.......................................................94 Sun Visors.........................................................94 Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................94 Supplementary Restraints System.........44 Side Airbags.....................................................48 Side Sensing System.................................204 Principle of Operation........................................44 Symbols Glossary.............................................7 SYNC™ 3.........................................................414 Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................205 Sitting in the Correct Position..................139 Snow Chains General Information..........................................414 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.......................477 SYNC™ Applications and Services........................................................392 See: Using Snow Chains.................................329 Spare Wheel See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 911 Assist...............................................................392 SYNC Mobile Apps............................................394 Special Notices................................................12 New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12 Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility Type Vehicles........................................13 On Board Diagnostics Data Link Connector............................................................13 Special Instructions..............................................12 Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............13 Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............13 SYNC™............................................................376 Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance...............................................501 Terrain Control...............................................199 The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program (U.S. Only)......................266 Tire Care...........................................................316 General Information..........................................376 SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................406 T Technical Specifications See: Capacities and Specifications............340 Exceptions............................................................502 Speed Control Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................317 Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading..............................................................316 Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall............................................................318 Temperature A B C..............................................317 Traction AA A B C...............................................316 Treadwear.............................................................316 See: Cruise Control.............................................217 Stability Control............................................197 Principle of Operation.......................................197 Starter Switch See: Ignition Switch...........................................166 Starting a Gasoline Engine........................167 Automatic Engine Shutdown........................169 Failure to Start.....................................................168 Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................170 Important Ventilating Information...............170 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Moving...............................................................169 Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is Stationary.........................................................169 Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................167 Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................167 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........330 Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure Monitoring System........................................331 Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System ......................................332 Tires See: Wheels and Tires......................................314 Towing a Trailer.............................................247 Starting and Stopping the Engine.........166 Load Placement.................................................247 General Information..........................................166 Towing Points................................................263 Steering...........................................................235 Installing the Recovery Hook.........................263 Recovery Hook Location.................................263 Electric Power Steering...................................235 565 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 2.3L EcoBoost™........................................252 USB Port..........................................................375 Using Adaptive Cruise Control................218 Emergency Towing............................................252 Automatic Cancellation...................................221 Blocked Sensor...................................................223 Canceling the Set Speed.................................221 Changing the Set Speed..................................221 Detection Issues.................................................222 Following a Vehicle............................................219 Hilly Condition Usage........................................221 Overriding the Set Speed...............................220 Resuming the Set Speed.................................221 Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed..............219 Setting the Gap Distance...............................220 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off.......................................................................222 Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On........................................................................219 Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........224 System Not Available.......................................223 Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™............252 Emergency Towing............................................253 Recreational Towing.........................................253 Towing..............................................................247 Traction Control............................................196 Principle of Operation......................................196 Trailer Sway Control...................................248 Transmission Code Designation............346 Transmission..................................................184 Transporting the Vehicle...........................262 Type Approvals.............................................542 Radio Frequency Certification for Keys and Remote Controls...........................................553 Radio Frequency Certifications for Blind Spot Information System...........................551 Radio Frequency Certifications for Body Control Module..............................................552 Radio Frequency Certifications for Cruise Control Module..............................................552 Radio Frequency Certifications for Mid Range Radar...................................................545 Radio Frequency Certifications for Passive Anti-Theft System.......................................546 Radio Frequency Certifications for Radio Transceiver Module.....................................549 Radio Frequency Certifications for SYNC 3...........................................................................552 Radio Frequency Certifications for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)...............542 Radio Frequency Certifications for Wireless Charging...........................................................552 Radio Frequency Statement for Audio Unit.....................................................................553 Using Cruise Control....................................217 Canceling the Set Speed..................................217 Changing the Set Speed...................................217 Resuming the Set Speed.................................218 Setting the Cruise Speed..................................217 Switching Cruise Control Off..........................218 Switching Cruise Control On...........................217 Using Four-Wheel Drive............................188 Driving In Special Conditions With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)...........................189 How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles.............................................................189 Using Hill Descent Control......................200 Principle of operation......................................200 Using hill descent control..............................200 Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems..........................................................63 Using Snow Chains.....................................329 Using Stability Control...............................198 Using Summer Tires...................................329 Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player.............................................................397 U Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™.................................................283 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec.........................................................284 Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™.................................................285 Universal Garage Door Opener................157 Accessing Your USB Song Library................401 Bluetooth Devices and System Settings............................................................403 Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port...........................................................397 Media Menu Features.....................................400 Media Voice Commands................................398 HomeLink Wireless Control System............157 566 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Engine......................................................................312 Fuel system...........................................................312 General....................................................................311 Miscellaneous......................................................312 Removing Vehicle From Storage...................312 Tires..........................................................................312 USB 2.....................................................................403 Voice Commands for Audio Sources........404 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone...........380 Accessing Features through the Phone Menu..................................................................385 Accessing Your Phone Settings...................388 Bluetooth Devices.............................................389 Making Calls........................................................384 Pairing a Phone for the First Time................381 Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................382 Phone Options during an Active Call.........384 Phone Voice Commands................................382 Receiving Calls...................................................384 System Settings................................................390 Text Messaging..................................................386 Ventilation See: Climate Control.........................................129 VIN See: Vehicle Identification Number............345 Voice Control....................................................79 W Warning Lamps and Indicators................99 Using Terrain Control..................................199 Using Traction Control...............................196 Adaptive Cruise Control....................................99 Anti-Lock Braking System................................99 Automatic High Beam Control.....................100 Battery....................................................................100 Blind Spot Monitor............................................100 Brake System.......................................................100 Cruise Control......................................................100 Direction Indicator.............................................100 Door Ajar...............................................................100 Engine Coolant Temperature........................100 Engine Oil..............................................................100 Fasten Safety Belt...............................................101 Front Airbag...........................................................101 Front Fog Lamps.................................................101 Heads Up Display................................................101 High Beam.............................................................101 Hood Ajar................................................................101 Lane Keeping Aid.................................................101 Liftgate Ajar...........................................................101 Low Fuel Level......................................................101 Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................101 Low Washer Fluid................................................101 Parking Lamps......................................................101 Powertrain Fault..................................................101 Service Engine Soon..........................................102 Stability Control..................................................102 Stability Control Off..........................................102 Transmission Tow/Haul...................................102 Switching the System Off...............................196 System Indicator Lights and Messages..........................................................196 Using a Switch.....................................................196 Using the Information Display Controls.............................................................196 Using Voice Recognition...........................378 Audio Voice Commands.................................428 Climate Voice Commands.............................429 Initiating a Voice Session................................378 Mobile App Voice Commands......................432 Navigation Voice Commands........................431 Phone Voice Commands................................429 SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice Commands.....................................................432 System Interaction and Feedback..............379 Voice Settings Commands............................433 Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program (Canada Only).........................267 V Vehicle Care..................................................306 General Information.........................................306 Vehicle Certification Label.......................346 Vehicle Identification Number................345 Vehicle Storage...............................................311 Washer Fluid Check....................................296 Washers Battery.....................................................................312 Body..........................................................................311 Brakes......................................................................312 Cooling system....................................................312 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................306 Waxing............................................................308 567 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing Index Wheel Nuts See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 Wheels and Tires..........................................314 General Information..........................................314 Technical Specifications.................................338 Windows and Mirrors...................................90 Windshield Washers.....................................83 Front Camera Washer........................................83 Windshield Wipers.........................................82 Speed Dependent Wipers................................82 Wiper Blades See: Checking the Wiper Blades.................298 Wipers and Washers.....................................82 568 Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201807, First-Printing